0% found this document useful (0 votes)

202 views

Picker Elite 1500 5000 and MTX Generator

Uploaded by

Miguel Dias

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

202 views

Picker Elite 1500 5000 and MTX Generator

Uploaded by

Miguel Dias

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 388

GE Medical Systems Modality: XR

Picker Elite 1500/5000 and Alignment and Calibration

MTX Generator Component Locations

Error Codes

Functional Checks

Logic and Block Diagrams

Preventive Maintenance

Software and Diagnostics

Theory

Troubleshooting

How to Use this EPST

Self-Paced Training Modules

Reference Materials
This program and its contents are RESTRICTED to GE Medical Systems and approved
licensees. For GE Medical Systems and approved licensee personnel only. If you are not Feedback to Author
a GE Medical Systems or approved licensee employee, you must close this application
immediately. Disclosure to third parties prohibited. GES-produced documents are not
intended for use as documentation for field-based diagnostic imaging equipment. Notes
Copyright GE Medical Systems 2002.
GE Medical Systems Picker Elite 1500/5000 and MTX Generator Alignment and Calibration

ALIGNMENT AND CALIBRATION

MTX Generator Bearing Adjustments for the Elite 5000
Translation Chain Adjustment for the Elite 5000
Maximum Fluoro kV Calibration (MTX Generator)
Vertical Power Assist Drive Assembly Chain
MTX RAD kV Calibration Adjustment for the Elite 5000
MTX Pulsed Fluoro Calibration Spotfilm Device Leveling for the Elite 5000
MTX Filament Calibration X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 5000
MTX AEC Calibration
Modifying MTX Generator APR Data
1725 Spotfilm Device (SFD)
HMS High Speed Starter Configuration and 1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and
Alignment Testing

Elite 1500/5000 Table Ceiling Tube Mount (CTM)

PFM-90 CTM Calibration and Testing
Elite Field Balance Instructions
Collimatic 4 Calibration
Elite Electrical Calibration
Vertical Power Assist Drive Assembly Chain
Adjustment for the Elite 1500
Spotfilm Device Leveling for the Elite 1500
X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 1500

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Self-Paced Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Training
GE Medical Systems Picker Elite 1500/5000 and MTX Generator Alignment and Calibration

Maximum Fluoro kV Calibration (MTX Generator)

Perform the following steps to calibrate Fluoro Maximum 9. Press any program button to exit the test mode.
kV:
10. If this is the last test to be made, open the Service
1. Set fluoro kV for maximum. In manual mode, turn the Test switch.
manual brightness POT at the 1A fully clockwise. In
auto mode, block the 1A with a lead.
2. Make a fluoro exposure and read the peak kV. If kV
is not the desired maximum of 125kV, then record
the difference. For example, if max fluoro is 128kV,
then record the difference as +3.
3. Close the service test switch in the console.
4. Press the INFO button, then press the + or - buttons
repeatedly until the upper display reads "Tech
Configuration".
5. Press the INFO button again to enter the test mode.
6. Select the desired technique by pushing the correct
tech button.
7. Press the INFO button repeatedly until the lower
display reads "Max Fluoroscopic kV: xxxkV"
8. Use the "+" or "−" buttons to modify the Max kV by
the difference measured above. For the example in
step 2, with a difference of +3, press the minus
button three times.

MTX RAD kV Calibration

1. Perform the following steps to calibrate the RAD kV. 8. Press the INFO button several times until "kV
Correction:" is displayed.
2. Attach a scope lead to TP1 on the Measurement
PCB 52. 9. Using the "+" and "-" buttons select the kV
correction. If 78 kV was measured, then indicate +02
3. Select 80kVp and make exposures at various mA
for the correction.
stations. Note the kV difference, if any. If there is no
difference, then the kV calibration is done. If there is 10. Exit the calibration by pressing any anatomical
a difference, go to step 4. button.
4. Place the service switch located on the console in Note The procedure above only compensates in the
the "Service Position". This switch is located on the range of +16 or -15. If an adjustment is required
front edge of the Mother Board. outside this range then R50 on the IVC PCB will
need to be adjusted. Turning the POT clockwise
If you are not sure of the position, press the INFO
reduces the kV.
button by the top display and use the "+" and "-" (to
the right of the INFO button) to scroll through the
menus. If there are several menus that include "Tech
Button Configuration", "Filament Calibration", then
the switch is in the Service Position.
5. Scroll through the main menu until "Tube
Configuration" is displayed.
6. Press the INFO button on the console.
7. Press the specific "Technique" button (i.e., Over
table, Fluoro, and Bucky) that uses the tube to be
calibrated.

MTX Pulsed Fluoro Calibration

Make sure the Digital system is working properly for the 4. Select pulsed fluoro at 15 frames/second.
calibration.
5. Using the first position of the footswitch, press and
1. Place the service switch in the "Service Position". hold until the display reads "Calibration Done".
This switch is located on the front edge of the Mother
6. Release the footswitch.
Board.
7. Exit the calibration by pressing any anatomical
If you are not sure of the position, press the INFO
button.
button by the top display and use the "+" and "-" (to
the right of the INFO button) to scroll through the
menus. If there are several menus that include "Tech
Button Configuration", "Filament Calibration", then
the switch is in the Service Position.
2. Scroll through the main menu until "Pulsed Fluoro
Calibration" is displayed.
3. Press the INFO button on the Console.
The display should read "CAL 40 KV: OFFSET".

MTX Filament Calibration

The following is a brief explanation for calibrating the 5. Press the INFO button on the console.
tube filaments. If any further information is necessary
6. When "MAKE TUBE SELECTION" is displayed on
contact an contact the online Center.
the lower display, press the TECHNIQUE button
1. Place the service switch in the "Service Position". (i.e., Over table, Fluoro, Bucky, etc.) that uses the
This switch is located on the front edge of the Mother tube to be calibrated.
Board.
7. The upper display indicates the:
If you are not sure of the position, press the INFO
• Tube number (T1, T2, etc.).
button by the top display and use the "+" and "-" (to
the right of the INFO button) to scroll through the • Filament number (1=large or 2=small).
menus. If there are several menus that include "Tech
• Tube type.
Button Configuration", "Filament Calibration", then
the switch is in the Service Position. • Date of last calibration attempt and whether the
the filament data is good or bad.
If you are performing a tube calibration, then go to
step 2. If you are performing a tube filament • Filament limit setting to 5.6 Amps (adjust this
calibration, go to step 4. using the "+ and -" buttons).
2. Scroll through the main menu and write down the 8. Select the filament to be calibrated by using the
Tube Counter Information before performing step 3. Filament Select buttons.
3. Scroll through the main menu until "Clear Data for
Tube Install" is displayed. The filament data and tube
counter is reset.
4. Scroll through the main menu until "Filament
Calibration" is displayed.
Continued on next page

MTX Filament Calibration, continued

9. Verify the filament data reads "Bad". If this is a new 14. Repeat steps 8 through 13 for the other filament.
tube installation, ensure the filament data is cleared.
15. Exit the calibration by pressing any anatomical
If "Bad" is not displayed, then momentarily press and
button.
release the PREP button. The display should now
read "BAD". 16. If needed, proceed to Maximum Fluoro kV
Calibration (MTX Generator) or MTX Pulsed
10. Make sure the collimator shutters and doors to the
Fluoro Calibration.
room are closed.
11. Press and hold the EXPOSURE button. There will be
a short delay and the generator will start making
exposures. Continue holding the button down until
"EMISSION FOUND" is displayed, then release the
button.
12. Press and hold the EXPOSURE button again.
Continue holding the button down until "LOW LINE
DONE" is displayed, then release the button.
13. Press and hold the EXPOSURE button again.
Continue holding the button down until "Calibration
Done" is displayed, then release the button.
The display should now read "GOOD".

MTX AEC Calibration

AEC Calibration 4. Select 60 kVp and verify the reference voltage reads
This procedure is performed after clearing the AEC CAL 5.00V.
Data. All calibration at this time is using Center Cell with 5. Make an exposure with a cassette in the Bucky then
the equivalent of six inches of water in the field. Ensure develop the film.
the Minimum Response Time is correct for the pickup
selected. 6. If the density is not correct, adjust the PMT High
Voltage on the AEC Power Supply PCB (Rack B far
1. Place the service switch in the "Service Position". right). The potentiometer corresponds with the
This switch is located on the front edge of the Mother technique buttons on the console.
Board.
7. Once the film density is at the desired value, press
If you are not sure of the position, press the INFO the INFO button to enter the reference voltage into
button by the top display and use the "+" and "-" (to the memory.
the right of the INFO button) to scroll through the
menus. If there are several menus that include "Tech
Button Configuration", "Filament Calibration", then
the switch is in the Service Position.
2. Scroll through the main menu until "AEC Pickup
Calibration" is displayed.
3. Press the INFO button on the console.
Be sure to select the middle screen button before
proceeding with the calibration. The display will
show the Tech. Screen, Reference voltage, and the
selected technique parameters.
Continued on next page

MTX AEC Calibration, continued

AEC Calibration, continued 13. After the calibration is complete, scroll through the
8. Select 90kVp and make an exposure with a loaded kVp settings and write down the reference voltages
cassette in the Bucky (do not worry about the for each kVp selection along with the High Voltage
setting for each technique selection.
reference voltage at this time).
If the RAM is lost, use the "Pickup Data Edit"
9. Develop the film and measure the density.
command from the console to manually insert the
10. If the density is too dark, press the "-" button below values. You can also use this command to fine-tune
the upper display. If the density is too light, press the any of the kVp stations for the desired density. If
"+" button below the upper display. there is an overall drift in density for the technique
The reference voltage changes to the new setting. selected, then "tweaking" the high voltage is
recommended.
11. Repeat steps 8 through 10 until the desired density
is obtained.
12. Now perform steps 8 through 10 using 120kVp.
All steps between the calibrated steps will be
interpolated by the system. If you desire the best
accuracy for the kVp settings in between, then steps
8 through 11 must be repeated for every 10 kVp
increments between the calibrated steps above.

HMS High Speed Starter Configuration and Alignment

Check the following configurations of the HMS starter to Chassis Configuration
ensure proper operation: 1. Verify that 277V AC is present at J1.
• Chassis Configuration If a different voltage is present, change the line
• Processor Board Configuration matching tap on the auto transformer (1T1). Select
the tap on transformer 1T2 for the closest incoming
• Interface PCB Switch Settings
line voltage.
You need a Frahm Resonant Reed Tachometer to
2. Use the following table to determine if jumper wires
measure actual rotor RPM.
need to be added to the CB511 PCB in the starter.
DANGER Before working with the X-ray tube
Stator
stator terminal, turn off the centroid This
Requires
Switching
Hangover
power or circuit breaker that supplies jumpers for Controlled
generator... occurs in
the high speed starter main power. CB511 PCB by...
the...
MTX* Yes Power Module Generator
Vector 100 Yes Power Module Starter

* Change the program generator "start-run delay" to

"brake time" for a longer back up time.

HMS High Speed Starter Configuration and Alignment, continued

Processor Board Configuration
Switches SW1, SW2, and SW3 on the processor PCB
control the amount of time the start voltage is applied to
the tube stator.
Example
For a Dunlee tube with a 5 inch Q stator anode placed
under-table use a 4.5 start time (switch configutation
#15 in the table).
Use the PCB Switch Settings table to ensure the PCB
switch settings are correct for the tube. Use the shortest
time combination that fully accelerates the anode, but
complies with the manufacture’s ratings to avoid
overheating the tube housing.

Continued on next page

HMS High Speed Starter Configuration and Alignment, continued

PCB Switch Settings
Acceleration Time SW1 – Tube 1 SW1 – Tube 2 SW2 – Tube 3

Low High Lo-Hi 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4

1 0.8 0.8 0.7 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off
2 0.9 0.9 0.75 On Off Off Off On Off Off Off On Off Off Off
3 1.0 1.0 0.8 Off On Off Off Off On Off Off Off On Off Off
4 1.2 1.2 0.85 On On Off Off On On Off Off On On Off Off
5 1.3 1.3 0.9 Off Off On Off Off Off On Off Off Off On Off
6 1.5 1.5 1.0 On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off
7 1.6 1.7 1.2 Off On On Off Off On On Off Off On On Off
8 1.8 1.8 1.25 On On On Off On On On Off On On On Off
9 2.0 2.0 1.5 Off Off Off On Off Off Off On Off Off Off On
10 2.5 2.5 1.8 On Off Off On On Off Off On On Off Off On

HMS High Speed Starter Configuration and Alignment, continued

PCB Switch Settings, continued
Acceleration Time SW1 – Tube 1 SW1 – Tube 2 SW2 – Tube 3

Low High Lo-Hi 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4

11 3.0 3.0 2.2 Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On
12 3.2 3.2 2.4 On On Off On On On Off On On On Off On
13 3.5 3.5 2.6 Off Off On On Off Off On On Off Off On On
14 4.0 4.2 3.1 On Off On On On Off On On On Off On On
15 4.5 4.8 3.2 Off On On On Off On On On Off On On On
16 5.0 5.2 3.5 On On On On On On On On On On On On

Continued on next page

HMS High Speed Starter Configuration and Alignment, continued

Verifying the Interface PCB Interface PCB Switch Settings for SW1
The switches on the Interface PCB:
Switch SW1 Setting Description
• control the DC Brake On/Off time.
1 On Disables hangover for Tube 1
• set the rotor hangover time.
2 On Disables hangover for Tube 2
• enable the hangover. Off Enables hangover
• extend the hangover. 3 On Disables hangover Tube 3
• set the drive for Q or non-Q stators. 4-5 – Hold time

Note The DC brake and extended hangover are only 6 On Disables the DC brake for Tube 1
used for a 5 inch stator. 7 On Disables the DC brake for Tube 2
Use the following tables to determine the correct switch Off Enables the DC brake
setting. 8 On Disables the DC brake for Tube 3

Continued on next page

HMS High Speed Starter Configuration and Alignment, continued

Verifying the Interface PCB, continued Interface PCB Switch SW1 Hold Settings
Interface PCB Switch Settings for SW2 The normal hold values are in effect unless extended
hangover is selected for each tube.
Switch SW2 Setting Description
Normal Extended
1 On Selects Q stator for Tube 1 Hold Hangover SW1-4 SW1-5
2 On Selects Q stator for Tube 2 (minutes) (minutes)
Off Selects non-Q stator 1.0 10 Off Off
3 On Selects Q stator for Tube 3 1.5 15 On Off
4 On Enables extended hangover for Tube 2.0 20 Off On
1
3.0 30 On On
5 On Enables extended hangover for Tube
2
Off Select normal Hold Time
6 On Enables extended hangover for Tube
3

Collimatic 4 Calibration
Overview Procedure
This calibration procedure requires a special tool that This procedure applies when using either the calibration
can only be acquired by the site. However, if you cannot tool or the momentary push button.
acquire the tool, a momentary push button can be used.
1. Acquire an 8x10 and 14x17 cassette from the site.
When using a momentary push button, connect it from
2. Attach the calibration tool to the Collimator Power
J202-5 to J202-8 on the Power Supply PCB. The
Supply.
Collimator Power Supply PCB can be in the following
three areas of the system (depending on system type) Ensure S3-2 in the Collimator Power Supply is
and is identified by a black toggle switch, two red-capped turned off so the system can write to RAM. Also,
fuses, and two black-capped fuses: when calibrating the Table Bucky ensure the SID to
the Bucky is 40 inches.
• On the back of the Ceiling Tube Mount (top back just
under the cable strain relief) 3. Place the 8x10 cassette in the Bucky with the 8
inches in the Longitudinal direction. Slide the
• In the Centroid cabinet (Vector and Elite Systems)
cassette tray into position.
• In the table (Clinix E, Clinix R, Clinix VPE)
4. Press the button on the calibration tool once. This
Use the Picker Aspen Help line to acquire the calibration places the Collimator in calibration mode and
tool from another FE in the field. Note, this may take prevents the collimator blades from automatically
some time. sizing.
Before starting the calibration, ensure the Collimator is 5. Ensure the SID indicator on the front of the
not in the "bypass" mode by turning the key (located on Collimator indicates 40 inches and set both the
the back of the Collimator) so it can be removed. Most of Transverse and Longitudinal blades to 8 inches.
the time the key can only be removed when Positive
6. Press the button on the calibration tool.
Beam Limitation (PBL) is enabled.
Continued on next page

Collimatic 4 Calibration, continued

Procedure, continued 16. Remove the cassette and rotate it so the 14 inches is
7. Remove the cassette and rotate it so the 10 inches is in the Longitudinal direction. Slide the tray into
in the Longitudinal direction. Slide the tray into position.
position. 17. Press the button on the calibration tool.
8. Press the button on the calibration tool. 18. Press the button on the calibration tool again to store
the SID POT position.
9. Remove the cassette and place the 14x17 inch
cassette in the Bucky with the 14 inches in the The Collimator now auto-collimates to the size of the
Longitudinal direction. Slide the tray into position. cassette in the tray. If it did not size correctly, S3-2
10. Set both the Transverse and Longitudinal blades to may be in the wrong position.
14 inches. 19. Proceed to System Operation Verification if
calibration is complete. If calibration is not complete
11. Press the button on the calibration tool.
you must calibrate the Wall Unit.
12. Remove the cassette and rotate it so the 17 inches is
in the Longitudinal direction. Slide the tray into When calibrating the Wall Unit, note that the Longitudinal
direction is the Vertical direction. Ensure the SID
position.
indicator on the front of the Collimator is set correctly for
13. Press the button on the calibration tool. 40, 48, or 72 inches. Step 18 is bypassed automatically
Do not remove the Cassette. because there isn't a SID POT used for the Wall Unit.

14. Set both the Transverse and Longitudinal blades to It is very common for most Wall Units to be set up at 40
and 72 inch SID's. Sometimes there are two SID
17 inches.
switches close to each other in a fluoro room because
15. Press the button on the calibration tool. one of them is set up for 40 inches to the Table in the
upright position. Be sure to measure the SID manually if
there is any doubt.

Collimatic 4 Calibration, continued

System Operation Verification
1. Place S3-2 in the Collimator Power Supply in the On
position (do not power off the Unit) and remove the
calibration tool.
2. Verify proper calibration at the Table and Wall Unit.
3. Install all covers in their proper positions for normal
operation.
4. Test the system one last time before allowing the
Customer to use it.

Elite Field Balance Instructions

The following components may require Field balancing. • Center field selected at the generator.
• Bucky Ion Chamber Field Balancing 5. Make an exposure and verify a positive ramp at TP6
on the Table Interface PCB.
• SFD Ion Chamber Field Balancing
Note If the ramp is negative then make sure that W1 in
• SFD Ion Chamber Gain Adjustment
the ion chamber preamp is from 9 to 10 and that
• Bucky Ion Chamber Gain Adjustment there are 300 volts from the junction of R19 and
PS1 to DC return (TP4) on the Table Interface
The ion chamber fields must be balanced before
PCB -.
calibrating the system AEC.
6. Remove the absorber.
Bucky Ion Chamber Field Balancing
Procedure 7. Reduce the kV to 50 kV (about 2 mAs) and make a
fixed time exposure onto a 14 in. X 14 in. or larger
1. Place jumper JP2 in the kV comp bypass position
film.
(pin 1 to 2).
8. Use the exposure to identify the location of the three
2. On the Table Interface PCB, turn the table short-time
fields.
comp POT R41 fully CCW (this is a 30-turn POT).
9. Mark the three fields.
3. Place an 6-inch absorber (water or plexiglass) in the
field. 10. With the fields marked use this film to locate the
center of the three fields.
4. Set up the generator as follows:
11. Insert 6 inches of absorber in the field.
• AEC mode
• 80 kVp
• 100 mA
Continued on next page

Elite Field Balance Instructions, continued

Bucky Ion Chamber Field Balancing If the densities are close, then adjust R16 for the left
Procedure, continued field, R13 for the center field and R10 for the right
12. Set the generator to: field. (R10, R13, R16 are in the ion chamber
preamp.) Turn the POTs CCW to increase mAs.
• 80 kV
If the densities are not close a complete adjustment
• 100 mA of the fields balance is required. To perform a
• AEC On complete adjustment start with step 18.

• Center field selected 17. Set the ion chamber preamp POT R13 to mid-range.
This is done by turning the POT 31 turns clockwise
13. Set the system to a 40-inch SID. Make an exposure then turning the POT counterclockwise 15 turns.
and adjust R42 on the Table Interface for a density
of 1. 18. Make an exposure with center field selected and
adjust Table Interface POT R42 for a film density of
14. Select the right field and make an exposure. 1.
15. The density at the right field location should be the 19. Record the density.
same as the center field.
20. Select the right field and adjust R10 for the same
16. Select the left field and make an exposure. The density.
density at the left field location should be the same
as the center field. 21. Select left field and adjust R16 for the same density.
Measure the density at the center of the field as
If all three field locations do not have the same described in steps 7-10.
density then the ion chamber fields will need to be
adjusted.

Continued on next page

Elite Field Balance Instructions, continued

SFD Ion Chamber Field Balancing Procedure 6. Remove the absorber.
1. Place jumper JP1 (on the Table Interface PCB) in 7. Reduce the kV to 50 kV (about 2 mAs) and make a
the kV comp bypass position (Pin 1 to 2). fixed time exposure onto a 14 in. X 14 in. or larger
2. On the Table Interface PCB, adjust the table short- film.
time comp. POT R20 fully CCW (this is a 30-turn 8. Use the exposure to identify the location of the three
POT). fields.
3. Place an 6-inch absorber (water or plexiglass) in the 9. Mark the three fields.
field.
10. With the fields marked use this film to locate the
4. Set up the generator as follows: center of the three fields.
• AEC mode 11. Insert 6 inches of absorber in the field.
• 80 kVp 12. Set the generator to:
• 100 mA • 80 kV
• Center field selected at the generator. • 100 mA
5. Make an exposure and verify a positive ramp at TP2 • AEC On
on the Table Interface PCB.
• Center field selected
Note If a negative ramp is generated then make sure
13. Select a film format that will be less than 6 x 4 in. (4
that W1 in the ion chamber preamp is from 9 to
on 1 with a 9.5 x 9.5 in. cassette). This selects the
10 and that there is -300 volts between the junc-
small center field.
tion of R19 and PS1 to DC return (TP4) on the
Table Interface PCB. 14. Make an exposure.
Continued on next page

Elite Field Balance Instructions, continued

SFD Ion Chamber Field Balancing Procedure, If the densities are not close, a complete adjustment
continued of the fields balance is required. To perform a
15. Adjust POT R25 on the Table Interface for a density complete adjustment start with step 19.
of 1. 19. Set the ion chamber preamp POT R10 to mid-range.
This is done by turning the POT 31 turns clockwise
16. Record the density of the exposure.
then turn the POT back counterclockwise 15 turns.
17. Select a format that will select the large center field
(1 on 1 with a 9.5 x 9.5 cassette) and make an 20. Make an exposure with center field selected (4 on 1
exposure. The density should be the same as the with a 9.5 x 9.5 in. cassette) and adjust table
interface POT R25 for a density of 1.
small field.
21. Record the density.
18. Select a format that will select all the fields (14 x 14
in. cassette with 1 on 1 selected) and make an 22. Select large center field (1 on 1 with a 9.5 x 9.5 in.
exposure. cassette) and adjust R13 for the same density.
The density at the 2 side fields should be the same 23. Select all the fields (14 x 14 in cassette with 1 on 1
as the small center field. selected) and adjust R16 for the same density.
If the all three field locations do not have the same
density then the ion chamber fields will need to be
adjusted.
If the densities are close then adjust R16 for the side
fields, R13 for the center large field and R10 for the
small center field. (R10, R13, R16 are in the ion
chamber preamp - turn CCW to increase mAs.)

Elite Field Balance Instructions, continued

Bucky Ion Chamber Gain Adjustment 9. Lower the filmer to the radiation probe.
1. On the Table Interface PCB, place jumper JP1 in the 10. Set the radiation meter to dose mode.
bypass mode (Pin 1 to 2).
11. Set the Generator for:
2. Setup the system as follows:
• 110 kVp
• Select AEC
• Large focal spot
• Select Normal density
• 200 mA
• Insert a loaded 9.5 x 9.5 in. cassette
• For exposure times greater then 50 msec Adjust
• Select 4 on 1 film format the mA setting.
• Place a 9 inch water phantom in the field 12. Make an exposure.
3. At the Table Interface PCB, place a scope probe on 13. Record the peak voltage at TP2 on the Table
U3 pin 1. Interface PCB.
4. Adjust R19 preamp for 0 volts at the ion chamber. 14. Record the radiation dose. (measured in MR)
5. Place a scope probe on TP2 on the Table Interface 15. Divide the voltage by the radiation dose out of the
PCB. paddle.
Ion chamber gain = Peak ramp voltage/radiation
6. From the Table Interface PCB trigger the scope
dose (in MR)
using ALE test point TP9.
16. Adjust R20 (in the ion chamber preamp) for a gain of
7. Place a radiation probe centered to the X-ray source,
2 volts/MR.
on the 9 inch absorber.
8. Remove the grid from the X-ray field.

Elite Field Balance Instructions, continued

Bucky Ion Chamber Gain Adjustment 9. Set the Generator for:
1. On the Table Interface PCB, place jumper JP2 in the • 110 kVp
bypass mode (pin 1 to 2).
• Large focal spot
2. Set up the system as follows:
• 200 mA
• Select AEC
• To achieve an exposure times greater then 50
• Select Normal density msec Adjust the mA setting.
• Place a 9 inch water phantom in the field 10. Make an exposure.
3. At the Table Interface PCB, place a scope probe on 11. Record the peak voltage at TP6 on the Table
U7 pin 1. Interface PCB.
4. Adjust R19 at the ion chamber preamp for 0 volts. 12. Record the radiation dose. (measured in MR)
5. Place a scope probe on TP6 on the Table Interface 13. Divide the voltage by the radiation dose out of the
PCB. paddle.
Ion chamber gain = Peak ramp voltage/radiation
6. From the Table Interface PCB trigger the scope
dose (in MR)
using the ALE at test point TP9.
14. Set R20 (in the ion chamber preamp) for a gain of 2
7. Center a radiation probe on the bucky tray.
volts/MR.
8. Set the radiation meter to dose mode.

Elite Electrical Calibration

The following items are Include in the electrical 3. Move the table horizontal according to the level.
calibration for the 1500/5000.
4. Disengage the tilt POT by loosening the tilt POT
• Tilt Limit Switch Check coupling set screw in the shaft coupling.
• Table Tilt Potentiometer Adjustment 5. While one person monitors the table position
indicator on the table control panel, slowly turn the
• SID POT Adjustment
POT until the tilt indicator reads -3°.
• Collimator PCB Calibration
Note If the tilt POT is turned too fast, it will cause an
• Power Assist PCB (D-0109-05-512) overspeed signal. This will display an error on the
table control panel. When this happens the
• Motor Controller PCB (G140587)
microprocessor must be reset before the table
Tilt Limit Switch Check can be operated.
Table tilt ranges from +88° (vertical) to -50° 6. Tighten the tilt POT coupling set screw.
(Trendelenburg) these limits are controlled by
7. With an assistant watching the drive gear on the
microprocessors.
sector gear, tilt the table in the positive direction until
Cams activate ultimate limit switches at +89° and -51° the drive gear is close to the end of the sector gear
positions to stop tilting 1° beyond the electronic stops. teeth or until tilting is interrupted.
A mechanical stop is provided beyond +90°. DO NOT TILT THE TABLE UNTIL THE DRIVE
GEAR REACHES THE END OF THE SECTOR
To check operation of the ultimate limit switches, do the GEAR TEETH.
following:
The system is set correctly when the tilt indicator
1. Move the table to a near horizontal position. displays about 86° (actually 89°) and the ultimate tilt limit
switch interrupts tilting.
2. Place a level on the table top.
Continued on next page

Elite Electrical Calibration, continued

Tilt Limit Switch Check, continued microprocessor must be reset before the table
Verify that the ultimate tilt limit has taken effect by trying can be operated.
to tilt the table toward horizontal. All tilting will be 14. Tilt the table in the Trendelenburg direction until the
prevented if the ultimate limit is actuated. horizontal carriage is about to touch the rear
electronics cabinet or until tilting is interrupted
If tilting is not interrupted at this point, troubleshoot and
repair the tilt limit circuit. (whichever comes first).

8. To return the table to normal operation, bypass the CAUTION Make sure the horizontal carriage
affected limit switch. does not hit the electronics cabinet.
9. Tilt the table toward horizontal until the tilt limit switch Severe damage can occur.
is released.
The system is set correctly when the tilt indicator
10. Reconnect the tilt limit switch. displays about 48° (actually 51°) and the ultimate tilt limit
switch interrupts tilting.
11. Using a level to verify, move the table back to a
horizontal position. Verify that the ultimate tilt limit has taken effect by trying
12. Disengage the tilt POT by loosening the tilt POT to tilt the table toward horizontal. All tilting will be
coupling set screw in the shaft coupling. prevented if the ultimate limit has been actuated.

13. While one person monitors the table position If tilting is not interrupted at this point, troubleshoot and
repair the tilt limit circuit.
indicator on the table control panel, slowly turn the
POT until the tilt indicator reads +3°.
Note If the tilt POT is turned too fast, it will cause an
overspeed signal. This will display an error on the
table control panel. When this happens the
Continued on next page

Elite Electrical Calibration, continued

Tilt Limit Switch Check, continued
The system is set correctly when the tilt indicator
displays about -50° when the microprocessor engages to
limit tilting.
If this happens, the ultimate limit switch activation will
have no effect. Tilt the table back down below -50° to
reset the system.
15. To return the table to normal operation, bypass the
affected limit switch.
16. Tilt the table toward horizontal until the tilt limit switch
is released.
17. Reconnect the tilt limit switch.
18. To return the table to normal operation, bypass the
affected limit switch.
19. Tilt the table toward horizontal until the tilt limit switch
is released.
20. Reconnect the tilt limit switch.

Elite Electrical Calibration, continued

Table Tilt Potentiometer Adjustment The system is set correctly when tilting is limited at 88°
vertical and -50° Trendelenburg and that the ultimate
The table tilt potentiometer must be adjusted for proper
limits are not actuated at these points.
table tilt angles.
Verify that the ultimate tilt limit has taken effect by trying
A 10-turn potentiometer is used, which rotates
to tilt the table toward horizontal. All tilting will be
approximately 5 turns for 138° of table tilting.
prevented if the ultimate limit has been actuated.
To set the table tilt potentiometer:
1. Turn the table power ON.
2. Place a level on the table top.
3. Tilt the table until it is level.
4. Loosen the POT shaft coupling set screws to
disengage the tilt POT.
5. While one person monitors the table position
indicator on the table control panel, slowly turn the
POT until the tilt indicator reads zero.
Note If the tilt POT is turned too fast, it will cause an
overspeed signal. This will display an error on
the table control panel. When this happens the
microprocessor must be reset before the table
can be operated.
6. Tighten the tilt POT coupling set screw.

Elite Electrical Calibration, continued

SID POT Adjustment 9. Move the SFD vertically and check that the vertical
power assist motor stops running at the same
If the SID POT is adjusted, the Collimator PCB
distance from the top as it does from the bottom.
Calibration procedure must be performed.
• If the vertical assist motor continues to run at the
Both this procedure and the Collimator PCB
top or at the bottom, return the SFD to minimum
Calibration must be done before the Tilt Limit Switch
SID and set the POT for a slightly lower voltage
Check procedure is performed.
reading on the meter. Re-check the operation.
To set the SID POT, do the following:
• If the vertical drive motor does not run at all,
1. Position the SFD to the minimum SID position. return the SFD to minimum SID and set the POT
2. Turn OFF the table power. until the meter reads a little higher. Re-check
operation.
3. Loosen the set screw in the gear on the SID POT
shaft and disengage it. 10. Once the setting is correct, turn off the table power.

4. Pull the Collimator PCB out of the table rear 11. Remove the extender board and install the
Collimator PCB.
electronics rack and install it on the extender.
12. If the SID POT has been adjusted, perform the
5. Connect a DMM positive lead to pin 89 of the
extender board and the negative lead to TP1 on the Collimator PCB Calibration.
Collimator PCB.
6. Turn ON the table power.
7. Adjust the POT to achieve a meter reading of 1.5
VDC.
8. Engage the POT gear and tighten the set screw.

Elite Electrical Calibration, continued

Collimator PCB Calibration 12. Engage the COMP (compression) lock.
Make sure the SID POT is properly adjusted before 13. Set SW1-1, -2, -3 and -4 to their closed positions.
performing this procedure.
14. Adjust R42 until the DVM indicates 6.75 VDC.
1. Remove the Collimator PCB from card cage at the
Note The 0.75 VDC increase between steps 9 and 11
rear of the table.
is due to the increase in SID from the film plane
2. Install the Collimator PCB on the extender board to the imager amplifier input plane.
(Part No. D0109-05-453).
Interruptor PCB (G140587)
3. Insert the Collimator PCB and extender into the card There are no electrical adjustments on this PCB. To
cage. obtain the best signal or the middle of the sensing range
4. Set switches SW1 -1, -2, -3 and -4 on the Collimator adjust this PCB radially with respect to the slotted wheel.
PCB to open. Power Assist PCB (D-0109-05-512)
5. Connect a DVM to TP5(+) and TP1 (-). • R9 is adjusted for sensitivity of the longitudinal power
6. Set the SFD to the minimum SID position. assist.
Proper adjustment is when the fluoro staging just
7. Adjust R41 to 6.00 volts. moves with 4 pounds of longitudinal force is on the
8. Move the SFD to the maximum SID. SFD control handle.

9. Adjust R43 until the DVM indicates 8.40 volts. • R11 is adjusted for sensitivity of the vertical power
assist in the upward direction.
10. Repeat steps 6 through 9 until both meter readings Proper adjustment is when the SFD moves with 4
are correct. pounds. of upward force on the SFD control handle at
11. Move the SFD vertical to 6.00 volts. its midpoint.
Continued on next page

Elite Electrical Calibration, continued

Collimator PCB Calibration, continued 5. Adjust R45 for zero volts +/- 0.02V.
Power Assist PCB (D-0109-05-512), continued 6. Turn the power off.
• R10 is adjusted for sensitivity of the vertical power 7. Plug P4 back in.
assist in the downward direction.
Proper adjustment is achieved when the SFD moves 8. Connect a scope ground lead to TP13 (or the case of
with 4 pounds. of downward force on the handle VR2)
midway between the ends. 9. Connect the scope probe to TP14 (or right side of
Note It should require 5 to 8 pounds. of force to move R3).
the SFD up or down. The test for proper force on 10. Turn on the power
the SFD control handle must be made at the
middle of the handle. Additional force should 11. Adjust R1 for 50% +/-10% duty cycle when the
increase the speed of movement. appropriate motor controller is activated.

Motor Controller PCB (G140587) 12. Lock the rotor from turning by disconnecting the
brake for the motor being used.
Note Make sure the INTERRUPTOR PCB (G140587)
is properly aligned before performing this proce- 13. Connect DVM across R8.
dure.
Adjusting the Controller Current
1. Turn power off to the table and disconnect P4 from
1. Activate the motion to be adjusted and while the
the motor controller PCB. motion is occurring adjust R44 on the Motor
2. Connect a DVM negative lead to TP13 (or the case Controller PCB for that function to obtain the
of VR2) following values:
Long - 40 mV (4 amps.)
3. Connect a DMV positive lead to TP12 (or U8 pin 14). Trans. - 5 mV (1/2 amps)
4. Turn on power to the table Continued on next page

Elite Electrical Calibration, continued

Collimator PCB Calibration, continued 7. Adjust R65 for best response.
Motor Controller PCB (G140587), continued • Clockwise will cause function to gallop
Adjusting the Tilt Motor Controller • Counterclockwise will cause flutter.
1. Unplug the tilt brake. 8. If further stability is needed adjust R60
2. Connect a DVM across the 0.01 ohm current- counterclockwise.
sensing resistor.
3. Energize the tilt drive and adjust R44 on the tilt drive
motor controller PCB to obtain a meter reading of
250 mV (this represents 25A maximum motor
current).
Note When the table reaches horizontal, the tilt motor
may overpower the brake. If this happens, either
block the rotation or increase the tilt angle to 50
to 70 degrees and then test while tilting vertically.
4. Turn off power and remove any test equipment
installed.
5. Reconnect the brake connector.
Note R19 is factory adjusted for the published speed
specification. Do not exceed the speed specifica-
tions.
6. Adjust R60 fully clockwise.

Elite Electrical Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration 14. Transverse top position gain.
Overview 15. SFD longitudinal position offset.
This procedure consist of 26 screens, referred to as 16. SFD longitudinal position gain.
steps. These steps must be accessed and adjusted in
sequence. The following is a description of each step: 17. Tilt position offset.

1. Longitudinal top speed request offset. 18. Tilt position gain.

2. Longitudinal top speed request gain. 19. SFD vertical position offset.

3. Transverse top speed request offset. 20. SFD vertical position gain.

4. Transverse top speed request gain. 21. Look-up table generation.

5. SFD longitudinal PA request offset. 22. Left wall limit.

6. SFD longitudinal PA request gain. 23. Right wall limit.

7. Tilt speed request offset. 24. Ceiling limit.

8. Tilt speed request gain. 25. SFC Height Limit for Parking and Check-sum
generation.
9. SFD vertical PA request offset.
26. Exit from calibration. Step 26 must be completed to
10. SFD vertical PA request gain. save any new entries. If new entries are made and
11. Longitudinal top position offset. step 26 is not completed entries are lost and the
software will revert to the old values
12. Longitudinal top position gain.
13. Transverse top position offset.
Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued this procedure. Failure to do this may cause
operational errors even though all of the calibration
Overview, continued
values are within range.
The purpose of the system calibration is to establish a
set of reference and scaling factors for position sensors, • If the strain gauges have been set to 5.0 volts during
operator controls and X-ray room dimensions. Once the the last calibration and are again set to 5.0 volts
initial calibration is done at installation, changes are Electrical System Calibration is not necessary. If
required only if any of the following occur: strain gauges have been adjusted to any other value
Electrical System Calibration is necessary.
• The Analog PCB (or any one its major components) is
replaced. • The calibration procedure can be used to check the
parameters a procedure without affecting the
• The table top position POTs are repositioned or calibration. This is done without pressing the [STORE]
replaced. button. If the [STORE] button is pressed for any step,
• Certain error conditions are indicated. the following two items apply.

• The table top is repositioned for different head to foot If the [STORE] push-button has been pressed and the
travel ratios. calibration procedure is exited or interrupted before a
new checksum (step 25) is generated, a checksum
• New software and/or a new EEPROM is installed on error is generated and the entire calibration procedure
the CPU PCB must be redone.
• +5 and/or +/-15 volts regulators on MOTHER PCB are Perform steps 21 to 26 (lookup table, room limits and
replaced. checksum) anytime the [STORE] button has been
Special Notes pressed for any step.

• The strain gauges should be set for 5.0 volts using

Strain Gauge Limit Adjustments before performing Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued then count down from 9 to 0. During this time, do not
use any of table's controls, including SFD power
Overview, continued
assist handle. This will allow the CPU to perform all
• To exit the calibration procedure, place the ENABLE checks and establish functional integrity of the
switch SW1 on I/O #1 PCB to the RUN position. system. Any operation during this time will result in a
error code.
Caution When the table CPU is in the
calibration mode, the normal table top After about 15 sec., "uu" will be displayed indicating
and tilt limits that prevent collisions that the table is ready. If any faults are detected by
are disabled. Monitor all movements the CPU, an error code will be displayed (c5
to avoid collisions and equipment indicates a vertical motion request from the SFD).
damage.
2. Set the ENABLE switch SW1 on I/O #1 PCB to the
CAL position.
Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration Procedure
Note The system consist of 26 screens referred to as 3. Reset the CPU by pressing the RESET button on
steps these steps must be accessed and the CPU PCB. The I/O now displays 01 to indicate
adjusted in sequence. the system is ready for step 1.

In the following procedure, [STEP] and [STORE] refer to • During calibration, the display on I/O #1 PCB
the STEP and STORE buttons on the I/O #1 circuit displays either a calibration step number or a
board. [STEP] and [STORE] (as shown), indicates that calibration error code. During the odd-numbered
these buttons are to be pressed for the function being steps 1 through 19, the table front panel displays the
described. actual voltage of the function selected times 10 (i.e.
35 on the display = 3.5 volts).
1. Turn power ON to the table and filmer.
After initial power-up (or manual reset), "cc" will
appear briefly on the table front panel display and Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued • To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press
[STEP] to go to STEP 2.
Calibration Procedure, continued
• Use the STEP button (SW2) on I/O PCB #1 after STEP 2 - Software number
storing a value or to proceed to the next step STEP 2, only displays the numbers stored in the
without entering a value. software on the front panel for STEP 2. This value
cannot be changed. Press [STEP] to proceed to step 3.
• Use the STORE button (SW3) on I/O PCB #1 to
store an entered value.
STEP 1 - Table Top Longitudinal Speed Request
The front panel displays the actual Table Top
Longitudinal Speed Request signal voltage.
• Acceptable voltage range
4.7 V to 5.3 V
If the voltage is not within this range when the
[STORE] button is pressed, error code C0 is
displayed on I/O #1 and the system will not progress
to STEP 2.
If the voltage displayed is out of range, the
longitudinal strain gauge circuit will have to be
calibrated using the procedures in Strain Gauge
Limit Adjustments.
• To proceed to the next step without entering a value,
press [STEP]. Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued STEP 4 - Software number
Calibration Procedure, continued STEP 4, only displays the numbers stored in the
software on the front panel for STEP 4. This value
STEP 3 - Table Top Transverse Speed Request
cannot be changed.
The front panel displays the actual Table Top Transverse
Speed Request signal voltage. Press [STEP] to proceed to STEP 5.

• Acceptable voltage range

4.7 V to 5.3 V
If the voltage is not within this range when the
[STORE] button is pressed, error code C2 will be
displayed on I/O #1 and the system will not progress
to step 4.
If the voltage displayed is out of range, the
transverse strain gauge circuit must be calibrated
using the procedures in Strain Gauge Limit
Adjustments.
• To proceed to the next step without entering a value,
press [STEP].
• To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press
[STEP] to go to step 4.

Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued STEP 6 - Software number
Calibration Procedure, continued STEP 6, only displays the numbers stored in the
software on the front panel for STEP 6. This value
STEP 5 - Longitudinal SFD Carriage Motion
Request cannot be changed.
The front panel will display the actual Longitudinal SFD Press [STEP] to proceed to STEP 7.
Carriage Motion Request signal voltage.
• Acceptable voltage range
4.9 V to 5.1 V.
If the voltage is not within this range when the
[STORE] button is pressed, error code C4 will be
displayed on I/O #1 and the system will not progress
to step 6.
If the voltage displayed is out of range, the
Longitudinal SFD strain gauge circuit must be
calibrated according to the using the procedures in
Strain Gauge Limit Adjustments.
• To proceed to the next step without entering a value,
press [STEP].
• To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press
[STEP] to go to step 6.

Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued STEP 9 - Vertical SFD Carriage Motion Request
Calibration Procedure, continued The front panel displays the Vertical Motion Request
signal voltage.
STEP 7 - Tilt Speed Request
The front panel will display the actual Tilt Speed Request • Acceptable voltage range
signal voltage. 4.9 V to 5.1 V

• Acceptable voltage range If the voltage is not within this range when the
4.7 V to 5.3 V [STORE] button is pressed, error code C8 will be
displayed on I/O #1 and the system will not progress
If the voltage is not within this range when the to step 10.
[STORE] button is pressed, error code C6 will be
displayed on I/O #1 and the system will not progress If the voltage displayed is out of range, the vertical
to step 8. strain gauge circuit must be calibrated using the
procedures in Strain Gauge Limit Adjustments.
If the voltage displayed is out of range, the tilt strain
gauge circuit will have to be calibrated using the • To proceed to the next step without entering a value,
procedures in Strain Gauge Limit Adjustments. press [STEP].

• To proceed to the next step without entering a value, • To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press
press [STEP]. [STEP] to go to step 10.

• To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press STEP 10 - Software number
[STEP] to go to step 8. STEP 10, only displays the numbers stored in the
software. This value cannot be changed.
STEP 8 - (Software number)
This step only displays the numbers stored in the Press [STEP] to proceed to STEP 11.
software. Press [STEP] to proceed to STEP 9.
Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued • Center the table top and press the [STORE]
button.
Calibration Procedure, continued
STEP 11 - Top Longitudinal Position - Center • Shift the table top 15" to the right of center and
press the [STORE] button again.
Move the table top to the longitudinal center position.
2. 20" of overhang. (20" head, 40" foot).
The front panel displays the actual longitudinal position
signal voltage. • Position the table top so there is 10" of overhang
off the foot end of the Table and press the
• Acceptable voltage range
[STORE] button.
48 (4.9 V) and 52 (5.1 V).
• Position the table top so there is 25" overhang off
If the voltage is not within this range when the
the foot end of the table and press the [STORE]
[STORE] button is pressed, error code U0 will be
button again.
displayed on I/O #1 and the system will not progress
to step 12. 3. 40" of overhang. (40" head, 20" foot)
If the voltage displayed is out of range, the table top • Position the Table Top so there is 10" of
position POT must be disengaged and turned until overhang off the HEAD end of the Table and
the indication is 5 V, and then re-engaged. press the STORE button.
The Table Top offset is determined during the installation
phase of the room. To determine if the table has an
offset, drive the table top toward it’s head end limit.
Use the following procedure to determine which is the
correct alignment procedure to use.
1. 30" of overhang. Standard installation.
Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued STEP 12 - Top Longitudinal Position
Calibration Procedure, continued Move the table top 15 in. to the right from the centered
position.
STEP 11 - Top Longitudinal Position - Center,
continued • Acceptable voltage range
• Position the Table Top so there is 5" of overhang (value in step 11) + 22
off the FOOT end of the Table and press the If the displayed value is incorrect, error code U1 is
STORE button again. displayed indicating that there is a problem with the
If centering calibration is performed as routine top longitudinal position circuit that must be
maintenance, reattaching the table top in step 2 is not corrected.
necessary. • To proceed to the next step without entering a value,
To proceed to the next step without entering a value, press [STEP].
press [STEP]. • To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press
To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press STEP [STEP] to go to step 13.
to go to step 12.

Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued • To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press
[STEP] to go to step 14.
Calibration Procedure, continued
STEP 13 - Top Transverse Position
The table top position for this step is critical. Move the
table top so that there is 27-7/16 in. from the front of the
table body to the rear edge on the transverse top
assembly at the foot end of the table. This measurement
must be accurate.
The front panel will display the actual transverse position
signal voltage.
• Acceptable voltage range
48 (4.8 V) and 52 (5.2 V).
If the voltage is not within this range when the
[STORE] button is pressed, error code U2 will be
displayed on I/O #1 and the system will not progress
to step 14.
If the voltage displayed is out of the acceptable
range, disengage the table top transverse position
POT, turn it until a indication of 50 (5 V) is obtained
and re-engage the POT.
• To proceed to the next step without entering a value,
press [STEP].
Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued STEP 15 - SFD Longitudinal Carriage Position -
Head End
Calibration Procedure, continued
Move the SFD Carriage all the way to the head-end
STEP 14 - Top Transverse Position mechanical stop.
The table top position for this step is critical. Move the
table top so that there is 30-7/16 in. from the front of the The front panel displays the actual longitudinal position
table body to the rear edge on the transverse top signal voltage.
assembly. • Acceptable voltage range
• Acceptable voltage range 32 (3.2 V) to 38 (3.8 V)
The (value in step 13) + 6. If the voltage is not within this range when the
If the display is not correct when the [STORE] button [STORE] button is pressed, error code U4 will be
is pressed, error error code U3 is displayed on I/O displayed on I/O #1 and the system will not progress
#1 and the system will not progress to step 15. to step 16.

If the voltage displayed incorrect there is a problem If the voltage displayed is out of range, disengage
with the table top transverse position circuit that the longitudinal SFD carriage position POT, adjust it
must be corrected. to 35 and re-engage the, POT.

• To proceed to the next step without entering a value, • To proceed to the next step without entering a value,
press [STEP]. press [STEP].

• To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press • To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press
[STEP] to go to step 15. [STEP] to go to step 16.

Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued STEP 17 - Tilt Position - Horizontal
Calibration Procedure, continued Use a precision level on the top of the fluoroscopic rail
and move it exactly horizontal.
STEP 16 - SFD Longitudinal Carriage Position -
Foot End • Acceptable voltage range
Move the SFD Carriage all the way to the foot-end 4.8 V to 5.2 V
mechanical stop. Make sure to compress the shock If the voltage is not within this range when the
absorber. [STORE] button is pressed, error code U6 will be
• Acceptable voltage range displayed on I/O #1 and the system will not progress
The (value in step 15) + 25 to 32. to step 18.
If the voltage is not within this range when the If the voltage is not within this range, disengage the
[STORE] button is pressed, error code U5 will be tilt position POT, slowly adjust it to obtain an
displayed on I/O #1 and the system will not progress indication of 50 (5 V) and re- engage it.
to step 17. • To proceed to the next step without entering a value,
If the voltage displayed is out of range, there is a press [STEP].
problem with the SFD longitudinal position circuit • To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press
that must be corrected. [STEP] to go to step 18.
• To proceed to the next step without entering a value,
press [STEP].
• To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press
[STEP] to go to step 17.

Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued • To proceed to the next step without entering a value,
press [STEP].
Calibration Procedure, continued
STEP 18 - Tilt Position - 45° • To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press
[STEP] to go to step 19.
Caution When the table CPU is in the STEP 19 - SFD Vertical Position - Lower
calibration mode, the normal table top
and tilt limits that prevent collisions Move the myelographic stop all the way down and move
are disabled. Monitor all movements the SFD carriage to its lowest position. Make sure to
to avoid collisions and equipment compress the shock absorber.
damage. • Acceptable voltage range
6 to 22
Use a precision level with a 45° bubble on the top of the
flouroscopic rail and move the table to a 45° angle. If the voltage is not within this range when the
[STORE] button is pressed, error code U8 will be
• Acceptable voltage range
displayed on I/O #1 and the system will not progress
The (value in step 17) + 13 (+/-2)
to step 20.
If the voltage is not within this range when the
If the voltage displayed is out of range, the SID
[STORE] button is pressed, error code U7 will be
position circuit will have to be calibrated according to
displayed on I/O #1 and the system will not progress
the procedure in this manual.
to step 19.
• To proceed to the next step without entering a value,
If the voltage displayed is out of range there is a
press [STEP].
problem with the tilt position circuit that will have to
be corrected. • To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press
[STEP] to go to step 20.
Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued STEP 21 - Lookup Table
Calibration Procedure, continued Note If the STORE button has been pressed for any
any of steps 1 through 20 a new lookup table
STEP 20 - SFD Vertical Position - Upper
must be generated.
Move the SFD carriage to its highest position.
If any of the values of steps 1 through 20 have been
• Acceptable voltage range stored, a new lookup table must be generated by
The (value in step 19) + 68 to 78 pressing [STORE] in this step.
If the voltage is not within this range when the Press [STEP] to proceed to step 22.
[STORE] button is pressed, error code U9 will be
displayed on I/O #1 and the system will not progress
to step 21.
If the voltage displayed is out of range, there is a
problem with the SID position circuit that will have to
be corrected.
• To proceed to the next step without entering a value,
press [STEP].
• To enter a new value, press [STORE] then press
[STEP] to go to step 21.

Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued Press [STEP] to proceed to step 23.
Calibration Procedure, continued Note The table software causes the table tilting speed
STEP 22 - Top Clearance to Left Wall to slow whenever it determines the end of the
table top is within 7" of the wall.
This step must always be performed anytime the STORE
button has been pressed during the calibration If the end of the table top cannot come within 4" of the
procedure. wall when fully extended, press the [CENTER] button on
the table front panel for step 22 instead of the [STORE]
If this step is not performed after the [STORE] button has
button.
been pressed during the calibration procedure the error
code 3U is displayed.

Caution When the table CPU is in the

calibration mode, the normal table top
and tilt limits that prevent collisions
are disabled. Monitor all movements
to avoid collisions and equipment
damage.

To complete step 22 do the following:

With the table horizontal (tilt indicator showing 0°)
move the table top to full extension or as far toward
the head as it should normally travel. Do not set the
top to go less than 4" from the wall.
Press [STORE].
Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued Press [STEP] to proceed to step 24.
Calibration Procedure, continued Note The table software causes the table tilting speed
STEP 23 - Top Clearance to Right Wall to slow whenever it determines the end of the
table top is within 7" of the wall.
This step must always be performed anytime the
[STORE] button is pressed during the calibration If the end of the table top cannot come within 4" of the
procedure. wall when fully extended, press the [CENTER] button on
the table front panel for step 23 instead of the [STORE]
If this step is not performed after the [STORE] button has
button.
been pressed during the calibration procedure the error
code 4U is displayed.
To complete step 23 do the following:
With the table horizontal (tilt indicator showing 0°)
move the table top to full extension or as far toward
the head as it should normally travel. The top
normally should not be set to go less than 4" from the
wall.
With the table horizontal (tilt indicator showing 0°),
move the table top as far toward the foot as it should
normally travel or full extension. Do not set the top to
go less than 4" from the wall.
Press [STORE].

Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued miss the rails when all the way to the front and all the
way to the rear.
Calibration Procedure, continued
STEP 24 - Top Clearance to Ceiling Press [STORE].
This step must always be performed anytime the Press [STEP] to proceed to step 25.
[STORE] button has been pressed for any step in the
Note The table software causes the table tilting speed
calibration procedure.
to slow whenever it determines the end of the
If this step is not performed after the [STORE] button has table top is within 7" of the wall.
been pressed during the calibration procedure the error
If the end of the table top cannot come within 4" of the
code 4U is displayed.
wall when fully extended, press the [CENTER] button on
the table front panel for step 25 instead of the [STORE]
Caution Watch the table top clearance to the
button.
floor while tilting. When the table CPU
is in the calibration mode, the normal
table top and tilt limits that prevent
collisions are disabled. Monitor all
movements to avoid collisions and
equipment damage.

To complete step 24 do the following:

With the table tilted vertical (tilt indicator showing 86
to 88°), move the table top as far toward the ceiling
as normally travel. The top can only be allowed to
extend between the rails of the CTM if the top will
Continued on next page

Elite Electrical System Calibration, continued

Gain Offsets and Limits Calibration, continued Press [STEP] to proceed to step 26.
Calibration Procedure, continued STEP 26 - Exit
STEP 25 - SFC Camera Park Routine and Press [STEP] to exit the calibration procedure.
Checksum
Return enable switch SW1 to the RUN position. Press
A new checksum must be generated anytime the the table CPU [RESET] button.
[STORE] button has been pressed for any step in the
calibration procedure.
To complete step 25, do the following:
Set switch SW2-1 on the CPU PCB to ON for
systems with SFC.
Set switch SW2-1 on the CPU PCB to OFF for non
SFC. This switch will not affect the calibration
procedure and can be set anytime. However, the
switch positions are only read by the CPU during the
power-up routine, so when the switch position is
changed, reset the CPU or power-up for the change
to take effect.
When no SFC is present, any height can be stored.
For systems with a SFC, move the SFC above the tower
at the height that the vertical power assist is to be
disabled (normally 1").
Press [STORE] to generate a new checksum.

Vertical Power Assist Drive Assembly Chain Adjustment for the Elite 1500
If the Vertical Power Assist drive assembly chain slips
teeth when the vertical power assist is operating,
increase the chain tension.
The vertical power assist drive is a separate modular
assembly which bolts to the rear of the horizontal
carriage.
1. Loosen the tensioning bolt and sprocket bracket
mounting screws at the top of the tower.
2. Tighten the tensioning screw until the chain is taut
enough to permit squeezing both sides together with
two fingers with a force of approximately two (2)
pounds.
3. Tighten the bracket mounting screws securely.

Spotfilm Device Leveling for the Elite 1500

The vertical carriage can be adjusted in two directions,
longitudinally and transversely for leveling of the spot
film device.
Note Ensure table is leveled before adjusting vertical
carriage. Do not adjust until the Spotfilm Device
is mounted.
1. Loosen the screws holding bearing carriers to the
vertical carriage.
2. Remove the back-up screw and turn the adjusting
screw to obtain the desired tilt.
3. After level install the back up screw to lock the
adjusting screw in place.

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 1500

To achieve a complete X-ray Beam Alignment the Spotfilm Device Transverse Alignment
following procedures must be performed in order. With the table in the horizontal position, the centerline of
• Spotfilm Device Transverse Alignment the Spotfilm Device film travels along transverse axis
which must be 90° to the table longitudinal axis.
• Checking Vertical Alignment
To check the SFD (Spotfilm Device) alignment:
• Longitudal Alignment
1. Establish table top longitudinal centerline.
• Collimator To X-ray Tube Alignment
Place a piece of markable tape down the center of
• Transverse Alignment the table top and draw a centerline on the tape.
Setup for Alignment Procedures 2. Place another piece of markable tape perpendicular
The X-ray beam alignment can only be verified by using to the table top longitudinal centerline at a
actual X-rays. convenient point where the SFD center can be
placed.
The X-ray tube and SFD centerline must track;
3. Using a framing square, mark a line on the tape at
• Parallel to the longitudinal centerline of the table top
90° to the longitudinal line.
during longitudinal motion.
4. Suspend a plumb-bob from the front handle of the
• Perpendicular to the table top centerline for
SFD. Position the SFD so that the tip of the plumb-
transverse motion.
bob touches the transverse table top line as far
The X-ray tube focal point must line up vertically with the toward the front as possible.
center of the cassette film at minimum and maximum
5. Mark the point where the plumb-bob touches the
SID with table positioned at 0°, 88°, and -15° within 1%
table top as Point A. (Make sure this is on markable
of SID. (Typically less than 4.5 mm at minimum SID.)
tape).
Continued on next page

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 1500, continued

Spotfilm Device Transverse Alignment, 15. Drill new pin holes.
continued 16. Install new pins.
6. Move the SFD toward the rear (make sure it does
not move longitudinally) so that the plumb-bob is as
far toward the rear of the table top as possible.
7. Mark the point where the plumb-bob touches the
table top as Point B. (Make sure this is on markable
tape).
8. If necessary place a piece of markable tape
connecting Point A and Point B.
9. Draw a line through Points A and B (on the tape)
10. Measure at the rear edge of the table top the
distance between the A-B line and the perpendicular
line.
11. If the two lines diverge by more than 1/8" [3 mm], the
vertical column tower must be loosened and rotated.
12. When adjustment (rotation) is necessary, remove
the factory installed pins.
13. Loosen the tower bolts
14. Rotate the column to correct alignment (a
divergence of less than 1/8" [3 mm]).

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 1500, continued

Checking Vertical Alignment 6. Set the SFD to the MASK SIMULATION mode.
Refer to Central X-ray Beam Alignment and II
The X-ray beam must be aligned perpendicular to the
Centering
film plane of the SFD.
7. Move the F/B masks in to 3.0 in.
DANGER X-rays are produced during the
8. Move the H/F mask in to 3.0 in. This will result in a
following procedure. Take appropriate
small 3 in. [7.5 cm] square.
action to avoid radiation exposure.
Failure to comply may cause serious 9. Set up the X-ray generator for a low power fluoro
injury to personnel. exposure.
10. Set up the imaging system to monitor an exposure.
This procedure is for longitudinal centering (top to bottom
on the monitor). The Correct alignment is indicated when 11. Place an alignment template on the table top near
the collimator shutter opening is centered within the the center of the field.
mask opening.
12. Start a fluoro exposure.
Tilt the table vertically for better access to the bottom of
13. While watching the monitor, operate the longitudinal
the SFD.
manual collimator shutters in or out so that the
1. Horizontally position the table. relationship between the masks and the shutters can
be observed on the monitor.
2. Adjust the SFD to the maximum SID position.
The correct mask opening center and the shutter
3. Adjust the SFD so that it is in the transverse center
opening center is within 3 mm as measured on the
position.
template scale on the monitor.
4. Move the bucky out of the field.
Adjustment must be made if the centers are more
5. Turn all locks on the SFD ON. than 15 mm apart longitudinally.

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 1500, continued

Longitudinal Alignment 8. While watching the monitor, operate the longitudinal
manual collimator shutters in or out so the
Collimator To X-ray Tube Alignment
relationship between the masks and the shutters can
This procedure is designed to align the shutters with the be seen on the monitor.
mask longitudinally.
9. Check the longitudinal alignment of the masks and
1. Using the tool-access holes loosen the in the upper shutters at full forward and full rearward SFD
collimator plate. Loosen the three collimator positions. If the alignment is correct, proceed to step
mounting plate bolts. 10.
2. Move the collimator in the direction required to • There should be minimum shifting in alignment of
obtain correct alignment and retighten the bolts. the shutters and masks between maximum and
Note If the system is still not in alignment after step 2 minimum SID. The misalignment must not
additional adjustment are required. This is done exceed 15 mm at maximum SID or 9 mm at
by moving the X-ray tube carriage. To move the minimum SID.
X-ray tube use steps 3 to 6. • When the misalignment exceeds 5 mm at
3. Tilt the table vertical. maximum SID or 9 mm at minimum SID this
indicates that the X-ray tube carriage is not
4. Loosen the carriage mounting bolts. tracking perpendicular to the table longitudinal
5. Adjust the four jacking screws to reposition the X-ray centerline. The X-ray tube carriage orientation
tube carriage within the longitudinal carriage in the must be adjusted. Repeat steps 3-6.
required direction.
6. Tighten the carriage mounting bolts and re-check the
alignment.
7. Start a fluoro exposure. Continued on next page

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 1500, continued

Longitudinal Alignment, continued
Collimator to X-ray Tube Alignment, continued
10. Tape the alignment template in place on the table
top.
11. Tilt the table to 88°.
12. Re-check the longitudinal alignment of the mask to
the shutters.
• The misalignment in the tilted position must not
exceed 15 mm at maximum SID.
• If the alignment shifts more than 15 mm, adjust
the SFD eccentric side bearings.

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 1500, continued

Transverse Alignment b. Move the connecting rod in or out with respect to
With the longitudinal alignment correct, check for the rest of the linkage to obtain the correct
transverse alignment as follows: alignment.

1. Start a fluoro exposure. 4. Check the transverse alignment of the masks and
shutters at maximum and minimum SID.
2. While watching the monitor, operate the transverse
There should be minimum shifting in alignment of the
manual collimator shutters in or out so the
relationship between the masks and the shutters can shutter and masks between maximum and minimum
be seen on the monitor. SID.

Correct alignment (side to side on the monitor) is If the misalignment exceeds 15 mm at maximum SID
or 9 mm at minimum SID the drive rod mounting
with the collimator shutter opening centered in the
the mask opening. bracket must be adjusted.

The preferred alignment is with the mask opening Adjusting The Drive Rod Mounting Bracket
center and the shutter opening center within 3 mm 5. Loosen the mounting screws.
as measured on the template scale while viewed on
the monitor. 6. Adjust the set screws in or out to change the bracket
tilt slightly in the required direction.
Adjustment must be made if the centers are more
than 15 mm apart. 7. Make sure that the drive rod remains aligned with the
latch on the SFD.
3. When alignment of the shutters with the mask in the
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to re-check the alignment.
transverse direction is needed do the following;
a. Loosen the set screws that secure the X-ray
tube carriage connecting rod to the drive rod
assembly.

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 1500, continued

Potential Alignment Problems Excessive Compression Forces
Excessive SFD SAG If compression forces are excessive (greater than 22
If SFD sag exceeds 0.25 inches, perform the following pounds up or down) check for the following causes:
checks: 1. Vertical carriage bearings are pinching the tracks.
1. Check adjustment of horizontal carriage bearings on 2. Safety cable is too tight.
back side of main bearing track welded to the body.
3. Vertical staging is not properly counterbalanced.
2. Check vertical carriage bearing adjustments. (Perform lifting and compressing of vertical carriage
at the tower and not at the SFD handle.
3. Check SFD bearing adjustments.
The force differential between UP and DOWN should
4. Check the SFD cassette carriage in the SFD for
excessive sag. not exceed 3 pounds.)
4. Vertical counterweight box is dragging on the body.
Loosen mounting bolts and align.

Bearing Adjustments for the Elite 5000

The table bearings are adjusted during assembly at the • X-ray Tube Carriage Bearings.
manufacturer. Some table components are equipped
• SFD to X-ray Carriage Bearings for Mechanical
with adjustable bearings, however, some bearings are
Linkage.
not normally load-carrying. These bearings are mounted
on eccentric studs, which permit adjustment of bearing Inspection
clearances on the guide track. The table component being checked should be moved
Note Linear Ball Bearings are not adjustable. through its complete range of motion.
During mechanical inspection all adjustable bearings Table component bearings that pass inspection have a
should be checked for correct adjustment. motion that is smooth, no binding and absent of clunking
or scraping noises.
Table components that can be adjusted in the field are:
Examine bearing tracks for excessive wear or spalling.
• Horizontal Counterweight Bearings (Rear of Body).
(Spalling is defined as removal of metal seen as fine
• Vertical Counterweight Bearings (Inside Table Body metal particles.)
at Rear).
Adjustment
• Horizontal Carriage Bearings (Rear and Front of Adjust bearings so they are tight enough to roll full travel
Body). and loose enough to stop rotation with two fingers for full
• Bucky Bearings (Front & Rear Bucky Tracks). travel. When this is achieved firmly lock in place.
• Bucky Counterweight Bearings (Rear, top of table).
• Vertical Carriage Bearings (Tracks mounted to tower).
• Spotfilm Device Bearings (Mounted in Vertical
Carriage Assembly).

Translation Chain Adjustment for the Elite 5000

1. Using a precision level adjust the table body to level.
2. Place the horizontal in approximately the center.
3. Center the table body on the base.
This is done by measuring the distance from the
sector gear to each end of the table and adjusting
the chain so that both distances are equal.
4. Measure in 15-1/2" inches from the inside of the
chain anchor block.
Note When tightening the chain anchor bolts make
sure to adjust chain tension equally on each end
so that the table body remains centered.
5. Tighten the chain anchor bolts until a 20-lb. pull at
the 15-1/2" point measured in step 3 produces 1/4"
of chain deflection.

Vertical Power Assist Drive Assembly Chain Adjustment for the Elite 5000
The vertical power assist drive is a separate modular
assembly which bolts to the rear of the horizontal
carriage.
The bracket has four bolts that mount it to the horizontal
carriage. The bracket supports the electromagnetic
clutch, potentiometer drive motor, and drive gear
assembly.
The tension should be set to permit squeezing both sides
together with two fingers with a force of approximately
two (2) pounds.
Adjustment
1. At the top of the tower loosen the tensioning bolt and
sprocket bracket mounting screws.
2. Tighten the tensioning screw until the chain is taut
enough to permit squeezing both sides together with
two fingers with a force of approximately two (2)
pounds.
3. Tighten the bracket mounting screws securely.
Note If the chain slips teeth when the vertical power
assist is operating, increase the chain tension.

Spotfilm Device Leveling for the Elite 5000

The vertical carriage can be adjusted in two directions,
longitudinally and transversely for leveling of the spotfilm
device.
Note Make sure the table is level and the Spotfilm
Device is mounted before adjusting the vertical
carriage.
1. Adjust the table body to level.
2. Use a precision level on the spotfilm device to help
determine level.
3. Loosen the screws which clamp the bearing carriers
to the vertical carriage.
4. Adjust each carrier separately by removing the
backup screw and turn the adjusting screw for that
carrier to obtain the desired tilt.
5. After leveling, install the back up screw to lock the
adjusting screw in place.

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 5000

X-ray beam alignment can only be verified by using X- X-ray beam alignment includes the following
rays. adjustments:
When properly adjusted: • Spotfilm Device Transverse Alignment
• The the X-ray tube and SFD centerline track a path • Central X-ray Beam Alignment and II Centering
parallel to the longitudinal centerline of the table top
• Vertical Beam Alignment and II Centering
during longitudinal motion. And track a path
perpendicular to the table top centerline for transverse • Collimator Alignment and Longitudinal Centering
motion.
• Collimator Transverse Centering
• The X-ray tube focal point lines up vertically with the
• Check For SFD SAG
center of the cassette film at minimum and maximum
SID with table positioned at 0°, 88°, and -50° within • Tube Carriage Transverse Centering Switch
1% of SID. (Typically less than 4.5 mm at minimum Adjustment
SID.)
• Filmer Carriage Stop Adjustment

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 5000, continued

Spotfilm Device Transverse Alignment 6. Move the SFD toward the rear (make sure it does
With the table in the horizontal position the centerline of not move longitudinally) so that the plumb-bob is as
the Spotfilm Device film travel along transverse axis. It far toward the rear of the table top as possible.
must be 90° to the table longitudinal axis. 7. Mark the point where the plumb-bob touches the
table top as Point B. (Make sure this is on markable
To check the SFD (Spotfilm Device) alignment, do the
following: tape).

1. Establish table top longitudinal centerline. 8. If necessary place a piece of markable tape
connecting Point A and Point B.
Place a piece of markable tape down the center of
the table top and draw a centerline on the tape. 9. Draw a line through Points A and B (on the tape).

2. Place another piece of markable tape perpendicular 10. Measure at the rear edge of the table top the
distance between the A-B line and the perpendicular
to the table top longitudinal centerline at a
convenient point where the SFD center can be line.
placed. 11. If the two lines diverge by more than 1/8" [3 mm], the
3. Using a framing square, mark a line on the tape at vertical column tower must be loosened and rotated.
90° to the longitudinal line. To rotate the tower perform the following:
4. Suspend a plumb-bob from the front handle of the • Loosen the tower bolts and rotate the tower so that
SFD. Position the SFD so that the tip of the plumb- the plumb-bob on the front of the SFD moves about 1/
bob touches the transverse table top line as far 2 (the divergence distance measured in step 10) in
toward the front as possible. the required direction.
5. Mark the point where the plumb-bob touches the • Tighten the tower mounting bolts and repeat steps 1
table top as point A. (make sure this is on markable through 10 the divergence is less than 1/8" [3 mm].
tape).

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 5000, continued

Central X-ray Beam Alignment and II 8. Select 1:1 format on the SFD.
Centering 9. Apply power to the SFD.
To perform this operation the system must be
10. Press the [CAL] key to display the Super User Menu.
operational with all other system components fully
calibrated. 11. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight
INSTALLATION CALIBRATION.
Note Make sure the DSS or IEP are ON for all the
steps in this section unless otherwise indicated. 12. Press [SELECT]. The INSTALLATION
CALIBRATION MENU is now displayed.
Setting the SFD to the Mask Test Mode
Access the diagnostic display panel located inside the CAUTION Do not select the EEPROM
SFD. This panel not only functions as a display but also initialization menu or change its
as a touch panel for entering various functions. contents. The EEPROM consists of
The following steps are to place the SFD in simulation factory calibration values. Any change
mode and to move the masks to a 3 in. square. to the values in this menu will erase
the factory calibration. Do not select
1. Place the table in a horizontal position. the EEPROM initialization menu or
2. Set the SFD to maximum SID position. change its contents.

3. Set the SFD to the transverse center position. 13. Highlight INHIBIT EXPOSURE TEST (option 3), and
4. Move the bucky out of the field. press [SELECT].

5. Turn all locks on the SFD ON.

6. Set the II magnification to MAG 2.
7. Set the system to the manual brightness mode. Continued on next page

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 5000, continued

Central X-ray Beam Alignment and II 19. Press [RETURN] to return the normal operating
Centering, continued display. The words "Mask Test" are now displayed
under the word FORMAT.
Setting the SFD to the Mask Test Mode, continued
14. Press the [TEST] button. The COLLIMATOR/MASK/ CAUTION Be sure to remove the alignment
AEC TEST MENU is now displayed. template from the SFD before
15. Highlight MASK TEST (option 3), and press restoring power if power is turned off.
[SELECT]. The MASK TEST MENU is now Failure to comply may result in
displayed. damage to the SFD.

Note The mask test menu should display the default

settings of 4.000 for both the F/B and the H/F
masks.
16. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight to the desired
masks (F/B or H/F) and set each to 3.000 using the
OPEN or CLOSE buttons.
The F/B mask range is from 1.000 to 14.25 and the
H/F mask range is 3.000 to 13.75.
17. When both masks are set to 3.000, press [RETURN]
to return to the COLLIMATOR /MASK/ AEC TEST
MENU.
18. The MASK TEST (item 3), should be highlighted and
its status should be ON with all of the other
selections OFF.

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 5000, continued

Vertical Beam Alignment and II Centering 5. Place the alignment plate inside the SFD.
The X-ray beam must be aligned perpendicular to the 6. Make sure the masks are set to a 3" opening
film plane of the SFD. according to the Central X-ray Beam Alignment
and II Centering procedure.
DANGER X-rays are produced during the
7. Start a fluoro exposure.
following procedure. Take appropriate
action to radiation exposure. Failure 8. Center the alignment template and square it to the
to comply may cause serious injury to mask opening.
attendant personnel.
9. Make sure that the template does not move until this
procedure is complete.
This procedure is for longitudinal centering (top to bottom
on the monitor). The Correct alignment is indicated when Note The exposure controls on the SFD and the foot-
the collimator shutter opening is centered within the switch will not function in this mode. Fluoro expo-
mask opening. sures will have to be started using the fluoro
Note Do not use an X-ray absorber in the X-ray field. button on the generator.

1. Make sure the SFD is in the Mask Test Mode. If the mask opening appears tilted on the monitor screen
do not worry. This will be corrected by the TV camera
2. Adjust the SFD so that it is near the center of its image rotation adjustment during the imaging system
travel. alignment.
3. Set the collimator shutters completely out of the X-
ray field.
4. Tape the appropriate size alignment template to a
cardboard handle.
Continued on next page

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 5000, continued

Vertical Beam Alignment and II Centering, relationship to the alignment template in the
continued transverse direction, the linkage bar needs to be
adjusted.
CAUTION Remove the alignment template from To adjust the linkage tilt
the SFD before restoring power.
Failure to comply may result in • Loosen the linkage bearing bar mounting screws
damage to the SFD. (front and rear).
• Adjust the bar parallel to the filmer tracks so that
10. Tape a small washer (No. 4) to a piece of cardboard
the park latch pin still engages properly. (See the
(about 3" x 3").
park latch adjustment procedure in the SFD to
11. Place the cardboard collimator. Tube Carriage Linkage Installation Procedure).
12. Put on a lead glove. 17. Set the SID back to maximum and repeat steps 15
and 16 until the image shifts less than 2 mm.
Note If a lead glove is not available the following steps
must be done by taking a brief exposure, moving 18. Center the II to the template longitudinally and
the washer, taking another exposure and so on transversely. Do not change the sweep size after
until the washer is centered. completion of this step.
13. Set the SID to maximum. 19. Take the SFD masks out of the mask test. Refer to
Setting the SFD to the Mask Test Mode steps 9 to
14. Start a fluoro exposure
19.
15. Center the image of the washer to the alignment
Note When following Setting the SFD to the Mask
template's cross hairs.
Test Mode for this procedure set the Mask Test
16. While still fluoroing, reduce SID to minimum. to OFF and press [RETURN] until the Diagnostic
If the image of the washer shifts more than 2 mm in Display Panel is displayed.

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 5000, continued

Collimator Alignment and Longitudinal 6. Move the collimator in the direction required to
Centering obtain correct alignment and retighten the bolts.
This procedure is for centering and aligning the
CAUTION Do not use the collimator mounting
collimator longitudinally. It is generally easier to align the
collimator longitudinally first. plate bolt access hole above the
terminal strip. Any contact with one of
1. With the alignment template centered in the SFD the terminal strip terminals may cause
and the SFD near the center of its travel, start a a short circuit resulting in equipment
fluoro exposure. damage.
2. Close the longitudinal collimator shutters to achieve
about a 4" opening on the monitor. 7. Take another exposure to check the alignment.

3. The collimator longitudinal shutter opening should be 8. Move the collimator toward the head or foot of the
centered and square to the alignment template table to center the shutters to the template.
crosshairs. (Don't be concerned with transverse
centering. Transverse centering will be done next.)
4. If the longitudinal shutters are not square and
centered to the template, align and center the
collimator according to the following:
5. Using the tool-access holes loosen the upper
collimator plate and loosen the three collimator
mounting plate bolts.

Continued on next page

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 5000, continued.

Collimator Alignment and Longitudinal
Centering, continued
9. When the alignment is correct, tighten the collimator
mounting plate bolts and recheck the alignment.
When more longitudinal adjustment is required, the
X-ray tube carriage must be moved. The X-ray tube
carriage orientation must be adjusted.
• Adjusting The X-ray Tube Carriage Orientation
• Tilt the table vertical.
• Loosen the carriage mounting bolts
• Adjust the four jacking screws to skew the X-ray
tube carriage within the longitudinal carriage in
the required direction.
• Tighten the carriage mounting bolts and re-check
the alignment.
• Repeat steps 1 and 2 until correct alignment is
achieved.
10. Re-check the longitudinal alignment of the mask to
the shutters.

Continued on next page

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 5000, continued

Collimator Transverse Centering b. Loosen the lock nut on the end of the connecting
With the longitudinal alignment correct, check for rod.
transverse alignment as follows: c. Turn the connecting rod in or out with respect to
1. Start a fluoro exposure. the rest of the linkage to obtain the correct
alignment.
2. While watching the monitor, operate the transverse
d. Tighten the set screws and locknut.
manual collimator shutters in or out so that the
relationship between the masks and the shutters can
be observed on the monitor.
Correct alignment (side to side on the monitor) is
with the collimator shutter opening centered in the
the mask opening.
The preferred alignment is with the mask opening
center and the shutter opening center within 3 mm
as measured on the template scale while viewed on
the monitor.
Adjustment must be made if the centers are more
than 15 mm apart.
3. When alignment of the shutters with the mask in the
transverse direction is needed do the following:
a. Loosen the set screws that secure the X-ray
tube carnage connecting rod to the drive rod
assembly.

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 5000, continued

Check For SFD SAG Tube Carriage Transverse Centering Switch
1. Place the alignment template on the table top. Adjustment
This procedure starts with the system still set up from
2. Set the SFD masks to the test mode and close
Check For SFD SAG.
them to a 3" square.
1. Move the table top to transverse center.
3. Start a fluoro exposure.
2. Make sure that the center of the template is aligned
4. Center the template to the mask opening
with the transverse center of the table top.
longitudinally with the SFD as far forward as
possible. 3. Start a fluoro exposure.
5. End the exposure and tape the alignment template in 4. Press and hold the [COMP LOCK] button on the
place on the table top. SFD and move the SFD toward center until it locks
on center.
6. Tilt the table to 88°.
5. Observe the monitor.
7. Start a fluoro exposure.
The transverse center of the table top (center of the
8. Check that the masks remain centered to
template) should be at the center of the mask
longitudinal axis of the template.
opening.
If the alignment shifts more than 15 mm at maximum
6. If the conditions of step 5 are not met, adjust the tube
SID, the SFD side bearings or the vertical tower
carriage switch so that when steps 3 and 4 are
bearings may be out of adjustment.
performed, the conditions of step 5 are met.
7. Press the [RESET] button on the SFD to restore it to
normal operation.

X-ray Beam Alignment for the Elite 5000, continued

Filmer Carriage Stop Adjustment Excessive Horizontal Forces
Make sure the SFD and the X-ray tube carriage If more than 18 pounds of force is (with power to the
transverse stops strike each stop simultaneously. If not table turned OFF) required to move the SFD horizontal
make the necessary stop adjustments. carriage in the longitudinal direction, check for the
following conditions:
Potential Alignment Problems
• The chain is too tight.
Excessive Compression Forces
If compression forces are excessive (greater than 22 • Bearings on the horizontal carriage are pinching the
pounds up or down) check for the following causes: track.

1. Vertical carriage bearings are pinching the tracks. • Bearing tracks are dirty (dirt. chips, other foreign
materials, etc.). Clean tracks thoroughly.
2. Safety cable is too tight.
3. Vertical staging is not properly counterbalanced.
(Perform lifting and compressing of vertical carriage
at the tower and not at the SFD handle).
(The force differential between UP and DOWN
should not exceed 3 pounds.)
4. Vertical counterweight box is dragging on the body.
Loosen mounting bolts and align.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing

Introduction Observe all CAUTIONS and WARNINGS as they appear
This section contains procedures for electrically in the text of this section. Failure to comply may result in
calibrating and mechanically aligning the SFD. bodily injury to personnel.

The following components can be checked and adjusted Note The PREP switch in the X-ray generator will NOT
command the filmer to prep. Only the PREP/
when the SFD is being calibrated.
EXPOSE switch on the SFD control panel or a
• Spot Film Lock PREP/EXPOSE footswitch can be used to prep
the SFD for exposures.
• Exposure Interlock Switch
• SFD Calibration
• Strain Gauge Limit Adjustments
• SFD Motor Controller Board Calibration
• SFD Mechanical Adjustments
• Default Selection
• Factory Calibration Check
• Carriage Position Calibration
Safety Information
The vertical carriage should be properly balanced before
performing the procedures in this section.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Lock Adjustment
Introduction
The SFD lock is factory set, however, adjustment of the
lock may be required after shipment.
This mechanism also includes the Exposure Interlock
(Park/Lock) Switch that prohibits exposures when the
SFD is not in the operating position. Therefore, it is
particularly important that exposures do not occur unless
the switch is locked in the operating position.
Lock Adjustment
1. Apply power to the table.
2. Engage the 1725 Spotfilm Device Latch. The SFD
should be firmly locked in position. If not, adjust the
lock using the following steps.
Disengage the lock.
Loosen the appropriate screw(s) and tilt the lock until
its entire braking surface is parallel to the bottom of
the SFD.
Tighten the screw(s).
Test the lock and repeat step 2 as required.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Exposure Interlock (Park/lock) Switch Test .
And Adjustment
1. Make sure all SFD screws are tight, printed circuit CAUTION Do NOT move the switch toward the
latching pin more than absolutely
boards are properly seated and all belts are in place.
necessary. The latching pin may
2. Apply power to the table. damage the micro-switch if the switch
is improperly positioned.
3. Make sure that the Parking Rod latching pin
engages the solenoid-operated latching assembly.
Tighten the two adjusting screws and repeat this
4. Lock the SFD. procedure as necessary.
5. Press the Prep/Expose key. 7. Disengage the Parking Rod from the Latching
6. If the message PLEASE LOCK SFD appears on the Assembly.
diagnostic LCD panel, and a flashing lock icon, and a 8. Press the Prep/Expose key again.
beeping tone. It is necessary to adjust the Park/Lock
micro-switch according to the following procedure. The latch is properly adjusted if the SFD produces a
beep to indicate that the exposure is inhibited.
Loosen the two adjusting screws that hold the micro-
switch in position.
Slide the micro-switch until the actuator engages the
Parking Rod latching pin.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Calibration • The actual menus displayed may differ slightly due to
software changes.
SFD calibration includes calibration for the following
components performed in the order they are listed. Configuration
• Collimator PCB Calibration The diagnostic display panel located inside the SFD is
used to perform this calibration procedure. This panel is
• SFD Collimator Calibration a touch panel display for entering various functions.
• Fluoro Collimator Calibration Each system parameter must be saved separately.
• Strain Gauge Limit Adjustments Make sure to press the [SAVE] key after each parameter
is entered.
Introduction
The SFD calibration consists of calibrating the collimator 1. Apply power to the SFD.
control circuitry and SFD motion strain gauges. 2. Press the [CAL] key to select the Super User
Menu.Use the UP of DOWN keys to highlight
The SFD is factory aligned and calibrated. This section is
designed to confirm the alignment and check the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.
installation of the SFD, the table and the X-ray tube. 3. Press [SELECT]. The SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Note MENU is displayed.

• The table electronic circuitry must be completely CAUTION Do not select the EEPROM
calibrated before the SFD calibration can be initialization menu or change its
performed. contents. Any change to the values in
• Only the PREP/EXPOSE switch on the SFD control this menu will erase the factory
panel or a PREP/EXPOSE footswitch will prep the calibration.
SFD for exposures. The PREP switch in the X-ray
generator is not used to command the filmer to prep. Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Calibration, continued
4. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight II MAG SIZE.
5. Use the [SELECT] key to set the II MAG SIZE to the
maximum intensifier size used in the system.
6. Press the [SAVE] key.
7. Using the [SELECT] button select 1, 2 or 3 II
MODES according to the system configuration.
8. Press the [SAVE] key.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Collimator PCB Calibration 12. Engage the COMP (compression) lock.
Make sure the SID POT is properly adjusted before 13. Set SW1-1, -2, -3 and -4 to their closed positions.
performing this procedure.
14. Adjust R42 until the DVM indicates 6.75 VDC.
1. Remove the Collimator PCB from card cage at the
Note The 0.75 VDC increase between steps 11 and 14
rear of the table.
is due to the increase in SID from the film plane
2. Install the Collimator PCB on the extender board to the imager amplifier input plane.
(Part No. D0109-05-453).
3. Insert the Collimator PCB and extender into the card
cage.
4. Set switches SW1 -1, -2, -3 and -4 on the Collimator
PCB to open.
5. Connect a DVM to TP5(+) and TP1 (-).
6. Set the SFD to the minimum SID position.
7. Adjust R41 to 6.00 volts.
8. Move the SFD to the maximum SID.
9. Adjust R43 until the DVM indicates 8.40 volts.
10. Repeat steps 6 through 9 until both meter readings
are correct.
11. Move the SFD vertical to 6.00 volts.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Collimator Calibration 5. Load the cassette by pressing the [CASSETTE]
1. Return the Super User's Menu to the diagnostic button on the SFD front panel.
display. 6. Set the system as follows:
2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight a. Set the SFD to the middle of vertical travel (SID).
INSTALLATION CALIBRATION and press
[SELECT]. b. Center the table top

3. Highlight SFD COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION and c. Place the center of the SFD over the center of the
press [SELECT]. table.
d. Move the table bucky out of the exposure area.
DANGER X-rays are produced during the
following procedure. Take appropriate e. Make sure that RAPID SEQUENCE is not
selected (RAPID SEQ. LED is OFF).
action to avoid radiation exposure.
Failure to comply may cause serious 7. Set the generator controls to:
injury to attendant personnel.
50 mA,
4. Make sure that you are able to identify the head to 50 kV,
foot and front to back orientation of a loaded 14"x14"
1/30 second
[35 mm x 35 mm] cassette and insert it into the SFD.
small focal spot.
Note To eliminate possible problems caused by
mechanical misalignment of the film make sure to
always insert the film cassette into the SFD the
same way for each test.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Collimator Calibration, continued required and repeat steps 8 through 12 until an
8. On the COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION MENU acceptable pattern (density about 1.0 to 1.5) is obtained.
highlight MAKE EXPOSURE PATTERN and press 13. Using a ruler calibrated in tenths of an inch, measure
[SELECT]. Collimator Calibration Test Exposure Pattern. Begin
measuring at the top (back) of the pattern and work
9. Highlight CALIBRATION PATTERN and press
[SELECT]. down. Then start at the left (head) side and move
toward the right.
10. The SFD requests 6 radiographic exposures. These
exposures must be made in a single sequence by Note Start each measurement at the point where edge
density begins to change from the film back-
fully pressing the PREP/EXPOSE button for each
exposure. ground. End each measurement where the den-
sity of the edge completes its transition to a clear
11. When all 6 exposures are complete, eject the background. This allows for the widest possible
cassette and develop the film. interpretation of each width.
12. Examine the film to verify medium exposure density 14. Record each of the twelve measurements made.
at the outer edges of the Collimator Calibration Test
Exposure Pattern. 15. Record the six front to back values first in order from
the smallest to the largest.
Note If the density is too high or too low on the outside
edges, the differences in the densities within the 16. Record the six head/foot values in the same manner.
pattern may not be distinguishable for accurate
measurement in the next step.
If the film appears to be over- or under-exposed,
increase or decrease the generator settings slightly as
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Collimator Calibration, continued 28. Press the [SELECT] key.
17. Access the SFD COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION 29. Record each of the six measurements displayed in
menu. the Collimator H/F Aperture Menu for future
reference so that they can be re-entered, if needed.
18. Highlight the INPUT/CHECK F/B VALUES.
23. Select H/F value #1.
19. Press the [SELECT] key.
30. Use the UP or Down keys to increment the displayed
20. Record each of the six measurements displayed in
value until it matches as close as possible the actual
the Collimator F/B A and H/F Aperture for future
measured value.
reference so that they can be re-entered, if needed.
31. Press the [SAVE] key to save the value.
21. Select F/B value #1.
32. Press [RETURN] to return to the Collimator H/F
22. Use the UP or Down keys to increment the displayed
Aperture Menu.
value until it matches as close as possible the actual
measured value. 33. Repeat steps 23 through 36 for the remaining H/F
values.
23. Press the [SAVE] key to save the value.
34. Make sure that you are able to identify the head to
24. Press [RETURN] to return to the Collimator F/B
foot and front to back orientation of a loaded 14"x14"
Aperture Menu.
[35 mm x 35 mm] cassette and insert it into the SFD.
25. Repeat steps 25 through 28 for the remaining F/B
Note To eliminate possible problems caused by
values.
mechanical misalignment of the film make sure to
26. Press [RETURN] once or twice to return the SFD always insert the film cassette into the SFD the
COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION menu. same way for each test.
27. Highlight the INPUT/CHECK H/F VALUES.
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Collimator Calibration, continued 40. Highlight VERIFICATION PATTERN on the SFD
diagnostic display panel.
35. Load the cassette by pressing the [CASSETTE]
button on the SFD front panel. 41. The SFD will request 10 radiographic exposures.
These must be made in a single sequence by
36. Set the system as follows:
pressing the PREP/EXPOSE button for each
Set the SFD to the middle of vertical travel (SID).
42. When all 10 exposures are complete, operator will
Center the table top be instructed to eject the cassette.
Place the center of the SFD over the center of the 43. Develop the film.
table.
44. Examine the film to verify the correct Collimator
Move the table bucky out of the exposure area. Calibration Verification Pattern is displayed.
Make sure that RAPID SEQUENCE is not selected 45. Measure the stepped areas on the film.
(RAPID SEQ. LED is OFF).
The steps should start at 3 inches and increase in 1-
37. Set the generator controls to: inch increments to 12 inches in both directions
Uneven steps could be caused by:
50 mA.
• Wrong input data.
50 kV
• Communication problem on the SFD to collimator
1/30 second.
data bus.
Small focal spot.
• Mechanical problem in the collimator head.
38. On the COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION MENU
46. Press [RETURN] three times to return to the
highlight MAKE EXPOSURE PATTERN.
Installation Calibration Menu.
39. Press [SELECT].

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Collimator Calibration, continued
Use the following pattern when performing the SFD
collimator calibration procedure.
Test Exposure Pattern
BACK
12.15”
1.1”
9.65”
2.3”

5.80”
3.8”
4.25”
5.05”
2.60”
8.4”
1.3”
10.6”
HEAD FOOT

FRONT

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Collimator Calibration, continued
Use the following pattern when performing the SFD
collimator calibration procedure.
Verification Pattern

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Fluoro Collimator Calibration 7. Make sure F/B=***** is highlighted to indicate that it
is selected. If it is not, press the [SELECT] button to
1. Access the Installation Calibration Menu.
toggle the display between F/B and H/F.
2. Use the UP or Down keys to highlight FLUORO
8. Press the [INIT] button to initialize the collimator
COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION.
blades by opening them to their maximum value.
3. Press [SELECT].
9. If the shutter blades will not open enough, press the
4. Record each of the values in the Fluoro Collimator [INIT] button on the diagnostic display panel to get
Calibration menu for future reference so that they ****. Move the manual shutter controls to obtain the
can be re-entered, if needed. required opening.
5. Load the cassette by pressing the [CASSETTE] 10. Press and hold one of the FLUORO buttons to
button on the SFD front panel. initiate a fluoroscopic exposure while repositioning
the front/back collimator blades with the manual
DANGER X-radiation is produced during the collimator controls at the upper right corner of the
following procedure. Wear SFD.
fluoroscopic gloves and apron and
11. Adjust the collimator control until the collimator blade
clear the area of unnecessary
edges just become visible at the sides on the image
personnel or use radiation barriers
on the TV monitor.
during radiation exposures. Failure to
comply may cause serious injury to 12. Store this blade position by pressing [SAVE].
attendant personnel.
13. In the Fluoro Calibration Menu select NORMAL
6. On the IA control panel select NORMAL MAG. MAG: H/F=*****.
(for systems with version l.XX software, use the SFD
diagnostic panel.)
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Fluoro Collimator Calibration, continued
14. Press the [INIT] button to initialize the collimator
blades by opening them to their maximum value.
15. If the shutter blades will not open enough, press the
[INIT] button on the diagnostic display panel to get
****. Move the manual shutter controls to obtain the
required opening.
16. Press and hold one of the FLUORO buttons to
initiate a fluoroscopic exposure while repositioning
the head/foot collimator blades with the manual
collimator controls at the upper right corner of the
SFD.
17. Adjust the collimator control until the collimator blade
edges just become visible at the sides on the image
on the TV monitor.
18. Store this blade position by pressing [SAVE].
19. Repeat steps 13 through 18 for the MAG I and MAG
II modes.
20. Press the ESC key twice to return to the main menu.
This completes the fluoro calibration procedure.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Strain Gauge Limit Adjustments Adjustment Procedure
Introduction 1. Hold the cassette door down and remove the three
The strain gauge limits are factory set; however, these socket-head screws that are along the top of the
values must be set to the values listed, or some of the cassette door opening.
calibration set points may fall out of the operating range. 2. Remove the front panel from the SFD by pulling it
forward and up.
Note
3. Press and hold the SFD handle while turning on the
• If table calibration is to be done, this procedure should
be done first. table power to cause an error that will allow the
following items to be checked without actually
• If the strain gauges are adjusted, the table calibration causing the unit motions.
procedure must be performed.
4. Check that none of the set screw limits are touching
the strain gauge shafts.
Adjustment Voltage
Test Test Point
POT (+/-0.05VDC) 5. Connect a DVM between the test points listed in the
SFD Long. Req. TP1 +5 VDC table on this page and TP6 on the Strain Gauge PCB
to check the voltages.
SFD Vertical TP2 R7 +5 VDC
Req. 6. Adjust as necessary with the listed potentiometers.
Tilt Req. TP3 R15 +5 VDC 7. Record the voltages for future reference.
TOP Long Req. TP4 R22 +5 VDC 8. Adjust the mechanical limits on each strain gauge
TOP Trans. Req TP5 R29 +5 VDC shaft so that the voltage does not exceed +8 (+\-0.1)
VDC at the high end of travel or drop below +2 (+\-
0.1) VDC at the other end of travel.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Motor Controller Board Calibration The Motor current on type B boards is adjusted for a
Instructions peak of 5 amps. The U13 PAL 1C marked on these
PCBs is marked -115 HALFSTEP.
Introduction
There are two different types of motor controller boards CAUTION Care must be taken while adjusting
used in the Spotfilm device. the motor control circuits so test
Both board types use the same calibration procedure leads don’t short out a power supply.
however, the current settings are different. Make sure the scope is accurately
calibrated and the test probe properly
Board Type A compensated.
P/N D-0109-05-446-1 for SIN/COSINE drive. This
type of board is used to drive motors M3 (Grid), M4 Special Equipment Required
(F/B Mask), M5 (H/F Mask) and M6 (Cone). PAL 1C Storage oscilloscope.
U13 on these PCBs is marked -94 SINCOS.
The Motor current on type A boards is adjusted for a CAUTION • Isolate oscilloscope ground from
maximum peak of 4 amps on each board. power plug.

Board Type B • Do not remove or replace circuit

boards while power is applied.
P/N D-0109-05-446-2 for HALF STEP drive. This
• Improper adjustment may cause the
type of board is used to drive motors Ml (F/B
Cassette Carriage), and M2 (H/F Cassette Carriage). SFD to fail and/or void OEM warranty.
• Adjust POTs only when the check
shows that it is necessary.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Motor Controller Board Calibration 9. If the peak of the waveform for R14 is not 0.4 (half
Instructions, continued wave amplitude) VDC adjust R14 for the proper
value.
Board Type A (Sine/Cosine) Calibration
1. Turn power OFF to the SFD. Note Do not measure the spikes when measuring the
waveform on the scope.
2. Remove the motor controller PCB that is to be
adjusted. 10. Connect the Oscilloscope ground to the long lead of
R6 and the probe tip to the other side of the resistor
3. Install the motor controller PCB on an extender. (solder side).
4. Connect the Oscilloscope ground to the long lead of 11. Actuate the appropriate panel touch switch for the
R5 and the probe tip to the other side of the resistor drive board being tested.
(solder side).
12. If the peak of the waveform for R14 is not 0.4 (half
5. Set the scope time base to 0.5 msec/div and the wave amplitude) VDC adjust R14 for the proper
vertical sensitivity to 0.2V/div. Use a single sweep value.
trigger.
6. Turn the SFD power ON.
7. With the motor running actuate the panel touch
switch for the drive board being tested.
8. Make sure that one cycle of the waveform is 2 msec
and consists of 7 pulses.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Motor Controller Board Calibration 9. If the peak of the waveform for R14 is not 0.5 (half
Instructions, continued wave amplitude) VDC adjust R14 for the proper
value.
Board Type B (Half Step) Calibration
1. Turn power OFF to the SFD. Note Do not measure the spikes when measuring the
waveform on the scope.
2. Remove the motor controller PCB that is to be
adjusted. 10. Connect the Oscilloscope ground to the long lead of
R6 and the probe tip to the other side of the resistor
3. Install the motor controller PCB on an extender. (solder side).
4. Connect the Oscilloscope ground to the long lead of 11. Actuate the appropriate panel touch switch for the
R5 and the probe tip to the other side of the resistor drive board being tested.
(solder side).
12. If the peak of the waveform for R15 is not 0.4 (half
5. Set the scope time base to 20 usec/div and the wave amplitude) VDC adjust R14 for the proper
vertical sensitivity to 0.2 V/div. Use a single sweep value.
trigger.
6. Turn the SFD power ON.
7. With the motor running actuate the panel touch
switch for the drive board being tested.
8. Make sure that one cycle of the waveform is 48
USEC and consists of 4 pulses.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Final Check-out seconds and allows the SFD to be positioned to
This section contains a list of checks to be performed on the rear of the table.
the SFD to insure that the operating controls function • With ALL LOCKS activated and indicator lit make
properly. sure that the transverse carriage lock disengages
as long as the PARK button is depressed.
Pre-operation Check List
1. Press the [ALL LOCKS] key. Make sure that all locks • Park the SFD and make sure spotfilm and
are activated and that the light by the button is lit. fluoroscopic exposures are inhibited.

2. Check the operation of the compression lock and the 5. Rapid Sequence
LED on the COMP key lights. • Press the [RAPID SEQUENCE] key and verify
3. Bypass that the LED is lit and that exposures can be
made at a rate of approximately two per second.
• With the [BYPASS] key deactivated (indicator not
lit), verify that the table stops at 0° when tilted 6. Grid
from vertical to Trendelenburg or vice versa. • Make sure that the LED next to the GRID key is
Note that the table must be tilted from greater not lit and that the grid is not in the exposure
than +/-3° before the center stop will function. position.
• Press the [BYPASS] key. Make sure that the LED • Verify that pressing the [GRID] key lights the
by the BYPASS key is lit and that the table GRID LED and that the grid moves into position.
passes through 0° when being tilted from greater
than 3° vertical to Trendelenburg or vice versa. • Press the [GRID] button a second time. Verify
that grid moves out of the expose position and
4. Park the LED goes out.
• Press the [PARK] button and make sure the park
latch mechanism disengages for about 3 Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Final Check-out, continued • Press the BYPASS key again to deactivate the
bypass function. While restraining movement of
Pre-operation Check List, continued
the cone, press the CONE key. Check that the
7. Cone Check LED next to the CONE key blinks to indicate that
• Make sure the BYPASS, ALL LOCKS and COMP the cone's movement is obstructed. Check that
LOCK are OFF. Verify that pressing the CONE the cone drive stops after about 15 seconds, but
key causes the cone to move forward to the the indicator continues blinking. Press the
expose position. While the cone is moving the [CONE] button again to resume operation.
indicator light next to the key should flash and 8. Collimator
and light steadily when the cone reaches the
forward position. • Make sure the collimator shutters can be
manually operated when [FLUORO] is selected.
• Press the [BYPASS] key to activate the bypass Select REDUCED SPOT. Verify that the
function and LED next to the BYPASS. Press the collimator shutters do not open larger than the
CONE key and verify that the cone does not tube image edges, or the spotfilm format size
move. selected when REDUCED SPOT is selected.
• Press the [ALL LOCKS] key. Make sure the LED • While observing the fluoroscopic image on the
next to the ALL LOCKS key is lit. Press the TV monitor, make sure that the collimator shutter
CONE key and verify that the cone does not edges maintain the same horizontal and vertical
move. dimensions when the SFD carriage is moved
• Press the [COMP LOCK] key. Make sure the from maximum to minimum SID.
LED next to the COMP LOCK key is lit. Press the
[CONE] key and verify that the cone does not
move.
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Final Check-out, continued 11. Table Top
Pre-operation Check List, continued • Using the table top controls make sure that the
9. Prep/Expose table moves in all directions. The rate of motion
should increase as the control is moved further
• Verify the first step of the two-step PREP/ from its center position.
EXPOSE switch. The first step preps the X-ray
tube and generator. 12. Tilt

• Verify that the second step of the PREP/ • Move the tilt control toward the left and verify that
EXPOSE button initiates an exposure. the table tilts in the Trendelenburg direction to
15°. The speed of tilting should increase as the
10. Fluoro control is moved further from the center position.
Note The following checks should be done on the • Move the tilt control toward the right and verify
FLUORO footswitch and the two FLUORO but- that the table tilts in the Trendelenburg direction
tons. to 88°. The speed of tilting should increases as
• Move the cassette to the load position. Make the control is moved further from the center
sure that fluoroscopic radiation is not initiated position.
when a FLUORO button or the FLUORO
footswitch is pressed.
• Move the cassette to its parked position. Press a
FLUORO button or the FLUORO footswitch and
verify that fluoroscopic radiation DOES occur.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Final Check-out, continued 14. Reset
Pre-operation Check List, continued Press the [RESET] to ensure and make sure it resets the
13. Power Assist SFD to an initial state.

• Apply longitudinal pressure on the SFD handle in 15. Alignment

each direction and verify that power-assisted • Make an exposure and verify correct alignment of
movement of the SFD is occurring and that the the X-ray beam, collimator and image receptors.
speed of these motions increases as more
pressure is exerted on the handle. 16. Covers and Hardware

Note When the SFD carriage is 4 inches from its end • Make sure that all hardware and covers are
limits, the longitudinal power assist force is properly installed and secured.
reduced to 1/2 of its normal force and reduced to
zero assistance when the carriage is within 1 inch
of its end limits.
• Apply downward pressure on the SFD handle
and verify that the power-assisted downward
movement of the SFD is occurring and that the
speed of this motion increases as more pressure
is exerted on the handle.
Note When the SFD carriage is within 1 inch of maxi-
mum or minimum SID the SFD vertical power
assist is deactivated.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Mechanical Adjustments Carriage Transverse Drive Belts
Brush Plate Height Adjustment The carriage transverse drive belts should deflect 0.54
Using the adjustment screw, adjust the brush plate inches at the center when 12 (+1.5, -0) ounces of
height so that the tops of the brushes are even with the pressure is applied to the center of the belt.
inner surface of the cassette carriage inner channels. If adjustment is necessary adjust the secondary belt first.
Carriage Drive Belts Tension Adjustment Secondary Belt Adjustment
Carriage H/f Drive Belts 1. To adjust the secondary belt, loosen and move the
Both of the carriage H/F drive belts should deflect 0.6 idler pulley bracket until desired tension is achieved.
inches when 11 (+1.5, -0) ounces of pressure is applied 2. Tighten the idler pulley bracket.
to the centers of the belt.
Primary Belt Adjustment
If adjustment is necessary adjust the secondary belt first.
1. To adjust the primary belt, loosen and move the
Secondary Belt Adjustment drive motor until desired tension is achieved.
1. To adjust the secondary belt, loosen and move the 2. Tighten the drive motor in place.
idler pulley bracket until desired tension is achieved.
2. Tighten the idler pulley bracket.
Primary Belt Adjustment
1. To adjust the primary belt, loosen and move the
drive motor until desired tension is achieved.
2. Tighten the drive motor in place.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Mechanical Adjustments, continued When adjustment is necessary, adjust the primary mask
drive chain by loosening the drive motor until desired
Mask Moving Force
tension is achieved. Tighten the drive motor in place.
With the drive motor disconnected, if more than 2.5
pounds of force are required to move the masks, the To adjust the other H/F mask drive chains use the
masks are binding and must be adjusted. adjusting screws.

Head/foot Mask Drive Chain Adjustment Note The masks should be aligned so that when fully
closed they meet at the factory center line scribe
Both of the H/F mask drive chains should deflect 3/8
marks.
inches at the center when 8 (+1.5, -0) ounces of
pressure is applied to the center of the chain. Cone And Grid Chain Tension Adjustment
When adjustment is necessary, adjust the primary mask Park the cone or grid to the rear. At a point half-way
drive chain by loosening the drive motor until desired between the front sprocket and the cone plate or half-
tension is achieved. Tighten the drive motor in place. way between the front sprocket grid plate, the force
required to produce 3/8" of chain deflection should
To adjust the other H/F mask drive chains use the be 8 (+1.5, -0) ounces.
adjusting screws.
Note The masks should be aligned so that when fully
closed they meet at the factory center line scribe
marks.
Front/back Mask Drive Chain Adjustment
Both of the F/B mask drive chains should deflect 3/8
inches at the center when 8 (+/-1/2) ounces of pressure
is applied to the center of the chain.
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

SFD Mechanical Adjustments, continued
Cassette Carriage H/f Drive Chain Tension
Adjustment
Chain to Head-End Jaw
Move the carriage jaws at the foot end. At a point half-
way between the sprocket and the head-end jaw the
force required to deflect the chain 1/8" of should
be 14 (+/-1/2) ounces.
Chain from Spline Shaft Sprocket to Sprocket at
Foot-End of Carriage
Move the carriage jaws at the foot end. At a point half-
way between the spline shaft sprocket and the sprocket
at foot-end of carriage, measure the force required to
deflect the chain 1/16" should be 15 (+/-1/2) ounces.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Default Selection Changing Defaults 1
The following procedure enables the technician to
change some of the SFD operating options. Default Description Factory Default Optional Selection

1. Remove the SFD rear cover to access the diagnostic PWR UP Grid Position IN OUT
service panel. DSPL Cass Size Units English Metric
2. Press the [CAL] button to access the Super User Auto Eject Enable DIsable
Menu. PREP Ulatched Latched

CAUTION Do not select the EEPROM To make changes on the DEFAULTS 1 Menu do the
initialization menu or change its following:
contents. Any change to the values in
this menu will erase the factory 1. Use U or D buttons to highlight the desired selection.
calibration. 2. Press the [SELECT] button to change the default
setting.
3. Use the U or D keys to highlight SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION. 3. Once all of the desired changes on the Default 1
menu press the [SAVE] button. The SFD will beep to
4. Press the [SELECT] key. The System Configuration indicate that the parameter has been saved.
Menu is now displayed.
Note The default parameters will not be changed if the
5. Press the [DEFLT] key to access the DEFAULTS 1 SAVE button is not pressed. Press the RETURN
menu. Refer to the table on this page for a list of button or the ESC button to return to the System
factory defaults and alternative selections. Configuration Menu without changing any default
settings.
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Default Selection, continued The default parameters will not be changed if the SAVE
button is not pressed. Press the RETURN button or the
Changing Defaults 2
ESC button to return to the System Configuration Menu
without changing any default settings.
Default Description Factory Default Optional Selection
MAX SFD Req. Spot Format Size II Size
Rapid Seq SFD Locks Comp+Trans Comp, All
Non-SFD RAD Locks Comp Comp+Trans, All
Fluoro SW Autoload Enable Disabled

To make changes to the DEFAULT 2 menu do the

following:
1. With the DEFAULT 1 screen displayed, press the
DEFAULT button.
2. Use U or D buttons to highlight the desired selection.
3. Press the [SELECT] button to change the default
setting.
4. Once all of the desired changes are on the Default 2
menu press the [SAVE] button. The SFD will beep to
indicate that the parameter has been saved.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Factory Calibration Check 6. Use the U or D keys to highlight the desired
This procedure is to be used to check or change the selection.
factory calibration settings for the carriage, masks, cone, Carriage
grid and collimator POTs.
Masks
This procedure must be performed when the firmware
EEPROM in the SFD is replaced or after adjustment of Cone
the opto-sensors or replacement of the opto-sensor Grid
PCBs.
Manual POTS
1. Remove the SFD to access the Diagnostic Display
7. Press the SELECT button.
Panel.
2. Turn power ON to the SFD.
3. With the normal operating display active press the
[CAL] button to access the Super User Menu.

CAUTION Do not select the EEPROM

initialization menu or change its
contents. Any change to the values in
this menu will erase the factory
calibration.

4. Use the U or D keys to highlight FACTORY

CALIBRATION.
5. Press the [SELECT] key. Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Factory Calibration, continued Carriage Home
Cassette Carriage Calibration To change one of the values, do the following:
The Cassette Carriage Calibration Menu is used to set 1. Use the U or D keys to highlight the desired
the carriage positions in the software. selection.
The following procedure is used to verify the factory Note Do not press the select button unless a change is
settings. This procedure is also used to reset these intended.
values after the SFD EEPROM or the carriage sensor
2. Press the [SELECT] button.
PCBs are replaced or adjusted.
3. Use the U or D buttons to scroll to the value recorded
This procedure tests the cassette carriage position
on the factory Calibration and Setup Record Data
calibration, If it is necessary to calibrate refer to the
Form.
Carriage Position Calibration procedure.
4. Press the [RETURN] button.
1. With the Factory Calibration Menu displayed use the
up or down keys to highlight CARRIAGE.
2. Press the [SELECT] button the CASSETTE
CARRIAGE CALIBRATION MENU.
3. Use the U or D keys to highlight the desired selection
and the [SELECT] button to access the screen.
Carriage Home
Carriage Eject
Carriage Size
Carriage Beam Center Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Factory Calibration, continued 3. With the Cassette Size Calibration Menu displayed.
Cassette Carriage Calibration, continued 4. Use the U or D buttons to highlight the CARRIAGE
Carriage Eject SIZE F/B selection.
To change one of the values, do the following: 5. Press the [SELECT] button. "LOAD CASSETTE" is
now displayed.
1. Use the U or D keys to highlight the desired
selection.
CAUTION Do not leave the SFD in this mode
Note Do not press the select button unless a change is with power applied for more than 5
intended. min. The cassette carriage motors
are energized in this mode and will
2. Press the [SELECT] button.
not time out. If left in this mode for
3. Use the U or D buttons to scroll to the value recorded more than 5 min. damage may occur
on the factory Calibration and Setup Record Data to the carriage motor or driver.
Form.
6. Insert the cassette in the correct orientation. The
4. Press the [RETURN] button.
display will change to show the measurements made
Carriage Size by the SFD.
This menu does not display size information but is used 7. If necessary use the F (lower) or B (higher) buttons
to calibrate the system for a specific cassette size. to adjust the display to the exact measurement of the
1. Carefully measure the outside dimensions of a 14 X cassette inserted.
14 cassette within 0.050 in.
2. With CARRIAGE SIZE highlighted press the
[SELECT] button.
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Factory Calibration, continued 6. If necessary use the F (lower) or B (higher) buttons
to adjust the display to value recorded on the factory
Cassette Carriage Calibration, continued
Calibration and Setup Record Data Form.
Carriage Size, continued
7. Press [SAVE] to save the new value.
8. Press [SAVE] to save the new value. A tone is
8. Press [RETURN] to return to the BEAM CENTER
played to indicate the save was successful.
CALIBRATION MENU.
Note Pressing [RETURN] without pressing [SAVE] will
9. Repeat steps 2 to 7 with CARRIAGE BEAM
return the Carriage Size Menu to the screen with-
CENTER H/F selected at the Carriage Size
out changing the size value.
Calibration Menu. The cassette will have to be
9. Press RETURN to return to the Carriage Size Menu. reloaded.
10. Repeat steps 3 to 9 with CARRIAGE SIZE H/F
selected at the Carriage Size Calibration Menu.
Carriage Beam Center
1. With CARRIAGE BEAM CENTER highlighted press
the [SELECT] button.
2. Use the U or D buttons to highlight the CARRIAGE
BEAM CENTER F/B.
3. Press the [SELECT] button. "LOAD 14 X14
CASSETTE" is now displayed.
4. Insert a 14 x 14 cassette.
5. Press the CASSETTE button.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Factory Calibration, continued
Mask Calibration
1. With the Factory Calibration Menu displayed
highlight MASKS, and press the [SELECT] button.
2. Use the U or D buttons to highlight Mask F/B.
3. Press the [Select] button.
4. With the Mask F/B Calibration Menu use the 0
(open) or C (close) buttons to adjust the display to
the value recorded on the factory Calibration and
Setup Record Data Form.
5. Press [SAVE] to save the new value.
6. Press [RETURN] to return to the Mask Calibration
Menu.
Note ESC to return to the User Menu with no changes.
Repeat the procedure for the other orientation.
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 with Mask H/F selected at the
Mask Calibration Menu.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Factory Calibration, continued 8. Press [RETURN] to return to the Cone Calibration
Menu.
Cone Calibration
This selection is used to center the cone in the X-ray Note ESC to return to the User Menu with no changes.
beam or enter factory calibration values. If factory
calibration values are to be entered, skip to step 4.
1. Tape a piece of lead to the center of the cone.
2. Make an exposure and determine how much and in
which direction the cone is out of center.
3. With the Factory Calibration Menu displayed
highlight CONE, and press the [SELECT] button.
4. Use the U or D buttons to highlight the desired
position.
5. Press the [SELECT] button.
6. Use the B (back) or F (forward) buttons to change
the setting by the amount determined in step 3 or
enter the factory values from the value recorded on
the factory Calibration and Setup Record Data Form.
Note When setting the cone park or cone forward cali-
bration, the higher the number entered, the faster
the cone will travel toward the sensor.
7. Press [SAVE] to save the new value.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Factory Calibration, continued enter the factory values from the value recorded on
the factory Calibration and Setup Record Data Form.
Grid Calibration
This selection is used to center the grid in the X-ray Note When setting the grid park, the higher the num-
beam or enter factory calibration values. If factory ber entered, the faster the grid will travel toward
calibration values are to be entered, skip to step 4. the sensor.

1. Manually move the grid to the center position. 9. Press [SAVE] to save the new value.

2. Mark the center position of the grid. 10. Press [RETURN] to return to the Grid Calibration
Menu.
3. Using the SFD controls move the grid into position.
Note ESC to return to the User Menu with no changes.
4. Measure how far the grid is from the mark made in
step 2.
5. With the Factory Calibration Menu displayed
highlight GRID, and press the [SELECT] button.
6. Use the U or D buttons to highlight the desired
position.
7. Press the [SELECT] button.
8. Use the B (back) or F (forward) buttons to change
the setting by the amount determined in step 4 or

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Factory Calibration, continued 8. With the POTS OPENED F/B highlighted, move the
F/B collimator POT to the fully Open position.
Manual Collimator POTs Calibration
This procedure is used to set in the software what the 9. Press the [SAVE] button. The SFD will sound a tone
fully-open and fully-closed values are for the manual when value has been saved.
collimator POTs. 10. Press the [SELECT] button to switch the highlight to
Note The end values displayed should always be 0 POTS OPENED F/B.
(zero) and 249. 11. Move the F/B collimator POT to the fully open
1. With the Factory Calibration Menu displayed position.
highlight Manual POTs, and press the [SELECT] 12. Press the [SAVE] button. The SFD will sound a tone
button. when value has been saved.
2. With the POTS CLOSED F/B highlighted, move the 13. Press [RETURN] to return to the Factory Calibration
F/B collimator POT to the fully closed position. Menu.
3. Press the [SAVE] button. The SFD will sound a tone Note ESC to return to the User Menu with no changes.
when value has been saved.
4. Press the [SELECT] button to switch the highlight to
POTS CLOSED H/F.
5. Move the H/F collimator POT to the fully closed
position.
6. Press the [SAVE] button. The SFD will sound a tone
when value has been saved.
7. Press the D button to highlight POTS OPENED F/B.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Carriage Position Calibration Carriage Eject Position Adjustment
The carriage position calibration consist of the following This procedure is to determine the head-to-foot (H/F)
procedures: tolerance of the cassette carriage when it is in the eject
position.
• Carriage Eject Position Adjustment
This procedure can be performed more easily by two
• Jam Sensor Adjustment people.
• Carriage Home Check and Adjustment Read steps 1 through 5 before attempting to perform the
• Carriage Eject Calibration procedure.
• Final Checks 1. Turn the system power off.
• Carriage Beam Center Calibration 2. Move the carriage in the H/F direction until the
actuator is near the latch.
Special Tools Required
3. Move the carriage so that the latch is just above the
A very short 1/4" hex nut driver or a 1/4" hex deep-well
ion chamber pre-amp.
socket will be needed to adjust the jam sensor.
4. Hold the carriage in the disengaged position by
Clamp Bar Assist Spring
holding the drive belt.
If your system is equipped with a cassette clamp bar
assist spring. The spring is located on the head side of 5. Hold the actuator up with the other hand and move
the carriage behind the cassette clamp bar. This spring the H/F belt so that the carriage latch moves under
must be removed by removing the screw in the center of the actuator. This will disengage the cassette
the spring. Discard the spring. carriage latch.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Carriage Position Calibration, continued 13. Scribe a mark on the small intermediate H/F carriage
drive pulley that aligns with the mark made in step
Carriage Eject Position Adjustment, continued
10.
6. Continue to hold it in this position by holding the belt
for the next step. 14. Remove the SFD control panel and place it in the
service position.
7. Using the F/B drive belt move the cassette carriage
to the eject position (full forward). 15. Turn the system power ON.

8. Move the carriage to the head end and then fully 16. Park the cassette.
forward. 17. With the Super User Menu displayed on the
9. Use the H/F drive belt to move the carriage to the diagnostic display highlight Factory Calibration.
head end of the movement tolerance. 18. Press the [SELECT] button to access the Factory
10. Mark the center of the bracket that supports the F/B Calibration Menu.
drive belt pulley. 19. Highlight Carriage.
11. Scribe a mark on the small intermediate H/F carriage 20. Press the [SELECT] button to access the Cassette
drive pulley that aligns with the mark made in step Carriage Calibration Menu.
10.
21. Highlight Carriage Eject.
Note If marks are present, perform the remaining steps
to verify that they are correct.
12. Move the carriage to the foot end of the movement
tolerance.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Carriage Position Calibration, continued 24. Measure the distance from the tip of the right-hand
door-opener tab of the carriage and the front flat
Carriage Eject Position Adjustment, continued
surface of the plastic bezel.The acceptable value is
22. Press the [SELECT]. 1/8" and 5/32". If this value measured is outside the
acceptable range the Jam Sensor must be adjusted.
CAUTION Do not leave the SFD in this mode
with power applied for more than 5 25. Insert a cassette and park the carriage.
min. The cassette carriage motors are 26. Turn power to the SFD off.
energized in this mode and will not
time out. If left in this mode for more 27. Move the cassette carriage forward so that the jam
than 5 min. Damage may occur to the actuator is visible through the II opening.
carriage motor or driver. 28. Mark the position of the nylon jam actuator on the
cassette jaw.
Note Do not save the calibration values during this part
of the procedure. 29. Simulate a jammed condition by pushing the
cassette latch toward the head end.
23. Press the Diagnostic Display Panel button
designated "B" (back) until the fourth LED from the 30. On the cassette jaw mark the new position of the
top near J3 (shown in Figure 3-46) goes off. nylon jam actuator.

Note On SFDs that have 8 LEDs installed on the com- 31. Measure the distance between the two jam actuator
ponent side of the Control Panel PCB use a volt- position marks made in steps 28 and 30.
meter across the connection pads of the fourth 32. If the distance between the two marks is not 1/4" or
LED down. The LED is ON when 1.5 VDC is greater, the cassette latch must be adjusted to
across it. obtain this dimension.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Carriage Position Calibration, continued 10. Repeat steps 15 to 24 of the Carriage Eject Position
Adjustment procedure to make sure the jam sensor
Jam Sensor Adjustment
is now adjusted properly.
1. To aid in the reinstallation of the II mark the
alignment position of the II on the mounting plate and Carriage Home Check and Adjustment
the lead plate. If either the cassette carriage F/B or H/F home position
indicated on the Diagnostic Display Panel is changed by
2. Remove the II
more than 4 during the Carriage Home Check And
3. Return the carriage to the park position. Adjustment procedure, the beam center must also be
checked.
4. Turn the SFD power OFF.
1. With the Super User Menu displayed highlight
5. Remove the II mounting plate to gain access to the
jam sensor. Factory Calibration.

6. Mark the position of the jam sensor bracket. 2. Press the [SELECT] button to access the Factory
Calibration Menu
7. Loosen the two jam sensor bracket mounting nuts
enough to allow the bracket to move. 3. Highlight Carriage.

8. Move the jam sensor the (opposite direction) 4. Press the [SELECT] to access the Cassette Carriage
Calibration Menu.
distance that the door-opener tab was out of
specification in the of the error. 5. Highlight Carriage Home.
Example: If the door-opener tab was too far out by
6. Press the SELECT button.
1/8", move the jam sensor to the rear 1/8" and vice
versa.
9. Tighten the two jam sensor bracket mounting nuts.
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Carriage Position Calibration, continued • If the grommet will rotate, press the Diagnostic
Display Panel button designated "B" momentarily
Carriage Home Check And Adjustment,
to step the carriage toward the rear by until the
continued
grommet wilt not rotate. Then step the carriage
7. Highlight Carriage Home F/B. forward using the "F" button until the grommet
will rotate with slight difficulty (zero clearance).
CAUTION Do not leave the SFD in this mode
with power applied for more than 5 11. Note the number shown on the display panel.
min. The cassette carriage motors are 12. Use the "F" button to step the carriage until the
energized in this mode and will not number displayed is 4 greater than the number
time out. If left in this mode for more recorded in step 11.
than 5 min. Damage may occur to the
carriage motor or driver. 13. Press the [SAVE] button.
14. Record this value in and save it for future reference.
8. The sprocket on the splined shaft should be near the
rubber grommet on the splined carriage H/F drive 15. If the difference between the value in step 14 and
shaft. step 9 is more than 4 the beam center must be
adjusted.
9. Record the value displayed on the Display Panel.
16. Press the [RETURN] button to return to the Carriage
10. Rotate the rubber grommet on the shaft. Home Menu.
• If the grommet will not rotate, press the 17. With the Cassette Home Menu displayed highlight
Diagnostic Display Panel button designated "F" Carriage Home H/F.
momentarily to step the carriage toward the front.
Continue indexing until the grommet will rotate 18. Press the SELECT button.
with slight difficulty (zero clearance).
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Carriage Position Calibration, continued 24. Record and save it for future reference.
Carriage Home Check And Adjustment, 25. If the difference between the value in step 19 and
continued step 24 is more than 4 the beam center must be
19. Record the value displayed. adjusted.

CAUTION Do not leave the SFD in this mode

with power applied for more than 5
min. The cassette carriage motors
are energized in this mode and will
not time out. If left in this mode for
more than 5 min. Damage may occur
to the carriage motor or driver.

20. Using the [H] button, to step the carriage toward the
head end until the head-end tolerance mark made
previously on the H/F intermediate pulley aligns with
the mark during the Carriage Eject Position
Adjustment procedure.
21. Record the count shown on the display panel.
22. Using the [H] button to step the carriage until the
number displayed is 4 greater than the count in step
21.
23. Press the [SAVE] button.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Carriage Position Calibration, continued 13. .Press the [SAVE] button.
Carriage Eject Calibration 14. Record this value and save it for future reference.
1. Press [RETURN] twice to access the Cassette 15. Exit the calibration mode.
Calibration Menu.
2. Highlight Carriage Eject.
3. Press the [SELECT] button.
4. Highlight Carriage Eject H/F.
5. Press the [SELECT] button.
6. Step the carriage so that +4 or 4 is shown on the
Display Panel.
7. Press [SAVE] to Save this value.
8. Press [RETURN] to return to the Carriage Eject
Menu.
9. Highlight Carriage Eject F/B.
10. Press the [SELECT] button.
11. Place a straight edge on the front of the SFD plastic
bezel in front of the foot-end door-opener tab.
12. Step the carriage forward until the door-opener tab
touches the straight edge.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Carriage Position Calibration, continued
Final Checks
1. Watching the marks on the H/F intermediate pulley
press the [CASSETTE] button.
2. The head-end tolerance mark on the pulley should
align with the mark on the pulley bracket while the
carriage is moving toward the eject position.
3. Watching the marks on the H/F intermediate pulley
press the [CASSETTE] button again.
4. The head-end tolerance mark on the H/F
intermediate pulley should go beyond the mark on
the bracket by about 1/16" (4 steps) while the
carriage is moving to the park position.
5. Push the [CASSETTE] button to bring the carriage to
the eject position.
6. Using a straight edge, check that the foot-end door-
opener tab is flush with the bezel (±1/16").

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Carriage Position Calibration, continued • The display should indicate that the collimator is
inhibited.
Carriage Beam Center Calibration
If either the cassette carriage F/B or H/F home position If it does, proceed to step 10.
indicated on the Diagnostic Display Panel was changed
by more than 4 during the Cassette Carriage Calibration If it doesn't, press the TEST button to display
procedure, the beam center must be checked, and Collimator/ Mask/ AEC Test Menu and then
adjusted if necessary. select Collimator Inhibit and press RETURN.
1. Mark the exact center of a cassette and tape an item Now proceed to step 10.
that will be visible in an X-ray over the mark. 10. Take an exposure and develop the film.
2. Load the cassette with film. 11. Determine the center of the mask opening in the
3. Place other markers on the table top in the exposure direction being checked (H/F, F/B or both).
field to indicate H/F and F/B orientation. H/F Adjustment
4. With the Diagnostic Display Panel Super User Menu 1. Measure the distance between the center of the H/F
displayed highlight Installation Calibration. mask opening and the center of the washer image
5. Press the [Select] Button. on the film.

6. Highlight Inhibit Exposure Test. 2. Note which direction the washer image must move to
be centered in the mask opening.
7. Press the [Select] Button.
3. Press [RETURN] twice to return to the Super User
8. Insert the marked and loaded cassette into the Menu.
filmer.
9. Use the button tagged [SPLITS] to select a 1:1
format. Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Carriage Position Calibration, continued F/B Adjustment
Carriage Beam Center Calibration, continued 1. Measure the distance between the center of the F/B
4. With the Super User Menu displayed highlight mask opening and the center of the washer image
Factory Calibration. on the film.

5. Press the [SELECT] button. 2. Note which direction the washer image must move to
be centered in the mask opening.
6. Highlight Carriage.
3. Press [RETURN] twice to return to the Super User
7. Press the [SELECT] button. Menu.
8. Highlight Carriage Beam Center. 4. Press the [SELECT] button.
9. Press the [SELECT] button. 5. Highlight Carriage.
10. Highlight Carriage Beam Center H/F. 6. Press the [SELECT] button.
11. Press the [SELECT] button. 7. Highlight Carriage Beam Center.
12. Using the H or F buttons on the Display Panel, move 8. Press the [SELECT] button.
the carriage the distance and direction needed to
center the washer image in the mask opening as 9. Highlight Carriage Beam Center F/B.
determined in step 1. The carriage position will 10. Press the [SELECT] button.
change about 0.015" per step.
13. Press [SAVE] to save this value.
14. Record this value and save it for future reference.
15. Press [RETURN] to return to the Carriage Beam
Center Menu. Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Calibration and Testing, continued

Carriage Position Calibration, continued
Carriage Beam Center Calibration, continued
11. Using the F or B buttons on the Display Panel, move
the carriage the distance and direction needed to
center the washer image in the mask opening as
determined in step 1. The carriage position will
change about 0.015" per step.
12. Press [SAVE] to save this value.
13. Record this value and save it for future reference.
14. Press [RETURN] to return to the Carriage Beam
Center Menu.
15. Repeat the Carriage Beam Center Calibration
procedure to check the beam centering.
16. Reinstall the II mounting plate, the II and camera(s),
17. Restore the system to normal operation.

Modifying MTX Generator APR Data

Introduction Exposure Technique
This function allows the user to customize any of the In the test mode, the lower display will show the
settings that pertain to a single APR selection. exposure technique currently assigned to the TECH and
PROGRAM button combination.
Note It is not necessary to close the Service Test
switch to modify the APR data. Use the mA/mAs, kV and/or time override buttons to To
change to a different exposure technique.
Operation
AEC Parameters
Prior to accessing this test mode, select the desired
[TECH] (technique) and [PROGRAM] button. In the test mode, the console LED's will show the AEC
parameters currently assigned to the TECH and
1. Press the [INFO] Button. PROGRAM button combination.
2. Press the [+] or [-] buttons until the upper display To change to a different AEC parameter (field, density,
reads, "APR Setup". etc.), use the AEC override buttons.
3. Press the [INFO] button. The upper display will show Saving changes
The body part name currently assigned to the TECH
When the correct APR program has been set, push the
and PROGRAM button combination is now shown
[INFO] button and then any program button to store the
on the upper display.
new parameters and exit the test mode.
4. Scroll through the directory of available body part
When the body part name is changed from the default
names using the [+] and [-] buttons. Record this
name printed program button, make sure to apply a new
value and save it for future reference.
label of the correct color (determined by tech button
Note When in AEC mode, the time selections will rep- selection) and body part name.
resent backup time.

PFM-90 CTM Calibration and Testing

Cable Break-sensing Switch Alignment • Check nut travel again and tighten the set screws
when adjustment is correct.
WARNING Do not make connections with Note If the available adjustment range of the safety
electrical power applied. Hazardous cable adjusting nut is not sufficient to produce 3/8
voltages will be present. failure to inch of nut travel, it will be necessary to adjust the
comply may result in bodily injury. main cable termination as well.
1. Pull the telescopic column down. 6. Check that at the upper end of the travel, the nut
contacts the cable break sensing switch roller and
2. Open the access panel in front of the smallest
actuates the switch.
column section.
7. With the safety cable adjusting nut up against the
3. Press the safety cable adjusting nut upwards until it
cable plate verify that the Operator Control Unit
stops against the cable plate.
SAFETY WARNING Light comes on and the vertical
4. Measure the travel. brake engages.
5. If the travel is not 3/8 inch, adjust the safety cable 8. Repeat step 7 several times to assure that the
adjusting nut as follows: system is properly adjusted.
• Back off the set screws in the adjusting nut hex. 9. If the switch is not actuating properly, or if the travel
requires minor repositioning, adjust the switch
• While holding the cable termination with a small
position as follows \
open end wrench, and turn the nut as until a 3/8
inch travel is achieved (clockwise to decrease • release the switch mounting screws.
travel, counterclockwise to increase travel).
• Move the switch until it functions properly.Make
sure the switch actuates only in the last 1/64" of
nut travel to protect the switch from over-travel.

PFM-90 CTM Calibration and Testing, continued

Spring Breakage Safety Switch Alignment 9. Repeat step 3 to 7 to verify that the switch is
1. With the safety system at rest, visually verify that the adjusted properly.
spring breakage sensing switch roller is just touching 10. Tighten all screws securely.
the switch actuator bushing.
2. Insert a 0.025" feeler gauge between the bushing
and the switch roller.
3. Make sure the switch is activated by checking that
the Operator Control Unit SAFETY WARNING Light
is ON and that the vertical brake is activated.
4. Remove the feeler gauge.
5. Make sure the switch is deactivated by checking
that the Operator Control Unit SAFETY WARNING
Light is OFF and that the vertical brake is
dractivated.
6. The sensing switch position is adjusted by releasing
the mounting screws and moving the switch until
proper function is obtained.
7. This test should be repeated several times to assure
proper adjustment of the safety system.
8. The sensing switch position can be adjusted by
releasing the mounting screws and moving the
switch until proper function is obtained.

PFM-90 CTM Calibration and Testing, continued

Balancer Load Adjustment 4. While still holding the POT gear stationary turn the
Make sure all cables and accessories are installed POT shaft 1/2 turn CW.
before adjusting the spring balancer. 5. Tighten the POT gear setscrew.
1. Using handle bars move telescopic column up and SID Monitor PCB Calibration
down.
1. Loosen the three screws along the edge of the logic
2. Adjust the balancer nut to achieve a comfortable cover
force required to move column.
2. Open the cover.
Note The balancer adjustment must be turned a large
3. Turn power ON to the CTM.
number of turns to obtain a small tension change.
4. Locate the SID Monitor PCB on the logic cabinet
• Turn the adjustment nut clockwise to increase
cover.
spring tension and increase payload range.
5. Connect a DVM ground lead to TP5 on the SID
• Turn the adjustment nut counterclockwise to
Monitor PCB.
decrease spring tension and decrease payload
range. 6. Connect the DVM positive lead to the cathode of
CR1. The correct voltage reading is 12 VDC (+/-0.25
SID POT Initial Adjustment VDC).
1. Loosen the potentiometer gear set screw.
7. Connect the DVM positive lead to the cathode of
2. Fully extend the mast. CR3. The correct voltage reading is 9.0 VDC (+/-0.1
3. While holding the POT gear stationary and use a flat- VDC).
bladed screwdriver to rotate the POT shaft fully 8. Connect the DVM positive lead to TP2.
CCW.
Continued on next page

PFM-90 CTM Calibration and Testing, continued

SID Monitor PCB Calibration, continued 15. Set R18 POT to maximum CW
9. Fully extend the tube arm so that the collimator is 16. Set R7 POT to maximum CCW
just above the floor.
17. Set R22 POT to mid range
10. Record this value and save it for future reference.
18. Set R6 POT to mid-range
11. Move the tube up as far as it will go.
19. If the PFM-90 does not use a deluxe tilting wall
12. Record the voltage at TP2 and save it for future bucky skip to step 21.
reference.
20. If the PFM-90 is used with a deluxe tilting wall bucky,
Note The value in step 12 should be 9 minus the value do the following.
from step 10. If this is not correct, do the following
• Move the collimator so that it is 68 in. from the
to adjust the SID POT.
floor. This sets the focal spot to 79.0 in. from the
• Loosen the potentiometer gear set screw. floor. (68 in. + 11 in. collimator = 79 in.)
• Fully extend the mast. • Measure the voltage at TP2 on the SID monitor
PCB record this value and save it for future
• While holding the POT gear stationary and use a
reference.
flat-bladed screwdriver to rotate the POT a
minimum voltage. • Connect the DVM positive lead to TP3.
• Tighten the POT gear setscrew. • Adjust R5 CCW until the voltage at TP3 just goes
low (or the relay clicks).
• Repeat steps 8 to 12.
13. Set R5 POT to maximum CW
14. Set R8 POT to maximum CCW
Continued on next page

PFM-90 CTM Calibration and Testing, continued

SID Monitor PCB Calibration, continued 26. Measure the voltage at TP2 record this value and
save it for future reference.
• Move the collimator so that it is 59 in. from the
floor. This sets the focal spot 70.0 in. from the 27. Connect the DVM positive lead to TP1.
floor. (59 in. + 11 in. collimator = 70 in.)
28. Adjust R7 CW until the voltage at TP1 just goes low
• Measure the voltage at TP2 and record this value (or the relay clicks).
and save it for future reference.
29. Use the collimator tape measure to set the focal spot
• Connect the DVM positive lead to TP3. to 36 in. [91.4 cm] from the Bucky Film Plane (31.75
in. [80.6 cm] from the table top).
• Adjust R8 CW until the voltage at TP3 just goes
low (or the relay clicks). 30. Connect the positive lead of the DVM to TP6.
21. Use the collimator tape measure to set the focal spot 31. Adjust R6 until the voltage at TP6 is 0.68 +/- 0.01
48.0 in. [122 cm] above the Bucky film plane (43.75 VDC.
in. [111.1 cm] from the table top).
32. Use the collimator tape measure to set the focal spot
22. Measure the voltage at TP2 record this value and 48.0 in. [122 cm] above the Bucky film plane (43.75
save it for future reference. in. [111.1 cm] from the table top).
23. Connect a DVM positive lead to TP1.
24. Adjust R18 CCW until the voltage at TP1 just goes
low (or the relay clicks).
25. Use the collimator tape measure to set the focal spot
to 36 in. [91.4 cm] for the Bucky Film Plane (31.75 in.
[80.6 cm] from the table top).
Continued on next page

PFM-90 CTM Calibration and Testing, continued

SID Monitor PCB Calibration, continued
33. Check the voltage at TP6. If the Voltage is not 7.02
(+ /- 0.01 volts). Do the following for special
adjustment of R22:
• Adjust R22 two turns CW for every 0.1 volts that
TP6 is below 7.02
OR adjust R22 two turns CCW for every 0.1 volts
that TP6 is above 7.02 volts.
Note The meter reading may not immediately coincide
with the adjustment made; however, R22 should
not be adjusted so that the meter presently indi-
cates the desired voltage.
R22 interacts with R6 to establish threshold volt-
ages at 36 and 48 inch SIDs, respectively. There-
fore, if R22 is adjusted, R6 may also require
readjustment (step 29).
• Repeat steps 25 through 33 until the readings at
both 36 in. and 48 in. focal spot distances are
correct.

PFM-90 CTM Calibration and Testing, continued

CTM-display PCB Calibration 10. Using the collimator tape measure increase the SID
1. Remove the two screws that attach the operator to 31".
control unit to the back cover. 11. Adjust R19 until the display indicates 31".
2. Remove the operator control unit from the back 12. Increase the SID to 40.0 in. using the collimator tape
cover. measure.
3. Set the R17 POT on the CTM Display PCB to 13. Press the Bucky SID range switch.
maximum CCW
14. Adjust R18 until 44.3 appears on the display.
4. Set the R18 POT on the CTM Display PCB to
15. Set the Collimator on the table top.
maximum CCW
16. Adjust R20 CW so that the display just blanks out.
5. Set the R20 POT on the CTM Display PCB to
maximum CCW
6. Set the R19 POT on the CTM Display PCB to mid-
range.
7. Set the Collimator on the Table Top.
8. Set the display to "Table Top SID".
9. Adjust R17 CW until 11" appears on the display.
Note The minimum tape measure reading is 11 inches,
to account for the distance between the collima-
tor housing and the focal spot of the tube.

PFM-90 CTM Calibration and Testing, continued

Longitudinal Magnetic Lock Adjustment
Adjust the lock by loosening the mounting screws and
moving it closer to or farther from the rail until there is a
gap of 0.015" between the lock armature and the
magnetic strip on the longitudinal rail.

COMPONENT LOCATIONS
MTX Generator 1725 Spotfilm Device (SFD)
Centroid Vertical Carriage 1725 Spotfilm Device Leveling
MTX Rack A 1725 Spotfilm Device Latch
MTX Rack B 1725 Spotfilm Motor Control Board Location
1725 Spotfilm Brush Plate Adjustment Screw
MTX Inverter Chassis
1725 Spotfilm Device Carriage, Masks, Cone and
MTX Generator – Rev. B Grid Assembly
MTX Rev. A 1725 Spotfilm Device Carriage, Idler Mark for Head
End Tolerance Movement
MTX Power On Circuit Rev. B
1725 Spotfilm Motor Drives and Diagnostic Display
Collimatic 4 Panel
Collimatic 4 Power Supply Elite 1500 Table – X-ray Tube Adjustment
MTX Console Elite 5000 Table – X-ray Tube Adjustment
1725 Spotfilm Device to X-ray Tube Carriage Linkage
MTX Console Raised Position Adjustment
HMS High Speed Starter 1725 Spotfilm Device Control Panel
Elite 1500/5000 Table Digital and II Control Panels
1725 Spotfilm Device - Vertical Power Assist
Elite Table Electronics Chassis
Elite 5000 Table Overview

System Overview

1725
Spotfilm

Elite Table

Centroid

Centroid without cover

MTX Contractor Chassis

CB01

K01

K04

K02

MTX Rack A

CPU PCB

AEC PCB

+/-15V Power
Supply PCB

Continued on next page

MTX Rack A

Top of Rack A

24V Power
Supply

MTX Rack B
Filament Driver Filament Power
PCBs Supply

Relay PCBs

Inverter

MTX Inverter Chassis

Rack B Inverter

MTX Generator – Rev. B

Circuit breaker panel

(Load Center)

MTX Rev. A

Measure PCB

High Tension
Transformer
Continued on next page

MTX Rev. A

Remote exposure
buttons

MTX Power On Circuit Rev. B

K03 F01 F02

Remote exposure
buttons

Collimatic 4
Manual control switch Positive
Beam
Limitation
Bypass Key
(PBL)

Tube filter
(removable)

Collimatic 4 Power Supply

Calibration
and setup

Power switch
and fuses

MTX Console

Information
(INFO) button

Anatomical
Programming
buttons (APR)

MTX Console Raised Position

Service switch

MTX Console
(raised position)

HMS High Speed Starter

Elite Table Electronics Chassis

SW1
Enable
RUN
Analog PCB

Step
Button
CPU PCB
CAL
CPU Reset Store
Switch Button

I/OPCB # 1

I/O PCB # 2 Collimator

Interface PCB

1725 Spotfilm Device - Vertical Power Assist

Check Chain Deflection Here

1/6" to 1/8" clearance

between Pulley and Bracket

Vertical Carriage 1725 Spotfilm Device Leveling

Spot Film Device
Motor Control Board Longitudinal Tilt Adjustment
Transverse Leveling Longitudinal Leveling Screw (one front one back)
(inside)

Tower
Transverse Tilt Adjustment
Screw (one front one back)

1725 Spotfilm Device Latch

Latch Assembly

Latch Adjustment
Screws

View is from the head-end

of table

View is from the foot-end

of table

1725 Spotfilm Motor Control Board Location

Strain Gauge Adjustment Board

(under the Spotfilm Control Panel)

1725 Spotfilm Brush Plate Adjustment Screw

Spotfilm Brush Plate Adjustment

Screw

1725 Spotfilm Device Carriage, Masks, Cone and Grid Assembly

Carriage Transverse
Primary Belt Carriage H/F Secondary
Belt

Carriage H/F Primary

Carriage Latch Belt
Disengage

Drive Shaft Grommet

Carriage Transverse Secondary Belt

1725 Spotfilm Device Carriage, Idler Mark for Head End Tolerance Movement

Head-end Tolerance
Mark
H/F Drive Belt

Bracket Mark

1725 Spotfilm Motor Drives and Diagnostic Display Panel

Cone (M6)

Mask H/F
(M5)
Mask F/B
(M4)
Grid (M3)
Diagnostic Display Panel

Cassette H/F (M2)

Cassette F/B (M1)

Spotfilm Device Motor Control Boards

Elite 1500 Table – X-ray Tube Adjustment

Under Table
X-ray Tube Collimator Adjusting Bolts

Elite 5000 Table – X-ray Tube Adjustment

Under Table
Collimator

1725 Spotfilm Device to X-ray Tube Carriage Linkage Adjustment

Linkage to SFD

Set Screws

Drive Rod to X-ray Tube

Carriage

1725 Spotfilm Device Control Panel

Digital and II Control Panels

Elite Table Top

X-ray Tube

Table Electronics - Power Switches

Table Power
Switches
(acts as a
"Master")

Elite 5000 Table Overview

PFM 90 Ceiling Tube Mount

ERROR CODES
MTX Generator
MTX Generator Errors
MTX System Error Log

Elite 1500/5000 Table

Elite 1500/5000 Table Error Codes

1725 Spotfilm Device (SFD)

1725 Spotfilm Device Error Codes

MTX Generator Errors

Refer to the following table for MTX generator errors.
The errors may be soft (none fatal) or hard (fatal).

Error
Message Description Type Troubleshooting Tip
Number
1 GEN OFF-ON System is not able to transmit data Soft Possible problem with the cable to the console,
to the Console CPU board in the generator, or the display board
in the console.
2 – Not used. Soft None
3 SELECT OTHER Incorrect tube selection in the Soft Verify the technique button is configured
TECHNIQUE technique configuration data. properly.
4 SELECT OTHER Console sending wrong technique Soft Verify the technique button is configured
TECHNIQUE information to the generator. properly.
5 SELECT OTHER Illegal tube type found in tube Soft Verify the tube configuration is set properly.
TECHNIQUE configuration data.
6 SELECT OTHER The tube select switch on the HT Soft Check for loose connections at the HT
FOCUS Transformer did not reach the Transformer or a possible bad motor and switch.
correct position.
7 SELECT OTHER Illegal focus selection received – None
FOCUS from the console.
8 SELECT OTHER Tube focus selection was not found Soft Check filaments and regulators.
TECHNIQUE in the filament data.

Continued on next page

MTX Generator Errors, continued

Error
Message Description Type Troubleshooting Tip
Number
9 SELECT OTHER More than one tube is being Soft Check HT Transformer tube select switches.
ROTOR selected at the same time or none
are selected
10 SELECT OTHER Illegal rotor frequency found in the Soft Verify the Generator configuration is set properly.
ROTOR configuration data
11 EARLY Illegal rotor speed selection Soft None
TERMINATION received from the console
12 EARLY Uncommanded KVp. Hard Verify there is no KVp being produced. There
TERMINATION may be a problem with the IVC board or the ADA
board.
13 EARLY Cathode Overcurrent (K51). Hard Verify using a scope. Check the HT cables.
TERMINATION Swap the HT cables if necessary to see if the
problem moves to the Anode side.
14 EARLY Anode Overcurrent (K52). Hard Verify using a scope. Check the HT cables.
TERMINATION Swap the HT cables if necessary to see if the
problem moves to the Cathode side.
15 EARLY Large Filament overcurrent. Hard Swap the filament regulator PCBs. If the
TERMINATION problem moves, replace or repair the bad PCB.
16 EARLY Small Filament overcurrent. Hard Swap the filament regulator PCBs. If the
TERMINATION problem moves, replace or repair the bad PCB.

Continued on next page

MTX Generator Errors, continued

Error
Message Description Type Troubleshooting Tip
Number
28 SELECT OTHER Rotor error during HT switching. Soft Check the rotor circuit.
TECHNIQUE
29 RESTART ROTOR Rotor Start Failure. Soft Check the rotor circuit.
30 RESTART ROTOR Rotor run failure in low speed. Soft Check the rotor circuit.
31 CALL SERVICE Rotor brake time exceeded. Soft Verify the brake time in the tube configuration.
32 CALL SERVICE Software error. Soft None
33 PLEASE WAIT mAS integrator run-on. Soft Loss of mA feedback from PCB 51. Bad ribbon
cable connection between EPC and CPU.
34 EARLY KVp failed to reach 75% of Soft Check the mA ( PCB 52 TP2) and kV
TERMINATION commanded KVp. waveforms (PCB 52 TP1). Run MTX Filament
Calibration.
35 EARLY Over kV. Hard Check waveforms. (See error 34)
TERMINATION
36 SELECT OTHER Open filament during exposure Soft Check the associated filament regulator
FOCUS (large filament). PCB and verify the +/- 75V supply on PCB 7.
37 SELECT OTHER Open filament during exposure Soft Check the associated filament regulator
FOCUS (small filament). PCB and verify the +/- 75V supply on PCB 7.

Continued on next page

MTX Generator Errors, continued

Error
Message Description Type Troubleshooting Tip
Number
38 SELECT OTHER Inverter failure. Soft Check the Inverter SCR’S for shorts. Suspect
FOCUS a possible HT Transformer if the inverter is OK.
39 SELECT OTHER Software error. Soft None
FOCUS
40 CALL SERVICE Data transmission overflow. Soft Check communication between the
generator and the console CPUs.
41 – Not used. – None
42 CALL SERVICE Data transmission not accepted by Soft None
console.
43 CALL SERVICE Rotor failed to start Soft See MTX Rotor Drive Flowchart
44 CALL SERVICE Software error. Soft None
45 CALL SERVICE Software error. Soft None
46 ALL ALLOCATED Insufficient filament RAM (during Soft Using filament data, edit at the console.
calibration only). De-allocate the filament data block.
47 SELECT OTHER Filament not calibrated. Soft Run the MTX Filament Calibration
FOCUS procedure.

Continued on next page

MTX Generator Errors, continued

Error
Message Description Type Troubleshooting Tip
Number
48 CALL SERVICE Configuration data checksum error. Soft Verify all configurations.
49 CALL SERVICE Software error. Soft None
50 SELECT OTHER Illegal AEC pickup number found in Soft Verify technique button configuration.
TECHNIQUE the configuration data.
51 SELECT NON-AEC AEC data cleared. Soft Perform AEC Pickup Calibration or edit the
data.
52 SELECT NON-AEC AEC not allowed. Soft Verify Technique button configuration.
53 SELECT OTHER Filament data checksum error. Soft Perform MTX Filament Calibration or edit
FOCUS the filament data.
54 SELECT OTHER AEC data checksum error. Soft Perform AEC Pickup Calibration or edit the
SCREEN data.
55-56 – Not used. – None
57 NO PF CAL DATA PCAL checksum error. Hard Perform pulsed fluoro calibration
58 TURN GEN OFF-ON Large Filament Overdrive. Hard Check large filament PCB during fluoro
(PIN 5Az 10).
59 TURN GEN OFF-ON Small Filament Overdrive. Hard Check small filament PCB during fluoro
(PIN 6Az 10).

MTX System Error Log

The MTX generator provides an error log that is helpful Error Take this Action
when troubleshooting MTX generator problems. The
following table lists the possible errors and actions to 18 Check CB01 circuit breaker and
take to resolve the error. reset if necessary. If the circuit
breaker CB01 is okay and the error
occurs in Fluoro, then there could
Error Take this Action be a problem with the Inverter or
HT Transformer.
1, 7, 40, and 42 Run the MTX
Communications Loopback 19 Turn the generator Off then back
Test on to clear the error

3, 4, 5, 10, 22, 48, and 50 Verify Technique, Tube, and 23, 28, 29, 30, and 31 See MTX Rotor Drive
Generator Configurations Flowchart
6 and 9 See MTX Tube Selection 33 See MTX mA and mAs
Flowchart Flowchart
8, 46, 47, and 53 Run the MTX Filament 38 Suspect a possible tube arc and
Calibration procedure at the see MTX Chopper Flowchart
console 51 and 54 Run the MTX AEC Flowchart
12, 34, and 45 See MTX Chopper Flowchart procedure at the console.

13 and 14 Check relays 52K1 and 52K2, then For all other MTX errors, refer to MTX MTX Generator
refer to MTX mA and mAs Errors.
Flowchart
15, 16, 20, 21, 36, and 37 See MTX Filament Drive
Flowchart

1725 Spotfilm Device Error Codes

Description of SFD Error Code Types
The spotfilm device has two types of error codes
displayed in two separate locations.
Front panel error codes are operational error codes.
The diagnostic display panel codes appear on the
Diagnostic Display Panel. They indicate that a system
fault has occurred and the mechanism that failed.
If the SFD system detects certain irregularities in
operation, it will cause a fault code to be displayed on the
front panel of the SFD and operation stops.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Error Codes, continued

Front Panel Error Codes Error Take this
Definition
The following table is a description of the SFD error Code Action
codes that may be displayed on the front panel. E26 Trap Vector Exception NA
Note It is important to read the code displayed on the E27 Privilege Violation Exception NA
diagnostic display panel when an error is dis-
E28 Trace Exception NA
played on the font panel. This is because the
diagnostic display panel code will provide more E29 Line 1010 Exception NA
detailed information about the type of failure that E30 Line 1111 Exception NA
occurred.
E31 Reserved 1 Exception NA
Once the error condition is cleared, operation can
E32 Reserved 2 Exception NA
be restored by pressing the reset button on the
back of the front panel. E33 Reserved 3 Exception (68010 format NA
error)
Error Take this E34 Uninitialized Vector Exception NA
Definition
Code Action
E35 Spurious Interrupt Exception or NA
E20 Default Exception NA BERR during interrupt
E21 Bus Error Exception NA E40 Failure of carriage mechanism NA
(normal operation - hardware/
E22 Address Error Exception NA software)
E23 Illegal Instruction Exception NA E41 Failure of Collimator /Mask NA
E24 Zero Divide Exception NA Mechanism (normal operation -
hardware/ software)
E25 Check Instruction Exception NA
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Error Codes, continued

Front Panel Error Codes, continued Error Take this
Definition
Code Action
Error Take this
Definition E83 Task synchronization error NA
Code Action
(calibration - software)
E42 Failure of Collimator/Mask NA
mechanism (normal operation - E85 Collimator/Masks busy (calibration NA
hardware/ software) - hardware/ software)

E44 SFD parked while exposing NA

(normal operation - hardware)
E45 General Mechanism Failure NA
E61 General failure, EIP too long NA
(normal operation - hardware)
E62 Generator failure. Prep Ready NA
time-out (normal operation -
hardware)
E70 Collimator ready failed (normal NA
operation - hardware)
E80 Factory Calibration incomplete NA
(power up - calibration)
E81 Invalid cassette size (calibration - NA
user/hardware/ calibration)
E82 EEPROM initialization error NA
(calibration - hardware/ software)

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Error Codes, continued

Diagnostic Display Error Codes
The Diagnostic Display Panel codes appear on the
Error Take this
Diagnostic Display. They indicate the system fault and Definition
Code Action
the mechanism that failed. The diagnostic panel codes
are FF codes, unless the front panel (Primary SFD error) FF [FF] Last request not completed NA
code is 20-35. Blown fuse on the motor controller
board.
• Codes 20 -35 are stack errors
Faulty Motor Controller Board Motor
– 20, 23 - 35 are long stack errors Controller

– 21, 22 are short stack errors Board disconnected or not making

good contact.
0 The last request was successful NA
2 Device Busy NA
10 Device Failed NA
A motor unable to, respond to a move
command.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Error Codes, continued

Diagnostic Display Error Codes, continued Error Take this
Definition
Code Action
Error Take this
Definition 15 Motor is Home Error NA
Code Action
The selected motor has received a
11 Motor Command Error NA command to go to its home position
An error occurred when a command when it is already home.
was issued to a motor. 16 Motor Did Not Respond Time-out Error NA
This error most often indicates that the Software did not respond to a request
SFD software and the mechanism are to move a motor within the set time.
not synchronized.
17 A motor controller was not on line to NA
12 Motor Position Error NA accept a request for motor movement.
A motor command was issued that
18 A motor controller module has NA
cannot be executed from its present
detected a motor system failure and
position. This error most often
cannot recover.
indicates that the SFD software and
the mechanism are not synchronized. 30 Cassette jammed. NA
13 Motor Sensor NA 31 Carriage Time-out Error NA
Error Indicates that the motor home Carriage mechanism software timed
sensor may have failed. out.
14 Motor Request Error NA
Motor Manager does not understand
this request.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Error Codes, continued

Diagnostic Display Error Codes, continued Error Take this
Definition
Code Action
Error Take this
Definition 38 Carriage Head/Foot Motor Failure. NA
Code Action
39 Carriage Front/Back Motor Failure NA
32 Carriage No-Frame Error NA Error.
Carriage was requested to go to next
3A Carriage Status Failure Error. NA
frame when no additional frames were
available. 3B Carriage Motor(s) Off-Line. NA
33 Carriage Is Home Error NA 50 Invalid Collimator/Mask/AEC NA
Cassette carriage was already at its Command.
home position when a request to go 51 Collimator Failure Error NA
home was received.
The COLLIMATOR READY (LO true)
34 Carriage Unreferenced Error NA was off for more than one second.
The positional reference of the Collimator shutter blades
cassette carriage has been lost. mechanically binding.
35 Invalid Carriage Command Error NA 52 Collimator size update requested but NA
The carriage has received a command not completed in the allotted time.
that it does not understand. Collimator shutter blades
mechanically binding.
36 Invalid Carriage Position Error NA
Request cannot be processed from 53 Collimator Ready signal time-out. NA
the current carriage position.
37 Invalid cassette size for this operation. NA

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Error Codes, continued

Diagnostic Display Error Codes, continued Error Take this
Definition
Code Action
Error Take this
Definition 81 Grid Motor Failure Error NA
Code Action

54 Request to move masks not NA

completed successfully.
55 Request to reposition head/foot masks NA
not completed in the allotted time.
56 Request to reposition front/back NA
masks not completed in the allotted
time.
57 Request to move masks not NA
completed in the allotted time.
58 AEC Fields Failure Error NA
70 Cone motor failed. NA
72 Cone manager task can not be NA
created.
73 Cone manager busy. NA
74 Invalid request issued to Cone NA
manager.
80 Invalid request issued to Grid NA
manager.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Error Codes, continued

Diagnostic Display Error Codes when Front
Panel Error Codes are E20 to E35
When Error codes E20 to E35 are displayed on the
front panel of the SFD, the Diagnostic Display Panel
will display the content of the exception stack frame.
These codes indicate faults in the operation of the CPU
board due to hardware or power supply failure. Front
panel codes E21 and E22 are for the long stack frame.
Codes E20 and E23 through E35 are for the short stack
frame.

Error Code Definition

PC Program Counter - Shows the value of the
program counter at the time of the exception.
SR Status Register - Shows the value of the status
register at the time of the exception.
IR Instruction Register - Shows the first two bytes of
the last instruction that was retrieved at the time
of the exception.
AR Access Address - Indicates the memory address
at the time of the exception.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Error Codes, continued

Diagnostic Display Error Codes when Front
Panel Error Codes are E20 to E35, continued

Error Code Definition

FR Processor State - Bits 0, 1 and 2 indicate the
memory reference classification as follows:
001 User data
010 User Program
101 Supervisor Data
110 Supervisor Program
Bit three indicates the type of memory access as
follows:
0 - Instruction Fetch
1 - Other
Bit four indicates the type of bus cycle as follows:
0 - Write
1 - Read

Elite 1500/5000 Table Error Codes

Power-up Error Codes

Error Code Description Hints

UU Table is functioning normally None
CU The Tilt limit safety switch has been activated NA
C0 The Front Panel failed. Short Circuit in the Touch Panel.
CPU Display
0----Tilt Control
1----Longitudinal Table Top Control
2----Transverse Table Top Control
3----Auto Centering Control
C1 Tilt Strain Gauge failed NA
C2 Long. Table Top Strain Gauge failed. NA
C3 Transverse Table Top Strain Gauge failed NA
C4 Long. Power Assist Strain Gauge failed NA

Continued on next page

Elite 1500/5000 Table Error Codes, continued

Power-up Error Codes, continued

Error Code Description Hints

C6 EEPROM checksum error Calibration was not finished or the
calibration data is corrupt.
C7 EPROM checksum error NA
C8 The +5V or ±12V Power Supply failed NA
C9 +10 ref. Power Supply failed NA
UC RAM check failed NA
U6 The Motor Controller feedback failed. CPU Display
0----Tilt Control
1----Longitudinal Table Top Control
2----Transverse Table Top Control
5C System Watch-dog failed NA

Continued on next page

Elite 1500/5000 Table Error Codes, continued

Power-up Error Codes, continued

Error Code Description Hints

6C Over-travel limit CPU Display
U1----Long. Table Top - Foot end
U2----Trans. Table Top - Back end
U3----Spotfilmer Long. - Foot Back end
U4----Tilt - Vertical
U5----Spotfilmer Vertical - Up
C1----Long. Table Top - Head end
U4----Tilt - Vertical
U5----Spotfilmer Vertical - Up
C1----Long. Table Top - Head end
C2----Trans. Table Top - Front end
C3----Spotfilmer Long. - Head end
C4----Tilt - Trendelenburg
C5----Spotfilmer Vert. - Down

Continued on next page

Elite 1500/5000 Table Error Codes, continued

Power-up Error Codes, continued

Error Code Description Hints

7C Collision Over-Travel CPU Display
0C----With Ceiling - Tilt Trend.
1C----With right wall - Tilt Trend.
2C----With right wall - Tilt Vert.
3C----With floor - Tilt Vert.
4C----With floor - Tilt Trend.
5C----With left wall - Tilt Trend
6C----With left wall - Tilt Vert.
7U Motor Controller Power Supply failed 100 Vdc time-out
8U The selected 30-30, 20-40, or 40-40 mode is NA
different than the one selected during
calibration
9U A/D Converter failed NA

Elite 1500/5000 Table Error Codes, continued

Normal Operation Error Codes

Error Code Description Hints

CU The Tilt limit safety switch is activated NA
U6 Motor Controller feedback has failed CPU Display
0----Tilt Control
1----Long. Table Top Control
2----Trans. Table Top Control
1C The Tilt overspeed or position sensor has NA
failed
2C The long. Top overspeed or position sensor NA
has failed
3C The trans. Top overspeed or position sensor NA
has failed
4C The Inter-task communication has failed NA
5C The System Watch-dog has failed NA

Continued on next page

Elite 1500/5000 Table Error Codes, continued

Normal Operation Error Codes, continued

Error Code Description Hints

6C Over-travel Limit CPU Display
U1----Long. Table Top - Foot end
U2----Trans. Table Top - Back end
U3----Spotfilmer Long. - Foot Back end
U4----Tilt - Vertical
U5----Spotfilmer Vertical - Up
C1----Long. Table Top - Head end
C2----Trans. Table Top - Front end
C3----Spotfilmer Long. - Head end
C4----Tilt - Trendelenburg
C5----Spotfilmer Vert. - Down

Continued on next page

Elite 1500/5000 Table Error Codes, continued

Normal Operation Error Codes, continued

Error Code Description Hints

Continued on next page

Elite 1500/5000 Table Error Codes, continued

Calibration Error Codes

Error Code Description Hints

CU The Tilt limit safety switch is activated NA
1U ±5 Volt Power Supply is out of limits. NA
2U The +10 Volt ref. Power Supply is out of limits NA
3U The Table is not set up for calibration of left NA
wall.
4U The Table is not set up for calibration of right NA
wall
5U The Table is not set up for calibration of NA
ceiling.
U6 The Motor Controller feedback failed. CPU Display
0----Tilt Control
1----Longitudinal Table Top Control
2----Transverse Table Top Control

Elite 1500/5000 Table Error Codes, continued

Wrong Voltage Was Detected During
Calibration Steps 1 - 10

Error Code Description Hints

C0 Long. Table Top Strain Gauge - offset NA
C2 Trans. Table Top Strain Gauge - offset Verify that all of the CAPS (blue) located
This is one of the most common errors. at the table base are good.
Replace as necessary
C4 Long. Power Assist Strain Gauge - offset NA
C6 Table Tilt Strain Gauge - offset NA
C8 Vert. Power Assist Strain Gauge - offset Verify that all of the CAPS (blue) located
at the table base are good.
This is one of the most common errors.
Replace as necessary

Elite 1500/5000 Table Error Codes, continued

Wrong Voltage Was Detected During
Calibration Steps 11 - 20

Error Code Description Hints

U0 Long. Table Top Position - offset NA
U1 Long. Table Top Position - Gain NA
U2 Trans. Table Top Position - offset NA
U3 Trans. Table Top Position - Gain NA
U4 Long. Power Assist Head Travel Limit NA
U5 Long. Power Assist Foot Travel Limit NA
U6 Tilt Position - offset NA
U7 Tilt Position - Gain NA
U8 Vert. Power Assist Down Travel Limit NA
U9 Vert. Power Assist Up Travel Limit NA

FUNCTIONAL CHECKS AND PROCEDURES

MTX Generator Fluoro Collimator Calibration
Strain Gauge Limit Adjustments
Checking MTX RAD kV
1725 SFD Motor Controller Board Calibration Check
MTX Final Checks
Final Check-out
Copying the NVRAM
1725 SFD Mechanical Checks
Verifying HMS Starter Functions
Checking Default Operating Options
Carriage Position Check
Collimator
Collimatic 4 Functional Check Ceiling Tube Mount (CTM)
Rotation
Elite 1500/5000 Table Angulation
Elite 1500/5000 Electrical System Calibration Check Vertical Movement
Transverse
1725 Spotfilm Device (SFD) Longitudinal
1725 SFD Lock Check Longitudinal and Transverse Centering
Exposure Interlock (Park/lock) Switch Test PFM-90 CTM Functional Checks
Collimator PCB Calibration Check
1725 SFD Collimator Calibration Check

Overhead Tube (CTM) Functional Check

Check the following elements in the overhead tube to Angulation
ensure it is functioning correctly: 1. Grasp the tube assembly and verify there is no
• Rotation excessive movement when rotating the tube and
collimator in the longitudinal plane when locks are
• Angulation
activated.
• Vertical Movement
2. Using the angulation lock release button, verify the
• Transverse brake de-energizes. The detent lock should be felt at
90-degree increments. The electromagnetic brake
• Longitudinal
should hold the tube in any position without drifting.
• Longitudinal and Transverse Centering
Vertical Movement
Rotation 1. Release the vertical lock using the push button on
1. Grasp the tube assembly and verify there is no front of the tube assembly.
excessive movement in the circular plane. If you 2. Verify that the column rises and lowers to physical
detect motion, inspect the rotational lock assembly at limits without binding.
the base of the CTM. Tightened and/or adjust the
lock assembly. 3. Pull up on the main support cable and verify the
mechanical safety latch engages. When energized,
2. Using the rotational lock release lever on right side of no vertical motion downward is allowed.
column, verify the tube can be rotated and that it
stops in detents.

Continued on next page

Overhead Tube (CTM) Functional Check, continued

Transverse Longitudinal and Transverse Centering
1. Push or pull on tube/column assembly and verify A special centering button is located on the front of the
there is no movement in the transverse plane. tube assembly control panel. It is used in conjunction
with the vertical, longitudinal, and transverse buttons to
2. Using the transverse lock release button on the front
provide a positive stop at preset positions.
of the tube assembly, verify that the transverse lock
releases and allows transverse movement. Using any or all of the above movement buttons, verify
that the CTM stops at all the pre-determined positions.
Longitudinal
1. Push or pull on tube/column assembly and verify
there is no movement in the longitudinal plane.
2. Using the longitudinal release button on the front of
the tube assembly, verify that the longitudinal lock
releases and allows longitudinal movement.

Checking MTX RAD kV

Overview 1. To check the kV, on the measurement PCB, connect
Radiographic kV is controlled by a hardware closed loop an oscilloscope to TP1 and the ground lead to the
that is factory calibrated. Normally, kV calibration at the junction of C3/C12.
time of installation is not necessary. However, kV 2. Select mA Time Mode of operation.
accuracy must be checked.
3. Make exposures and record kV peak measurements
for a range of mA values at a mid-range kV.
Caution The ripple frequency of the MTX is
nominally 15 kHz. This causes some 4. Examine the kV readings. If there is a consistent
problems for many kV measurement error, then perform a baseline adjustment.
devices.
• Use the GE kV Divider (Bleeder) for
invasive measurements.
• For non-invasive kV measurements
use the Kiethley measurement device.
Note, that in certain ranges this device
filters the ripple that may lead to kV
peak measurement errors.
When using this device, display its
output on one channel of the scope
and the internal kV test point (TP1 on
the measurement board) on the other.
If there is a significant discrepancy in
the ripple between these two signals,
then the Kiethley meter may not be
measuring kVp accurately.

MTX Final Checks

Perform the following steps before powering up or
returning the system to normal operational status.
1. Verify all ribbon cables are connected in their proper
slots.
2. Be sure jumper J1 is in place after troubleshooting
the chopper and inverter.
3. Make sure the filament test switches on the filament
drive PCBs are in the normal position.
4. Check all high tension cables and connectors.
5. Verify all circuit boards are seated properly.
6. Remove all test jumpers from the system.
7. Shut off the diagnostics in the console.

Copying the NVRAM

The NVRAM (P/N 2206160) should be replaced every 5. If the copy was successful power down the
four years as a precautionary maintenance routine since generator and remove the two NVRAMs.
there is an internal battery (in the chip). This procedure
6. If no further generator diagnostics need to be run,
allows you to copy the contents of a good NVRAM into
power down the system, return all ribbon cables to
the replacement.
their proper positions, and set the CPU Hex Switch
1. Power down the MTX generator at the console and to 0.
set the HEX switch to position 7.
2. Insert the NVRAM to be copied into the U3 socket on
the generator CPU PCB.
3. Insert the blank NVRAM into the U6 socket on the
generator CPU PCB.
4. Restore power to the generator.
When the copy procedure is complete the
"heartbeat" LED on the CPU PCB will stay off. If the
"heartbeat" LED blinks 4 times the copy procedure
failed. Verify the error and try again using a blank
NVRAM chip.

Installing a New Tube (MTX)

Other than the usual mechanical alignments associated
with any tube install, the tube should be seasoned. After
seasoning the tube, perform the calibration. kVp Setting Number of Exposures

Tube Seasoning 60

Tube Seasoning on an MTX Generator is somewhat 70 5 Exposures (no wait time)

accomplished during the Filament Calibration. We 80
recommend doing the Filament Calibration first and then
Wait 5 Minutes
performing the following seasoning process.
90
1. Set the generator time to approximately 6.4 seconds
and the mA to 10. Use the following settings. 100 5 Exposures (no wait time)
110
Wait 5 Minutes
110
120 5 Exposures (no wait time)
125

2. Wait another 10 minutes before taking any more

exposures

Verifying HMS Starter Functions

The following starter functions must be checked: 6. Verify LEDs 1 through 3 are lit on the Driver PCB.
• Verifying Starter Operation 7. Verify the Okay LED (LB1-1) on the Interface PCB is
flashing approximately every second.
• Checking Start and Run Voltage Values
8. Verify that the correct X-ray tube is selected by
• Checking the Undertable Hangover Delay
looking at LED LB1-9, 8, or 7 (OT, UT, AUX) on the
Verifying Starter Operation Interface PCB is lit.
Perform the following steps to ensure the starter is
functioning correctly. The CPU and interface PCBs Caution Do not turn off the main disconnect or the
centroid power if the rotor is in a
should be programmed and plugged in before starting
this procedure. hangover condition. This prevents a
brake cycle from occurring and could
1. Verify that the cables on the back of the starter result in damage to the X-ray tube.
chassis are installed properly.
Always turn off the generator first, wait a
2. Verify circuit breaker 1CB1, located on the back of few seconds (brake time), then turn off
the rotor drive chassis is On. the centroid power. Remember that a 5
inch anode has approximately a 15
3. Turn the centroid on and listen for 8 relay clicks as
the microprocessor runs the power up diagnostics. second brake time.
After 8 clicks the starter should be ready for
operation.
4. Measure the AC voltage on transformer 1T1 from
taps 1 through 3. The voltage should be 55V AC
(±10%).
5. Turn on the generator.

Verifying HMS Starter Functions, continued

Checking Start and Run Voltage Values Standard Tube Stator Values
The start and run voltage checks in this procedure are for
Mode of Adjustment
X-ray tubes with Q or rapid acceleration stators. Setting
Operation Voltage
Standard stator tubes can also be checked using this
procedure, but the voltages will be different. Normal Start 3" Anode = 220V AC

The start and run voltages applied to the X-ray tube rotor 4" Anode = 240V AC
windings ensure the anode reaches the proper speed for Normal Run 3" Anode = 70V AC
60 Hz and 180 Hz operation. The start and run voltages 4" Anode = 70V AC
are automatically selected from taps on the auto
High Speed Start 3" Anode = 240V AC
transformer when Q or non-Q tubes are programmed.
4" Anode = 260V AC
Note The AC brake voltage for 180 Hz operation is the
same as the 60 Hz start voltage. High Speed Run 3" Anode = 120V AC
4" Anode = 120V AC
To check the voltages, perform the following steps:
1. Attach a Frahm resonant reed tachometer onto the Q Stator (Rapid Acceleration) Values
X-ray tube.
Mode of Adjustment
2. Verify that the anode is above 3000 rpm in low speed Setting
Operation Voltage
and above 9000 rpm in high speed when the starter
goes into Run mode. Normal Start 220V AC
Normal Run 60V AC
Note If the jumpers are installed on TB1 of CB511 for a
MTX or Vector 100, then the start and run volt- High Speed Start 360V AC
ages for all tubes can be measured from TB1-C High Speed Run 65V AC
(common) to TB1-P2 (in a phase winding).

Verifying HMS Starter Functions, continued

Checking the Undertable Hangover Delay 3. Initiate a fluoro exposure by pressing either the
The undertable hangover delay allows the X-ray control footswitch or the service switch.
to change from fluoro to U.T. Rad (spotfilm) operation 4. After the rotor reaches running speed, return to
without returning to standby mode. Perform this check to standby mode. The rotor will continue running for the
ensure the hangover delay is operational. programmed hangover time. This should be
Refer to software and diagnostics section for information approximately 2 minutes for a 60 Hz hangover. After
on programming the hangover delay period. the hangover time, power is removed from the stator
and the anode begins to coast.
Note The MTX generator controls the hangover time. If
this generator is used, program the starter hang-
over to be defeated.
Perform the following procedure to check the undertable
hangover delay:
1. Turn on power.
2. Set up the X-ray control for normal speed and the
undertable X-ray tube.

Collimatic 4 Functional Check

To ensure the collimator is working correctly, perform the 11. Inspect the film for overall X-ray size and position of
following check. radio-opaque items to verify the light fields are within
specifications.
1. Insert the customer’s smallest cassette into the table
bucky tray. 12. Inspect for any unexposed areas on the film. If
present, determine if centering switches or collimator
2. Confirm the indicators on the front of the collimator
sizing is out of tolerance. Adjust centering switches
match the inserted cassette size.
or calibrate the collimator.
3. Vary SID between 36 and 48 inches to verify SID
compensation.
4. Repeat step 3 with the cassette rotated 90 degrees.
5. Repeat step 3 using the customer’s largest cassette.
6. Repeat step 3 if the wall cassette holder is present.
using minimum and maximum SID positions.
7. If any checks fail, calibrate the collimator using the
typical film cassette the customer uses.
8. Setup for an exposure.
9. Using the field lamp, align radio-opaque items (such
as coins) at the edges of the light field at all 4
corners.
10. Take an exposure and develop the film.

Elite 1500/5000 Electrical System Calibration Check

The system consists of 26 screens referred to as steps. • To exit the calibration procedure, place the ENABLE
These steps must be accessed in sequence. switch SW1 on I/O #1 PCB to the RUN position.
The purpose of this procedure is to:
Caution When the table CPU is in the
• Check the parameters for the position sensors, calibration mode, the normal table top
operator controls and X-ray room dimension and tilt limits that prevent collisions
clearances without affecting the calibration. This is are disabled. Monitor all movements
done without pressing the [STORE] button. If the to avoid collisions and equipment
[STORE] button is pressed for any step, the following damage.
two items apply.
Calibration Procedure
Caution If the [STORE] push-button has been Before beginning the procedure, press the [STEP] button
pressed and the calibration procedure on the I/O #1 circuit board to access the next screen.
is exited or interrupted before a new
checksum (step 25) is generated, a 1. Turn power ON to the table and filmer.
checksum error is generated and the After initial power-up (or manual reset), "cc" will
entire calibration procedure must be appear briefly on the table front panel display and
redone.
then count down from 9 to 0. During this time, do not
use any of table's controls, including SFD power
assist handle. This will allow the CPU to perform all
checks and establish functional integrity of the
system. Any operation during this time will result in
an error.

Continued on next page

Elite 1500/5000 Electrical System Calibration Check, continued

Calibration Procedure, continued Use the STEP button (SW2) on I/O PCB #1 after
After approximately 15 seconds "uu" is displayed storing a value or to proceed to the next step
indicating the table is ready. If any faults are detected without entering a value.
by the CPU, an error code is displayed. C5 indicates
a vertical motion request from the SFD. Warning Do NOT use the STORE button (SW3)
on I/O PCB #1. This button stores a
2. Set the ENABLE switch SW1 on I/O #1 PCB to the value that may require recalibration of
CAL position. the system.
3. Reset the CPU by pressing the [RESET] button on
the CPU PCB. The I/O now displays 01 to indicate
the system is ready for step 1.
During this procedure the display on I/O #1 PCB
displays either a calibration step number or a
calibration error code. During the odd-numbered
steps 1 to 19, the table front panel displays the
actual voltage of the function selected times 10 (i.e.
35 on the display = 3.5 volts).

Continued on next page

Elite 1500/5000 Electrical System Calibration Check, continued

Calibration Procedure, continued following table is a description the acceptable voltage
The following table provides the necessary steps for range displayed and the error code displayed when the
completing an electrical system calibration check. The values are outside that range.

Note "Display only" indicates that the value displayed is determined by the program and cannot be changed.

STEP Description Acceptable Voltage Range Error Code

1 Longitudinal top speed request 47 to 53 C0
offset.
2 Longitudinal top speed request gain. Display only -
3 Transverse top speed request offset. 47 to 53 C2
4 Transverse top speed request gain. Display only -
5 SFD longitudinal PA request offset. 49 to 51 C4
6 SFD longitudinal PA request gain. Display only -
7 Tilt speed request offset. 47 to 53 C6
8 Tilt speed request gain. Display only -
9 SFD vertical PA request offset. 49 to 51 C8
10 SFD vertical PA request gain. Display only -
11 Longitudinal top position offset. 48 to 52 U0
12 Longitudinal top position gain. (The value in Step 11) +22 U1

Continued on next page

Elite 1500/5000 Electrical System Calibration Check, continued

Calibration Procedure, continued

STEP Description Acceptable Voltage Range Error Code

13 Transverse top position offset. 48 to 52 U2
14 Transverse top position gain. (The value in step 13) +6 U3
15 SFD longitudinal position offset. 32 to 38 U4
16 SFD longitudinal position gain. (The value in step 15) +25 to 32 U5
17 Tilt position offset. 48 to 52 U6
18 Tilt position gain. (The value in step 17) +13 (±2) U7
19 SFD vertical position offset. 6 to 22 U8
20 SFD vertical position gain. (The value in step 19) +68 to 78 U9
21 Look-up table generation. - -
22 Left wall limit. - 3U
23 Right wall limit. - 4U
24 Ceiling limit. - 4U
25 SFC Height Limit for Parking and - -
Check-sum generation.
26 Exit from calibration. - -

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks

The following checks can be performed on the Spotfilm 1725 SFD Lock Check
Device to ensure it is functioning correctly:
Lock Adjustment
1725 SFD Lock Check 1. Apply power to the table.
Exposure Interlock (Park/lock) Switch Test 2. Engage the 1725 Spotfilm Device Latch. The SFD
Collimator PCB Calibration Check should be firmly locked in position. If not, adjust the
lock.
1725 SFD Collimator Calibration Check
Exposure Interlock (Park/lock) Switch Test
Fluoro Collimator Calibration
1. Make sure all SFD screws are tight, printed circuit
Strain Gauge Limit Adjustments boards are properly seated and all belts are in place.
1725 SFD Motor Controller Board Calibration Check 2. Apply power to the table.
Final Check-out 3. Make sure that the Parking Rod latching pin
1725 SFD Mechanical Checks engages the solenoid-operated latching assembly.

Checking Default Operating Options 4. Lock the SFD.

Carriage Position Check 5. Press the Prep/Expose key.

6. If the message PLEASE LOCK SFD appears on the
diagnostic LCD panel, and a flashing lock icon, and a
beeping tone. It is necessary to adjust the lock.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

Collimator PCB Calibration Check 10. Move the SFD vertical to 6.00 volts.
Make sure the SID POT is properly adjusted before 11. Engage the COMP (compression) lock.
performing this procedure.
12. Set SW1-1, -2, -3 and -4 to their closed positions.
1. Remove the Collimator PCB from card cage at the
13. Check that DVM indicates 6.75 VDC.
rear of the table.
2. Install the Collimator PCB on the extender board
(Part No. D0109-05-453).
3. Insert the Collimator PCB and extender into the card
cage.
4. Set switches SW1 -1, -2, -3 and -4 on the Collimator
PCB to open.
5. Connect a DVM to TP5(+) and TP1 (-).
6. Set the SFD to the minimum SID position.
7. Check that R41 is 6.00 volts.
8. Move the SFD to the maximum SID.
9. Check that DVM indicates 8.40 volts.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

1725 SFD Collimator Calibration Check Note To eliminate possible problems caused by
mechanical misalignment of the film make sure to
Note This procedure consist of 48 steps and may
always insert the film cassette into the SFD the
require some time to complete.
same way for each test.
1. Return the Super User's Menu to the diagnostic
6. Load the cassette by pressing the [CASSETTE]
display.
button on the SFD front panel.
2. Use the UP or DOWN keys to highlight
7. Set the system as follows:
INSTALLATION CALIBRATION.
Set the SFD to the middle of vertical travel (SID).
3. Press [SELECT].
Center the table top
4. Highlight SFD COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION and
press the [SELECT] key. Place the center of the SFD over the center of the
table.
DANGER X-rays are produced during the
Move the table bucky out of the exposure area.
following procedure. Wear
fluoroscopic gloves and apron and Make sure that RAPID SEQUENCE is not selected
clear the area of unnecessary (RAPID SEQ. LED is OFF).
personnel. Failure to comply may
8. Set the generator controls to:
cause serious injury to attendant.
50 mA
5. Make sure that you are able to identify the head to
50 kV
foot and front to back orientation of a cassette and
insert it into the SFD. 1/30 second
small focal spot.
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

SFD Collimator Calibration Check, continued If the film appears to be over- or under-exposed,
increase or decrease the generator settings slightly as
9. On the COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION MENU
required and repeat steps 8 through 16 until a good
highlight MAKE EXPOSURE PATTERN.
pattern (density about 1.0 to 1.5) is obtained.
10. Press [SELECT].
17. Using a ruler calibrated in tenths of an inch, measure
11. Highlight CALIBRATION PATTERN. Collimator Calibration Test Exposure Pattern. Begin
12. Press [SELECT]. measuring at the top (back) of the pattern and work
down. Then start at the left (head) side and move
13. The SFD will now request 6 radiographic exposures. toward the right.
These exposures must be made in a single
sequence by fully pressing the PREP/EXPOSE Note Start each measurement at the point where edge
button for each exposure. density begins to change from the film back-
ground. End each measurement where the den-
14. When all 6 exposures are complete, operator will be sity of the edge completes its transition to a clear
instructed by to eject the cassette. background. This allows for the widest possible
interpretation of each width.
15. Develop the film.
18. Record each of the twelve measurements made.
16. Examine the film to verify medium exposure density
at the outer edges of the Collimator Calibration 19. Record the six front to back values first in order from
Test Exposure Pattern. the smallest to the largest.
Note If the density is too high or too low on the outside 20. Record the six head/foot values in the same manner.
edges, the differences in the densities within the
pattern may not be distinguishable for accurate
measurement in the next step.
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

SFD Collimator Calibration Check, continued 32. Record each of the six measurements displayed in
the Collimator H/F Aperture Menu for future
21. Access the SFD COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION
reference so that they can be re-entered, if needed.
menu.
33. Select H/F value #1.
22. Highlight the INPUT/CHECK F/B VALUES.
34. Check that the displayed value matches as close as
23. Press the [SELECT] key.
possible the actual measured value. If not seeSFD
24. Record each of the six measurements displayed in Collimator Calibration.
the Collimator F/B A and H/F Aperture for future
35. Press [RETURN] to return to the Collimator H/F
reference so that they can be re-entered, if needed.
Aperture Menu.
25. Select F/B value #1.
36. Repeat steps 33 through 35 for the remaining H/F
26. Check that the displayed value matches as close as values.
possible the actual measured value. If not see SFD
37. Make sure that you are able to identify the head to
Collimator Calibration.
foot and front to back orientation of a loaded 14" x14"
27. Press [RETURN] to return to the Collimator F/B [35 mm x 35 mm] cassette and insert it into the SFD.
Aperture Menu.
Note To eliminate possible problems caused by
28. Repeat steps 25 through 27 for the remaining F/B mechanical misalignment of the film make sure to
values. always insert the film cassette into the SFD the
29. Press [RETURN] once or twice to return the SFD same way for each test.
COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION menu.
30. Highlight the INPUT/CHECK H/F VALUES
31. Press the [SELECT] key.
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

SFD Collimator Calibration Check, continued 43. Highlight VERIFICATION PATTERN on the SFD
diagnostic display panel.
38. Load the cassette by pressing the [CASSETTE]
button on the SFD front panel. 44. The SFD will request 10 radiographic exposures.
These must be made in a single sequence by
39. Set the system as follows:
pressing the PREP/EXPOSE button for each
Set the SFD to the middle of vertical travel (SID).
45. When all 10 exposures are complete, operator will
Center the table top be instructed to eject the cassette.
Place the center of the SFD over the center of the 46. Develop the film.
table.
47. Examine the film to verify the correct Collimator
Move the table bucky out of the exposure area. Calibration Verification Pattern, is displayed.
Make sure that RAPID SEQUENCE is not selected 48. Measure the stepped areas on the film.
(RAPID SEQ. LED is OFF).
The steps should start at 3 inches and increase in
40. Set the generator controls to: 1-inch increments to 12 inches in both directions
Uneven steps could be caused by:
50 mA
• Wrong input data
50 kV
• Communication problem on the SFD to collimator
1/30 second
data bus
Small focal spot.
• Mechanical problem in the collimator head.
41. On the COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION MENU
49. Press [RETURN] three times to return to the
highlight MAKE EXPOSURE PATTERN.
Installation Calibration Menu.
42. Press [SELECT]. Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

Fluoro Collimator Calibration 7. Make sure F/B=***** is highlighted to indicate that it
is selected. If it is not, press the [SELECT] button to
1. Access the Installation Calibration Menu.
toggle the display between F/B and H/F.
2. Use the UP or Down keys to highlight FLUORO
8. Press the [INIT] button to initialize the collimator
COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION.
blades by opening them to their maximum value.
3. Press [SELECT].
9. If the shutter blades will not open enough, press the
4. Record each of the values in the Fluoro Collimator [INIT] button on the diagnostic display panel to get
Calibration menu for future reference so that they ****. Move the manual shutter controls to obtain the
can be re-entered, if needed. required opening.
5. Load the cassette by pressing the [CASSETTE] 10. Press and hold one of the FLUORO buttons to
button on the SFD front panel. initiate a fluoroscopic exposure while repositioning
the front/back collimator blades with the manual
DANGER X-rays are produced during the collimator controls at the upper right corner of the
following procedure. Wear SFD.
fluoroscopic gloves and apron and
11. Adjust the collimator control until the collimator blade
clear the area of unnecessary
edges just become visible at the sides on the image
personnel or use radiation barriers
on the TV monitor.
during radiation exposures. Failure to
comply may cause serious injury to 12. Store this blade position by pressing [SAVE].
attendant personnel.
13. In the Fluoro Calibration Menu select NORMAL
6. On the IA control panel select NORMAL MAG. MAG: H/F=*****.
(for systems with version l.XX software, use the SFD
diagnostic panel.)
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

Fluoro Collimator Calibration continued
14. Press the [INIT] button to initialize the collimator
blades by opening them to their maximum value.
15. If the shutter blades will not open enough, press the
[INIT] button on the diagnostic display panel to get
****. Move the manual shutter controls to obtain the
required opening.
16. Press and hold one of the FLUORO buttons to
initiate a fluoroscopic exposure while repositioning
the head/foot collimator blades with the manual
collimator controls at the upper right corner of the
SFD.
17. Adjust the collimator control until the collimator blade
edges just become visible at the sides on the image
on the TV monitor.
18. Store this blade position by pressing [SAVE].
19. Repeat steps 13 through 18 for the MAG I and MAG
II modes
20. Press the ESC key twice to return to the main menu.
This completes the fluoro calibration procedure.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

Strain Gauge Limit Adjustments
Introduction
The strain gauge limits are factory set; however, these
values must be set to the values listed, or some of the
calibration setpoints may fall out of the operating range.
Note
• If this adjustment is required, you must then perform
the table calibration.

Adjustment Voltage
Test Test Point
POT (+/-0.05V DC)
SFD Long. Req. TP1 +5 VDC
SFD Vertical TP2 R7 +5 VDC
Req.
Tilt Req. TP3 R15 +5 VDC
TOP Long Req. TP4 R22 +5 VDC
TOP Trans. Req TP5 R29 +5 VDC

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

1725 SFD Motor Controller Board Calibration The Motor current on type B boards is adjusted for a
Check peak of 5 amps. The U13 PAL 1C marked on these
PCBs is marked -115 HALFSTEP.
Introduction
There are two different types of motor controller boards CAUTION Care must be taken while adjusting
used in the Spotfilm device. the motor control circuits so test
Both board types use the same calibration procedure leads don’t short out a power supply.
however, the current settings are different Make sure that the scope is accurately
calibrated and the test probe properly
Board Type A compensated.
P/N D-0109-05-446-1 for SIN/COSINE drive. This
type of board is used to drive motors M3 (Grid), M4 Special Equipment Required
(F/B Mask), M5 (H/F Mask) and M6 (Cone). PAL 1C Storage oscilloscope.
U13 on these PCBs is marked -94 SINCOS.
The Motor current on type A boards is adjusted for a CAUTION • Isolate oscilloscope ground from
maximum peak of 4 amps on each board. power plug.

Board Type B • Do not remove or replace circuit

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

SFD Motor Controller Board Calibration 9. If the peak of the waveform for R14 is not 0.4 (half
Check, continued wave amplitude) VDC adjust R14 for the proper
value.
Board Type A (Sine/Cosine) Calibration Check
1. Turn power OFF to the SFD. Note Do not do not measure the spikes when measur-
ing the waveform on the scope.
2. Remove the motor controller PCB that is to be
adjusted. 10. Connect the Oscilloscope ground to the long lead of
R6 and the probe tip to the other side of the resistor
3. Install the motor control PCB on an extender. (solder side).
4. Connect the Oscilloscope ground to the long lead of 11. Actuate the appropriate panel touch switch for the
R5 and the probe tip to the other side of the resistor drive board being tested.
(solder side).
12. If the peak of the waveform for R14 is not 0.4 (half
5. Set the scope time base to 0.5 msec/div and the wave amplitude) VDC adjust R14 for the proper
vertical sensitivity to 0.2V/div. Use a single sweep value.
trigger.
6. Turn the SFD power ON.
7. With the motor running actuate the panel touch
switch for the drive board being tested.
8. Make sure that one cycle of the waveform is 2 mSEC
and consists of 7 pulses.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

SFD Motor Controller Board Calibration 9. If the peak of the waveform for R14 is not 0.5 (half
Instructions, continued wave amplitude) VDC adjust R14 for the proper
value.
Board Type B (Half Step) Calibration Check
1. Turn power OFF to the SFD. Note Do not do not measure the spikes when measur-
ing the waveform on the scope.
2. Remove the motor controller PCB that is to be
adjusted. 10. Connect the Oscilloscope ground to the long lead of
R6 and the probe tip to the other side of the resistor
3. Install the motor control PCB on an extender. (solder side).
4. Connect the Oscilloscope ground to the long lead of 11. Actuate the appropriate panel touch switch for the
R5 and the probe tip to the other side of the resistor drive board being tested.
(solder side).
12. If the peak of the waveform for R15 is not 0.4 (half
5. Set the scope time base to 20 usec/div and the wave amplitude) VDC adjust R14 for the proper
vertical sensitivity to 0.2 V/div. Use a single sweep value.
trigger.
6. Turn the SFD power ON.
7. With the motor running actuate the panel touch
switch for the drive board being tested.
8. Make sure that one cycle of the waveform is 48
USEC and consists of 4 pulses.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

Final Check-out seconds and allows the SFD to be positioned to
This section contains a list of checks to be performed on the rear of the table.
the SFD to insure that the operating controls function • With ALL LOCKS activated and indicator lit make
properly. sure that the transverse carriage lock is
disengages as long as the PARK button is
Pre-operation Check List
depressed.
1. Press the [ALL LOCKS] key. Make sure that all locks
are activated and that the light by the button lights. • Park the SFD and make sure spotfilm and
fluoroscopic exposures are inhibited.
2. Check the operation of the compression lock and the
LED on the COMP key lights. 5. Rapid Sequence

3. Bypass • Press the [RAPID SEQUENCE] key and verify

that the LED lights and that exposures can be
• With the [BYPASS] key deactivated (indicator not made at a rate of approximately two per second.
lit), verify that the table stops at 0° when tilted
from vertical to Trendelenburg or vice versa. 6. Grid
Note that the table must be tilted from greater • Make sure that the LED next to the GRID key is
than +/-3° before the center stop will function. not lit and that the grid is not in the exposure
• Press the [BYPASS] key. Make sure that the LED position.
by the BYPASS key is lit and that the table • Verify that pressing the [GRID] key lights the
passes through 0° when being tilted from greater GRID LED and that the grid moves into position.
than 3° vertical to Trendelenburg or vice versa.
• Press the [GRID] button a second time. Verify
4. Park that grid moves out of the expose position and
• Press the [PARK] button and make sure the park the LED goes out.
latch mechanism disengages for about 3 Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

Final Check-out, continued • Press the BYPASS key again to deactivate the
bypass function. While restraining movement of
Pre-operation Check List, continued
the cone, press the CONE key. Check that the
7. Cone Check LED next to the CONE key blinks to indicate that
• Make sure the BYPASS, ALL LOCKS and COMP the cone's movement is obstructed. Check the
LOCK are OFF. Verify that pressing the CONE that cone drive stops after about 15 seconds, but
key causes the cone to move forward to the the indicator continues blinking. Press the
expose position. While the cone is moving the [CONE] button again to resume operation.
indicator light next to the key should flash and 8. Collimator
and light steadily when the cone reaches the
forward position. • Make sure the collimator shutters can be
manually operated when [FLUORO] is selected.
• Press the [BYPASS] key to activate the bypass Select REDUCED SPOT. Verify that the
function and LED next to the BYPASS. Press the collimator shutters do not open larger than the
CONE key and verify that the cone does not tube image edges, or the spotfilm format size
move. selected when REDUCED SPOT is selected.
• Press the [ALL LOCKS] key. Make sure the LED • While observing the fluoroscopic image on the
next to the ALL LOCKS key is lit. Press the TV monitor. Make sure that the collimator shutter
CONE key and verify that the cone does not edges maintain the same horizontal and vertical
move. dimensions when the SFD carriage is moved
• Press the [COMP LOCK] key. Make sure the LED from maximum to minimum SID.
next to the COMP LOCK key is lit. Press the
[CONE] key and verify that the cone does not
move.
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

• Verify that the second step of the PREP/ • Move the tilt control toward the left and verify that
EXPOSE button initiates an exposure. the table tilts in the Trendelenburg direction to
15°. The speed of tilting should increase as the
10. Fluoro control is moved further from the center position.
Note The following checks should be done on FLU- • Move the tilt control toward the right and verify
ORO footswitch and the two FLUORO buttons. that the table tilts in the Trendelenburg direction
• Move the cassette to the load position. Make to 88°. The speed of tilting should increases as
sure that fluoroscopic radiation is not initiated the control is moved further from the center
when a FLUORO button or the FLUORO position.
footswitch is pressed.
• Move the cassette to its parked position. Press a
FLUORO button or the FLUORO footswitch and
verify that fluoroscopic radiation DOES occur.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

Final Check-out, continued 14. Reset
Pre-operation Check List, continued Press the [RESET] to ensure and make sure it resets
13. Power Assist the SFD to an initial state.

• Apply longitudinal pressure on the SFD handle in 15. Alignment

Note When the SFD carriage is 4 inches from its end • Make sure that all hardware and covers are
limits the longitudinal power assist force is properly installed and secured.
reduced to 1/2 of its normal force and reduced to
zero assistance when the carriage is within 1 inch
of its end limits.
• Apply downward pressure on the SFD handle
and verify that the power-assisted downward
movement of the SFD is occurring and that the
speed of this motion increases as more pressure
is exerted on the handle.
Note When the SFD carriage is within 1 inch of maxi-
mum or minimum SID the SFD vertical power
assist is deactivated.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

1725 SFD Mechanical Checks Head/foot Mask Drive Chain
The following are mechanical checks that should be Both of the H/F mask drive chains should deflect 3/8
performed to ensure the SFD is functioning properly. inches at the center when 8 (+1.5, -0) ounces of
pressure is applied to the center of the chain.
Brush Plate Height
Make sure the tops of the brushes are even with the Front/back Mask Drive Chain
inner surface of the cassette carriage inner channels. Both of the F/B mask drive chains should deflect 3/8
inches at the center when 8 (±1/2) ounces of pressure is
Carriage Drive Belts Tension applied to the center of the chain.
Carriage H/f Drive Belts
Cone And Grid Chain Tension
Both of the carriage H/F drive belts should deflect 0.6 Park the cone or grid to the rear. At a point half-way
inches when 11 (+1.5, -0) ounces of pressure is applied between the front sprocket and the cone plate or half-
to the centers of the belt. way between the front sprocket grid plate, The force
Carriage Transverse Drive Belts required to produce 3/8" of chain deflection should
The carriage transverse drive belts should deflect 0.54 be 8 (+1.5, -0) ounces.
inches at the center when 12 (+1.5, -0) ounces of
pressure is applied to the center of the belt.
Mask Moving Force
With the drive motor disconnected, if more than 2.5
pounds of force are require to move the masks, the
masks are binding and must be adjusted.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

SFD Mechanical Checks, continued
Cassette Carriage H/f Drive Chain Tension
Chain to Head-End Jaw
Move the carriage jaws at the foot end. At a point half-
way between the sprocket and the head-end jaw the
force required to deflect the chain 1/8" of should
be 14 (+/-1/2) ounces.
Chain from Spline Shaft Sprocket to Sprocket at
Foot-End of Carriage
Move the carriage jaws at the foot end. At a point half-
way between the spline shaft sprocket and the sprocket
at foot-end of carriage, measure the force required to
deflect the chain 1/16" should be 15 (+/-1/2) ounces.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

Checking Default Operating Options Changing Defaults 1
The following procedure enables the technician to check
some of the SFD operating options. Default Description Factory Default Optional Selection

1. Remove the SFD rear cover to access the PWR UP Grid Position IN OUT
diagnostic service panel. DSPL Cass Size Units English Metric
2. Press the [CAL] button to access the Super User Auto Eject Enable DIsable
Menu. PREP Ulatched Latched

CAUTION Do not select the EEPROM

initialization menu or change its
contents. Any change to the values in
this menu will erase the factory
calibration.

3. Use the U or D keys to highlight SYSTEM

CONFIGURATION.
4. Press the [SELECT] key. The System Configuration
Menu is now displayed.
5. Press the [DEFLT] key to access the DEFAULTS 1
menu. Refer to the table on this page for a list of
factory defaults and alternative selections.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

Default Selection, continued ESC button to return to the System Configuration Menu
without changing any default settings
Changing Defaults 2

Default Description Factory Default Optional Selection

MAX SFD Req. Spot Format Size II Size
Rapid Seq SFD Locks Comp+Trans Comp, All
Non-SFD RAD Locks Comp Comp+Trans, All
Fluoro SW Autoload Enable Disabled

To make changes to the DEFAULT 2 menu do the

following:
1. With the DEFAULT 1 screen displayed, press the
DEFAULT button.
2. Use U or D buttons to highlight the desired selection.
3. Press the [SELECT] button to change the default
setting.
4. Once all of the desired changes on the Default 2
menu press the [SAVE] button. The SFD will beep to
indicate that the parameter has been saved.
The default parameters will not be changed if the SAVE
button is not pressed. Press the [RETURN] button or the

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

Factory Calibration Check for the carriage, 5. Press the [SELECT] key.
masks, cone, grid and collimator POTs. 6. Use the U or D keys to highlight the desired
This procedure is to be used to check factory calibration selection.
settings for the carriage, masks, cone, grid and
Carriage
collimator POTs.
Masks
This procedure must be performed when the firmware
EEPROM in the SFD is replaced or after adjustment of Cone
the opto-sensors or replacement of the opto-sensor
Grid
PCBs.
Manual POTs
1. Remove the SFD to access the Diagnostic Display
Panel. 7. Press the SELECT button.
2. Turn power ON to the SFD. 8. Within each screen verify that the values displayed
are values recorded on the factory Calibration and
3. With the normal operating display active press the
Setup Record Data Form.
[CAL] button to access the Super User Menu.

CAUTION Do not select the EEPROM

initialization menu or change its
contents. Any change to the values in
this menu will erase the factory
calibration.

4. Use the U or D keys to highlight FACTORY

CALIBRATION.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

Carriage Position Check 4. Hold the carriage in the disengaged position by
holding the drive belt.
The carriage position calibration consist of the following
procedures: 5. Hold the actuator up with the other hand and move
the H/F belt so that the carriage latch moves under
• Carriage Eject Position Adjustment
the actuator. This will disengage the cassette
• Checks carriage latch.
• Carriage Beam Center Calibration
Carriage Eject Position Check
This procedure is to determine the head-to-foot (H/F)
tolerance of the cassette carriage when it is in the eject
position.
This procedure can be performed more easily by two
people.
Read steps 1 through 5 before attempting to perform the
procedure.
1. Turn the system power off
2. Move the carriage in the H/F direction until the
actuator is near the latch.
3. Move the carriage so that the latch is just above the
ion chamber pre-amp.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

8. Move the carriage to the head end and then fully 16. Park the cassette
forward. 17. With the Super User Menu displayed on the
9. Use the H/F drive belt to move the carriage to the diagnostic display highlight Factory Calibration.
head end of the movement tolerance. 18. Press the [SELECT] button to access the Factory
10. Mark the center of the bracket that supports the F/B Calibration Menu.
drive belt pulley. 19. Highlight Carriage.
11. Scribe a mark on the small intermediate H/F carriage 20. Press the [SELECT] button to access the Cassette
drive pulley that aligns with the mark made in step Carriage Calibration Menu.
10.
21. Highlight Carriage Eject.
Note If marks are present, perform the remaining steps
to verify that they are correct.
12. Move the carriage to the foot end of the movement
tolerance.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

Carriage Position Calibration, continued 24. Measure the distance from the tip of the right-hand
door-opener tab of the carriage and the front flat
Carriage Eject Position Adjustment, continued
surface of the plastic bezel.The acceptable value is
22. Press the [SELECT]. 1/8" and 5/32". If this value measured is outside the
acceptable range the Jam Sensor must be adjusted.
CAUTION Do not leave the SFD in this mode
with power applied for more than 5 25. Insert a cassette and park the carriage.
min. The cassette carriage motors 26. Turn power to the SFD off.
are energized in this mode and will
not time out. If left in this mode for 27. Move the cassette carriage forward so that the jam
more than 5 min. Damage may occur actuator is visible through the II opening.
to the carriage motor or driver. 28. Mark the position of the nylon jam actuator on the
cassette jaw.
Note Do not save the calibration values during this part
of the procedure. 29. Simulate a jammed condition by pushing the
cassette latch toward the head end.
23. Press the Diagnostic Display Panel button
designated "B" (back) until the fourth LED from the 30. On the cassette jaw mark the new position of the
top near J3 (shown in Figure 3-46) goes off. nylon jam actuator.

1725 Spotfilm Device Component Functional Checks, continued

Carriage Position Calibration, continued
Final Checks
1. Watching the marks on the H/F intermediate pulley
press the [CASSETTE] button.
2. The head-end tolerance mark on the pulley should
align with the mark on the pulley bracket while the
carriage is moving toward the eject position.
1. Watching the marks on the H/F intermediate pulley
press the [CASSETTE] button again.
2. The head-end tolerance mark on the H/F
intermediate pulley should go beyond the mark on
the bracket by about 1/16" (4 steps) while the
carriage is moving to the park position.
3. Push the [CASSETTE] button to bring the carriage to
the eject position.
4. Using a straight edge, check that the foot-end door-
opener tab is flush with the bezel (±1/16").

PFM-90 CTM Functional Checks

Cable Break-sensing Switch Test Spring Breakage Safety Switch Test
1. With the safety system at rest the visually verify that
WARNING Do not make connections with the spring breakage sensing switch roller is just
electrical power applied. Hazardous touching the switch actuator bushing.
voltages will be present. failure to
comply may result in bodily injury. 2. Insert a 0.025" feeler gauge between the bushing
and the switch roller.
1. Pull the telescopic column down.
3. Make sure the switch is activated by checking that
2. Open the access panel in front of the smallest the Operator Control Unit SAFETY WARNING Light
column section. is ON and that the vertical brake is activated.
3. Press the safety cable adjusting nut upwards until it 4. Remove the feeler gauge.
stops against the cable plate.
5. Make sure the switch is deactivated by checking
4. Verify the travel is 3/8 inch. that the Operator Control Unit SAFETY WARNING
Light is OFF and that the vertical brake is de-
5. Check that at the upper end of the travel, the nut
activated.
contacts the cable break sensing switch roller and
actuates the switch.
6. With the safety cable adjusting nut up against the
cable plate verify that the Operator Control Unit
SAFETY WARNING Light comes on and the vertical
brake engages.

PFM-90 CTM Functional Checks, continued

Balancer Load Test 7. Connect the DVM positive lead to the cathode of
CR3. The correct voltage reading is 9.0 VDC (+/-0.1
Make sure all cables and accessories are installed
VDC).
before adjusting the spring balancer.
8. Connect the DVM positive lead to TP2.
1. Using handle bars move telescopic column up and
down. 9. Fully extend the tube arm so that the collimator is
just above the floor.
2. Verify that the a comfortable force required to move
column. 10. Record this value and save it for future reference.
SID Monitor PCB Calibration 11. Move the tube up as far as it will go.
1. Loosen the three screws along the edge of the logic 12. Record the voltage at TP2 and save it for future
cover reference.
2. Open the cover. Note The value in step 12 should be 9 minus the value
3. Turn power ON to the CTM. from step 10. If this is not correct, do the following
to adjust the SID POT.
4. Locate the SID Monitor PCB on the logic cabinet
cover. • Loosen the potentiometer gear set screw.

5. Connect a DVM ground lead to TP5 on the SID • Fully extend the mast.
Monitor PCB. • While holding the POT gear stationary and use a
6. Connect the DVM positive lead to the cathode of flat-bladed screwdriver to rotate the POT a
CR1. The correct voltage reading is 12 VDC (+/-0.25 minimum voltage.
VDC). • Tighten the POT gear setscrew.

Continued on next page

PFM-90 CTM Functional Checks, continued

SID Monitor PCB Calibration, continued • Adjust R5 CCW until the voltage at TP3 just goes
low (or the relay clicks).
• Repeat steps 8 to 12.
• Move the collimator so that it is 59 in. from the
13. Set R5 POT to maximum CW
floor. This sets the focal spot 70.0 in. from the
14. Set R8 POT to maximum CCW floor. (59 in. + 11 in. collimator = 70 in.)
15. Set R18 POT to maximum CW • Measure the voltage at TP2 and record this value
and save it for future reference.
16. Set R7 POT to maximum CCW
• Connect the DVM positive lead to TP3.
17. Set R22 POT to mid range
• Adjust R8 CW until the voltage at TP3 just goes
18. Set R6 POT to mid-range
low (or the relay clicks).
19. If the PFM-90 does not use a deluxe tilting wall
21. Use the collimator tape measure to set the focal spot
bucky skip to step 21.
48.0 in. [122 cm] above the Bucky film plane (43.75
20. If the PFM-90 is used with a deluxe tilting wall bucky, in. [111.1 cm] from the table top).
do the following.
22. Measure the voltage at TP2record this value and
• Move the collimator so that it is 68 in. from the save it for future reference.
floor. This sets the focal spot to 79.0 in. from the
floor. (68 in. + 11 in. collimator = 79 in.) 23. Connect a DVM positive lead to TP1.
24. Adjust R18 CCW until the voltage at TP1 just goes
• Measure the voltage at TP2 on the SID monitor
low (or the relay clicks).
PCB record this value and save it for future
reference
• Connect the DVM positive lead to TP3.
Continued on next page

PFM-90 CTM Functional Checks, continued

SID Monitor PCB Calibration, continued • Adjust R22 two turns CW for every 0.1 volts that
25. Use the collimator tape measure to set the focal spot TP6 is below 7.02
to 36 in. [91.4 cm] for the Bucky Film Plane (31.75 in. OR adjust R22 two turns CCW for every 0.1 volts
that TP6 is above 7.02 volts.
[80.6 cm] from the table top).
Note The meter reading may not immediately coincide
26. Measure the voltage at TP2 record this value and
save it for future reference. with the adjustment made; however, R22 should
not be adjusted so that the meter presently indi-
27. Connect the DVM positive lead to TP1. cates the desired voltage.
28. Adjust R7 CW until the voltage at TP1 just goes low R22 interacts with R6 to establish threshold volt-
(or the relay clicks). ages at 36 and 48 inch SIDs, respectively. There-
fore, if R22 is adjusted, R6 may also require
29. Use the collimator tape measure to set the focal spot readjustment (step 29).
to 36 in. [91.4 cm] from the Bucky Film Plane (31.75
in. [80.6 cm] from the table top). • Repeat steps 25 through 33 until the readings at
both 36 in. and 48 in. focal spot distances are
30. Connect the positive lead of the DVM to TP6. correct.
31. Adjust R6 until the voltage at TP6 is 0.68 +/- 0.01
VDC.
32. Use the collimator tape measure to set the focal spot
48.0 in. [122 cm] above the Bucky film plane (43.75
in. [111.1 cm] from the table top)
33. Check the voltage at TP6. If the Voltage is not 7.02
(+ /- 0.01 volts). Do the following for special
adjustment of R22:

PFM-90 CTM Functional Checks, continued

Longitudinal Magnetic Lock Check
Adjust the lock should be adjusted so there is there is a
gap of 0.015" between the lock armature and the
magnetic strip on the longitudinal rail.

LOGIC AND BLOCK DIAGRAMS

MTX Generator Elite 1500/5000 Table
Exposure Control for the MTX Elite 1500 Table Interconnect
Control Electronics for the MTX Elite 1500 Table – Connector Interface PCB Power
Rotor Diagram for the MTX (HMS Starter) Distribution
Elite 1500 Table – Under Table Collimator
Console Display for the MTX
Elite 5000 Table Interconnect
MTX Electronics Cabinet
Elite 5000 Table – Horizontal Carriage Interface PCB
Collimator
Power Distribution
MTX Main Power
Elite 5000 Table – Body Interface PCB Power
Distribution
Elite 5000 Table – Under Table Collimator
Elite 1500/5000 Mother Board Power Distribution

1725 Spotfilm Device (SFD)

1725 Spotfilm Interconnet

Exposure Control for the MTX

LED - Control - Display

VG 64 Bus 26 pol.
Connector "A" Connector "B"
TRIG2; ZTRIG2; Safety Timer; AEC-Stop
PB0-PB3

CS PB4-PB7
Address
A2 - A7
Decoder
Programmable
Peripheral
Interface Safety Timer
CPPI Over-kV; K51; K52
8255A-(5)

A0 - A1 A0, A1
Next
B25, B26
STB Interrupt Error Detector Radiation Anode Current OPTO- Surge
PC2 Anode Current B1-B10
Request Logic Flip - Flop Beyond Control Isolaters Suppressors
MIO Exposure Fluoroscopy
Control
IOR, IOW Logic WR, RO

MEMR MEMW ~ 3kHz

PC4
High Level Fluorosc.
PC5
Radiation (mA)
B20

Reset Logic
Reset Error Detect. Clock Devider Clock Switch Exposure Clock for Buzzer
PA2 +Int-Request Error Decoder 1, 4 M / 3 Hz B24
Error - FF
Logic

Data- D0 - D7
D0 - D7
Buffer
K53
B17

Error Switch Exposure

uP - Exposure Start B18
Off
PA0

AEC - Start
PA1 B19

mAs - Count Enable t Enable

PA3

INT, RST 5.5 Analog Input (Anode Current)

Int. Clock Anode
RST 6.5 PC0 PA4-PA7 B15
Decoder Divider Current
RST 7.5

mA and mAs Pulse

Reset B21, B22
Clock 3.072 MHz
SYST

Control Electronics for the MTX

Out-PCB
In1-PCB Back - Plane; Address, Data, Control
In2-PCB
In4-PCB ADA-PCB EPC-PCB CPU-PCB AEC-PCB
B25 B1
Brightness - Control Triggerswitch 2 Step
B23 B2 B22 B15
Power Control ±15V Bucky Feedback mAs - Pulses AEC - Stop
B21 B3 B21
Spare Safety Timer mA - Pulses
B19 B4 0
Spare AEC - Stop
B17 B5 TP11
Spare Over - kV
B15 B6 AEC - Nom
Ext. kV - Pot1 Overcurrent Anode Value
Rack I B13 B7
CPU - Generator Spare Overcurrent Cath.
B11 B8
kV - Feedback Feedback Anode Current
B7 B9 Serial Interface
Spare (mA Falli - Load) Fluoroscopy Low
B1 B10
Normal Bus - Voltage Fluoroscopy High
B5 B20
kV - Nom. - Value Anode Current Out
Ext. kV B3 B17
Potentiometer Filament Heat Value Failure K53
Fluoro. Manual B7 B15
Preheat Filament mA - Feedback
B10 B21
Limit Value Filament mA - Pulses
B22 Pick Up's
mAs - Pulses
B18
Exposure Start CPU - Desk
In1-B13 B19
Ext. AEC - Start Serial - Data - Trans.
PCB 1 B24
Peeper If Radiation

LS 1

B5 B21 Over kV
B3 Frequency Deviation B3 B17 In1-B16
75% kV Limit Large Focal Spot In2-B22 Limit Small Focal Spo
B4 B9 Inverter Start B1 B19 In1-B14 PCB 5 PCB 6
In1-B4 CHC-PCB IVC-PCB 50% kV Filament O.K. Large Focal Small Focal In2-B20 Filament O.K.
B10 75 kHz B15 B9 In1-B15 Spot Spot
75% kV - t Filament Overcurrent In2-D22 Filament Overcurrent
Rack II
Chopper Voltage B7
Inverter Short Circuit
Filament
Drive
Contactor Start - Stop Q8 - Q7
mA - Measurement
kV Ext. kV - Instrument
Line Transformer Circ.
Line Voltage
Chassis Overcurrent Cathode
PCB 51 PCB 51 K51
IPU IPU mA mAmAmeasurement
- Measurement Circuit K53 EPC and Relaise
V.O. V.O. Ext. mA Overcurrent Anode
2 1 k52

MV - Divider
XL XC XS
Anode

Q1, Q4 Filament
L1, L2, L3 CB01 Q3 - Start
K02 CR01 - CR03 Q7 - Stop L1 Q2, Q3 Transformator
AOA
Chopper Inverter SP11
380V
R01-R03 C4 Cathode
L1, L2
K03
R03 R04
T01 C01 C2
L1, L2 A-D A-D X-Ray Tube
K05
K01 K04 K02
208V A
(N.C.) (N.C.) (N.C.)
L1, L2, L3
K04
C

Rotor Diagram for the MTX (HMS Starter)

To Internal Starter

K25

+24V
Tube
CENTROID CENTROID K1 1
1K53 OV = (Rotor Ready)
Rotor K25
EPC-B7 K2
Inhibit
IN2-B10 P85-14 J003-14 J018-V P2-V P2-J J018-J J009-R P84-R

K51D
EPC-B6 Rotor Tube
Start K2 2
P87-65 J004-65 J018-L P2-L
1K320 HMS
K52D
EXTERNAL K3
180 Hz STARTER
Start
+24V +25V P85-21 J003-21 J018-F P2-F
1K53 4K324
Tube
1K320
4K26 K25 K3 3
Anode
Rotation
OUT 1-B5 P85-30 J003-30 J018-S P2-S P2-T J018-T J009-C P84-C

+24V K25
Rotor
Hangover
4K324 P87-34 J004-34 J18-E P2-E P2-P J018-P J009-D P84-D
1K320

OUT 1-C17 K25 K25

P85-54 J003-54 J018-B P2-B

IN2 -B11 2K301
4K26
To Internal Starter
P85-48 J003-48 J018-D P2-D
2K302
+24V

2K301 P85-42 J003-42 J018-A P2-A

3K303
OUT1-C5

2K302

OUT1-C6

3K303

OUT1-C13

Console Display for the MTX

ROM Display Display
Drivers 1
Data Bus Data Bus Char
RAM
Decode

Display Display
Microprocessor Drivers 2

Data Bus Data Bus

Data Bus

8256 Communications Control 8256 Communications Control 8279 LED / Keyboard Scan Control
TxD RxD P20-P27 TxD RxD P20-P23

Parallel Clock Scan Scan

Output RD/WR Lines Lines
Return Return
Data Lines Lines

D0-D3
20 mA Parallel
Loop Printer RS232 Real Time LEDs Keys
Controls Buffers Driver Clock

On Console Cover
Conn C Conn C Conn P Conn S

Serial Communication
To Console

MTX Electronics Cabinet

E-Stop
(at Console)
Mains

01
Emergency
Load Center N
Contactor
(Bottom of Cabinet)
02

Circuit Breaker Panel

Phase 1
from
Load N
Center
Phase 2

2 EA
30A
208VAC

3 EA to System
25A Peripherals
115VAC (CTM, Table)

3 EA
15A
115VAC

15A
115VAC

Centroid Panel

from 24 Hour Supply

3A
Load
115VAC
Center

J3-C +8V DC

J3-T 50 KVP Sig. From Gen.

DC Return J3-BB
Table Down Position Switch J3-E
J3-F NOC

To Generator

Calibration
J3-H COM No Exposure Relay Contacts

Alignment &
J3-A NCC
Transverse Table Bucky Switch J3-J K-T
Transverse Signal 2nd Wall Device J3-C K-U
+8V DC J3-U P1-U
Transverse Signal 1st Wall Device J3-BB P1-T
Collimator

2 J1-5 Field Lamp Supply DC Return J3-K P1-S

9 Field Lamp K-S
Long Table Bucky Signal J3-Z K-W

Locations
Component
3 J23-A Long Signal 2nd Wall Device J3-C K-V
P1 = Wall Bucky
K = Table Bucky

5 +8V DC J3-V P1-V

Timer PC Board
10 J23-A J1-F Pre-Heat
Long Signal 1st Wall Device J3-BB P1-W
Components Mounted In Bucky

1 8 4 DC Return J3-B P1-X

K-X
K-D
P1-D

J1-A

Error
Thermal J3-S DC Return J3-B

Codes
Out Out
GE Medical Systems

A
L B A
Horizontal Table Bucky J3-P
Field Lamp

J23-A J1-W Sid Lammp Supply Return

B
Field Lamp
P.B. Indicator

A
J23-A
J23-D J1-B Vert Beam

Checks
J23-T J1-T DC Return DC Return J3-LL P1-Y
15" Trend Foot 15" Vert. Head
CTM SID Signal J3-X P1-P

J23-N J1-N Horiz. Beam +8V DC J3-C P1-N

15" Trend Foot 15" Vert. Head Above 46 in. SID Signal J3-B P1-P
S4-A
J23-J J1-J DC Return S4
J23-P J1-P Chassis Gnd. PRI 36-48 in Signal J3-F P1-F

DC Return J3-BB P1-Z

J23-U J1-U Man PBL Lamp Drive
Man PBL. 4D In. Table
40 Inch Table J3-H P1-W P1-K
1st Wall SID
J23-C J1-C DC Return 1st Wall SID J3-C P1-U P1-M
Man PBL. 2nd Wall SID
2nd Wall SID J3-M P1-V P1-J

J23-H J1-H Man PBL

J23-B J1-B Bypass Lamp Drive

Bypass
J23-E J1-E PBL Lamp Drive

Functional Logic & Block Preventive

PBL
No Exp. Lamp Drive
P1-A

J23-J J1-J
No Exp.
Wall Bucky
P1-Z

J23-Y J1-Y DC Return

Overide Switch Vertical Bucky Wall or Table J3-W
J23-F J1-F Overide Key Switch

J23-I J1-I KVP Filter SIG. Out

Out
K-Z

Kvp Sig. From Gen.

K1-A

J23-K J1-K

Software &
Table Bucky

Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics

Filter Switch
J23-A
In

J23-N J1-N Trans Motor Return

Trans. Motor Horizontal Wall Bucky J3-A

J23-Y J1-Y Trans Motor Drive

Picker Elite 1500/5000 and MTX Generator

Trans
Feedback J23-G J1-G Transverse Feedback
Pot. Range Signal Deluxe Bucky and CIM J3-D
P1-S

Theory
J23-Z J1-Z +8V DC

Long
Feedback Logitudinal Feedback
Components Located In Collimator

J23-X J1-X
CTM Range Switch

Pot.
J23-D J1-D DC Return

J23-L J1-L Long Motor Drive

P1-B

Trans. Motor

J23-R J1-R Long Motor Return

+24V DC J3-B
Trouble-
shooting
Switch Located in the CTM

J1-J 120 VAC Hot

J1-I 120 VAC COM

Centroid

Training
Self-Paced

J1-CC Chassis Ground

Collimator Control
Logic and Block Diagrams

Notes
GE Medical Systems Picker Elite 1500/5000 and MTX Generator Logic and Block Diagrams

MTX Main Power

CB01
K04
K02
L1

CR01-03

Chopper
C01
Inverter

K03
Line Matching K05
Transformer Line Rectifier

Elite 1500 Table Interconnect

HORIZONTAL D-0109-05-512 G140702 G140702 G140702
CARRIAGE Power Trans. Long. Tilt
SFD Trans. Lock
SFD Long. Lock
Assist
PCB
M Motor M Motor
PCB
M Motor
PCB
M
Tube Center Sw. Comp. P. A. Long. PCB Trans. Long. Tilt
S.I.D. Pot. Lock PJ 436 Motor PJ 432 Motor PJ 423 Motor PJ 201 Motor

Vert.
Motor M
PJ 301

Collimator
Bucky Long. Trans.
Lock Brake Brake Collimator PJ 302
Head

Digital #2
Long. PJ 450 MOTHER PJ 306
Pot Table Harness PJ 303
BOARD

Digital #1
G140717-2
Under Table
Trans. Tube Lock
PJ 304
Pot PJ 300 PJ 305

Analog
PJ 451
SFD Tilt
Pot Pot

Output #1
PJ 403 PJ 417 PJ 404 PJ 402 PJ 401 PJ 416
Tilt
PJ 443 Line Brake
PJ 400 PJ 411 In

PJ 459 CONNECTOR PJ 410 Tilt

Table Safety Sw.
INTERFACE PJ 1 PJ 102
D-0109-05-522-1 Ion Bucky PJ 409
Chamber
PCB POWER
SUPPLY
PJ 408
D-0168-02-188

FRONT PANEL PJ 454 PJ 405 PJ 103

PJ 406
Table Power PJ 4 PJ 9
DISPLAY PJ 412 PJ 413 PJ 414 PJ 415 PJ 407
PCB
SFD Generator/
TB 2

SFD Collimator
Ion Chamber

SFD Table
SFD Power

Command
C-0109-05-502

Output #2
Rotor Tube
In Rotor

+12 VDC
Tube
Fan

J4 J3 J2 J1
PJ 7 PJ 8

TABLE
1725 SPOT FILMER INTERFACE PJ 6

PCB
D-0109-05-504
P2 P3
PJ 5
PJ 16 TOMO

To Centroid

Elite 1500 Table – Horizontal Carriage Interface PCB Power Distribution

JP517 JP503 JP504 JP510 JP509 JP508 JP507

JP505 JP511 TABLE SFD SFD GEN. BASE JP516 JP512 BASE JP514 BASE BASE JP513 JP501 JP515
SFD BASE POWER TABLE ION OUTPUT BUCKY/ ION COLL. ANALOG ANALOG DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL HORIZ. MOTOR/
POWER POWER (FRONT) COMMAND CHAMBER #2 CHAMBER HEAD #1 #2 #1 #2 #3 CARRIAGE LOCK
+30V RET.
1 1
+30V
4 4
5 +36V RET.
5
+36V RET. +5V 9 +5V
6 6 6 2
12
+36V +10V 25 19 +10V
7 7 8 15
+36V
8 8
11 4
115VAC RET 17 13
10 8
115VAC 16 12
9 9
+24V 14
15 13
+20V
14 10
13 -20V
9
160V RET. 8
10
160V 5
9
12 PWR GND 6 20 20

-300V 10
4 4
5 +15V 11 5
-15V 12 6
6
COMMON 13
7 7
8

Elite 1500 Table – Connector Interface PCB Power Distribution

JP413
JP412 JP406 JP401 JP402 JP403 JP404 JP400 JP407 SFD GEN. JP414 JP409 JP410 JP417 JP411 JP416
SFD TABLE LONG. TRANS. TABLE POWER BUCKY/ ION OUTPUT ION TABLE JP408 DIGITAL DIGITAL JP405 HORIZ. COLLIMATOR COLL.
POWER POWER MOTOR MOTOR HARNESS ASSIST CHAMBER #2 CHAMBER COMMAND ANALOG #1 #2 DISPLAY CARRIAGE HEAD
+30V RET.
1 1
4 +30V
4
5 +36V RET.
5
6 +36V RET.
6
12
+36V
7 7
+36V
8 8
11 4
115VAC RET 17 13 13 11
10 20
115VAC 16 11 11 10 18 9
9
15 9 +24V 9 9 12 +24V 13
14
14 8 +20V
8
13 7 -20V
7
10 160V RET.
12
9 160V
13
12 6 POWER GND 6 11 18 20 20
5 ANA. GND 5 8 10 7 26 ANA. GND 16
16 1
DIG. GND 18 6
1
-300V 10
1 4
2 +12V 11
5
-12V 12
3 6
COMMON 13
4 7
8

+10V REF. 8 25 +10V REF.

4 15

Elite 1500 Table – Under Table Collimator

MOTHER BOARD

PJ PJ PJ
P1 415 411 301
CD3 26
1 1 26 88
CONNECTOR INTERFACE PCB

CD2

CONNECTOR INTERFACE PCB

2 2 25 25 95
CD1
3 3 24 24 45 PJ PJ PJ
CD0 PJ451
4 4 23 23 94 301 411 416 PJ450
SPOT FILMER

COLLIMATOR PCB
CD7 VSIDR 2
5 5 22 22 44 81 11 11 2
CD6 MOT. RET 3
6 6 21 21 93 10 2 2 11 3
CD5 GND 4
7 7 20 20 43 2 1 1 12 4
CD4 VFB 5
8 8 13 13 76 23 7 7 6 5
LDAC VHF 6
9 9 14 14 77 24 8 8 5 6
CWR VSID 7
10 10 15 15 86 30 10 10 3 7
HF / FB HF MOT. DRV 10
11 11 16 16 87 15 3 3 10 10
HI / LO FB MOT. DRV 4 11 11
12 12 17 17 90 16 4 9
II SELECT
13 13 18 18 91 PJ PJ
COLLIMATOR READY 302
14 14 19 19 92 410
U. T. TUBE LOCK
81 5 5 13
TO T1
I/O #2 +24V 14
15
PJ102 PJ300 PCB
POWER SUPPLY

PJ
115VAC RET. 4 406
2 2 PJ452
115VAC
3 3 6
F1
PCB

PJ453
±12VDC AND
+24V +5VDC REGULATORS U. T.
15
ON TUBE
PJ103 COLLIMATOR PCB LOCK

Elite 5000 Table Interconnect

Power Trans. Long. Tilt
FRONT PANEL
DISPLAY
Assist
PCB
M Motor
PCB
M Motor
PCB
M Motor
PCB
M
P. A. Long. Trans.
PCB PJ 436 Motor PJ 432 Motor PJ 423
Long.
PJ 201
Tilt
Motor Motor

PJ 454

PJ 405 PJ 404 PJ 402 PJ 401

PJ 301

Collimator
Table Harness
PJ 403 90/50 BODY
INTERFACE Collimator PJ 302
Head

Digital #2
Long. Long. PCB MOTHER PJ 306
PJ 450
Brake Pot BOARD
PJ 303

Digital #1
Under Table
Trans. Trans. Tube Lock
PJ 400 PJ 407 PJ 408 PJ 406 PJ 409 PJ 410 PJ 304
Brake Pot

Table Power
PJ 300 PJ 305

Table Bucky/

Table Power
Motor/Lock
PJ 451

Analog #2

Digital #3
Bucky SFD

IC
Lock Pot Tilt
Pot

PJ 443
PJ 515 PJ 517 PJ 514 PJ 513 PJ 512 Tilt
Line Brake
PJ 459 PJ 516 PJ 506 In
Table HORIZONTAL
HORIZONTAL Tilt
Ion Bucky CARRIAGE
CARRIAGE PJ 507
Safety Sw.
Chamber PJ 102
INTERFACE PJ 1
SFD Trans. Lock PJ 508
PCB POWER
SFD Long. Lock
Tube Center Sw. PJ 501 SUPPLY
PJ 509
S.I.D. Pot.
PJ 103
PJ 511
Vert. PJ 4 PJ 9
Motor M PJ 505 PJ 504 PJ 503 PJ 502 PJ 510

SFD Generator/ TB 2

SFD Collimator
Ion Chamber
SFD Power

SFD Table
Command

Output #2
Rotor Tube
In Rotor

+12 VDC
Comp. Tube
Lock Fan

J4 J3 J2 J1
PJ 7 PJ 8
TABLE
INTERFACE PJ 6
1725 SPOT FILMER PCB

P2 P3
PJ 5
PJ 16 TOMO

To Centroid

Elite 5000 Table – Horizontal Carriage Interface PCB Power Distribution

JP517 JP503 JP504 JP510 JP509 JP508 JP507
JP505 JP511 TABLE SFD SFD GEN. BASE JP516 JP512 BASE JP514 BASE BASE JP513 JP501 JP515
SFD BASE POWER TABLE ION OUTPUT BUCKY/ ION COLL. ANALOG ANALOG DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL HORIZ. MOTOR/
POWER POWER (FRONT) COMMAND CHAMBER #2 CHAMBER HEAD #1 #2 #1 #2 #3 CARRIAGE LOCK
+30V RET.
1 1
+30V
4 4
5 +36V RET.
5
+36V RET. +5V 9 +5V
6 6 6 2
12
+36V +10V 25 19 +10V
7 7 8 15
+36V
8 8
11 4
115VAC RET 17 13
10 8
115VAC 16 12
9 9
+24V 14
15 13
+20V
14 10
13 -20V
9
160V RET. 8
10
160V 5
9
12 PWR GND 6 20 20

-300V 10
4 4
5 +15V 11 5
-15V 12 6
6
COMMON 13
7 7
8

Elite 5000 Table – Body Interface PCB Power Distribution

PJ400 PJ407
PJ406 PJ401 PJ402 PJ403 PJ404 BUCKY/ TABLE BUCKY PJ408 PJ409
TABLE LONG TRANS TABLE POWER ION ION TABLE TABLE PJ405
POWER MOTOR MOTOR HARNESS ASSIST CHAMBER CHAMBER MOTOR / LOCK ANALOG #2 DISPLAY

4 +10 VDC 19
160 VDC +5VDC (TABLE)
5 13 9 11
160 VDC RET DIGITAL GND
6 12 7 13
17
POWER GND 6 6 11
8 18
- 20 VDC 7
9 7
+20 VDC 8 8
10 9 9
+24 VDC 9
11 12
115 VAC 11 11 10 18
12
115 VAC RET 13 13 11 20
13
ANALOG GND 5 6 10 ANALOG GND 15
5 12

-300 VDC
1 4
+15 VDC
2 5
-15 VDC
3 6
COMMON
4 7

Elite 5000 Table – Under Table Collimator

MOTHER BOARD

HORIZONTAL CARRIAGE INTERFACE PCB

PJ PJ PJ
P1 502 506 301
CD3 26
1 1 26 88
CD2
2 2 25 25 95
CD1
3 3 24 24 45 PJ PJ PJ
CD0 23 94 301 506 512 PJ450
4 4 23
SPOT FILMER

COLLIMATOR PCB
CD7 VSIDR 2
5 5 22 22 44 81 11 11 2
CD6 MOT. RET
6 6 21 21 93 10 2 2 11 3
CD5 GND
7 7 20 20 43 2 1 1 12 4
CD4 13 VFB 7 5
8 8 13 76 23 7 6
LDAC 14 VHF 8
9 9 14 77 24 8 5 6
CWR VSID
10 10 15 15 86 30 10 10 3 7
HF / FB HF MOT. DRV
11 11 16 16 87 15 3 3 10 10
HI / LO FB MOT. DRV 4 11
12 12 17 17 90 16 4 9
II SELECT
13 13 18 18 91 PJ PJ
14 14 COLLIMATOR READY 19 PJ453
19 92 302 507
U. T. TUBE LOCK
81 5 5 13
TO T1
I/O #2 +24V
15 14
PJ102 PJ300 PCB
PJ
115VAC RET. 511
2 2 4
115VAC
3 3 6
+24V F1
15 U. T.
SUPPLY
POWER

TUBE
PCB

±12VDC AND LOCK

+5VDC REGULATORS
ON
COLLIMATOR PCB

Elite 1500/5000 Mother Board Power Distribution

Regulators are mounted

ANALOG CPU I/O #1 I/O #2 COLLIMATOR to the metal chassis
of the Card Cage
PCB PJ304 PJ306 PCB PCB PCB PJ302 PCB
1 +5V 4 1 1 1 2 PJ300
2 DIG. GND 2 2 2 1 2 DIG. GND 1

+5V
20 115VAC RET. 4 115VAC RET. 2 REGULATOR

18 115 VAC 6 115 VAC 3

5 +10 V

14 -20 V -20 V 9
15 +20 V +20 V 10

-15V
REGULATOR

46 +10 V 25 3
7 +24 V 97 47 +24 V 8
48 26 ANALOG GND 1 48 48 48 ANALOG GND. 48
49 -15 V 49 49 49 -15 V 49 +15V
50 50 +15 V REGULATOR
50 +15 V 50 50

1725 Spotfilm Interconnet

PJ 202
Motor Controller
Interface PCB
Collimator Jam Grid Cone Fwd. Data and Control Bus PJ 201
Park Pots Sensor Home Sensor MC 1 MC 2 MC 3 MC 4 MC 5 MC 6
Switches Release Sensor PJ 401
PN2212295 GE PN2275150 GE PN 2206449 GE
PN 206449 GE
Fluoro Left
Prep Power F/B Cone
Expose PJ 611 Supply Carriage PN 2206713 GE
Fluoro Right PJ 3 PJ 9 PN 2179251 GE
PJ 6 PCB
PJ 10 PJ 402
PN 2229492 GE M M

Front PJ 5
H/F H/F
Panel PJ 7
Carriage Mask
Touch Display PN 2179251 GE PN 2206713 GE

Panel PJ 1 PJ 2 PCB PJ 1 PJ 8

Mother M M
PN2338917 GE
Sonalert Board PJ 5 RS 232
Lower I/O
PN 2241869 GE
PCB P1
Grid F/B
PN 2206713 GE Mask
P2 PN 2206713 GE
PN 2274639 GE
To
P3 Table
Strain Gage M M
Control P4
Handle PJ 1
PCB
PJ 2 PJ 7 PJ 12
PJ 3
PJ 11
PJ 4 PN 2274750 GE
PJ 4 PJ 14
Table
PJ 6
Top Service PJ 3 PJ 9 PJ 10
PN 2225651-3 GE
Module PJ 1 PJ 2 PJ 108 PJ 107

PCB Park Cone

Table Solenoid
Tilt Brake
PN 2225651-3 GE

CPU Upper I/O

PCB PJ 22 PCB H/F Cone
H/F
Carriage Mask
Sensor Sensor
PN 2303498 GE Sensor PN 2206449 GE
PN 2275392 GE PN 2206449 GE

F/B Park F/B

Ion Chamber PJ 118 Carriage Sense Mask
Sensor Switch Sensor
PN 2206449 GE

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Refer to the X-Ray Multi-vendor Planned Maintenance
Guide (Direction 2172743-100) for information regarding
planned maintenance schedules and tasks.
The following planned maintenance tasks for this system
are provided only as an overview. The Picker MTX
system’s planned maintenance schedule should be
followed as published in the vendor’s documentation.
• MTX Generator Checks
• Elite 1500 Table Preventive Maintenance (Mechanical Maintenance only)
• Elite 5000 Table Preventive Maintenance (Mechanical Maintenance only)
• Elite 1500/5000 Table Preventive Maintenance (Electrical Maintenance)
• 1725 Spotfilm Preventive Maintenance

MTX Generator Checks

This is the Manufacturer’s recommended schedule. Use External Visual Checks
this only as a guide when performing any Planned Perform the following checks every six months:
Maintenance on the MTX 340/360/380/3100 Generators.
• Check the console and pedestal stand.
• External Visual Checks
• Check for proper seating of APR and station program
• Mechanical Checks labels.
• Operational Checks • Inspect unit for all warning labels, serial tags, UL and
• Final Appearance Checks CSA tags.

Continued on next page

MTX Generator Checks, continued

Mechanical Checks
Interval
Procedure
6 Months 12 Months
Check mechanical X
operation of front panel on/
off and prep/expose
switches.
Check mechanical X
operation of electronic
cabinet interlock switch.
Check mechanical X
operation of tube select
switches on top of HT
Transformer.
Remove HT cables from X
transformer ports and check
for proper level of oil.
Check connections of all X
cables on top of the HT
transformer.
Check connections of all X
cables in electronic cabinet.
Check connections of all X
cables in console.
Continued on next page

MTX Generator Checks, continued

Operational Checks Interval
Procedure
Interval 6 Months 12 Months
Procedure
6 Months 12 Months Check +24V Power Supply X
Check for proper power up X Depress Prep Switch and X
sequence. check that console display
reads "READY".
Check electronic cabinet fan X
rotation. Depress Exposure Switch X
and listen for audible
Check for proper operation X indicator to sound and
of console switches. Run check console exposure
console diagnostics. indicator light.
Check for proper operation X Check that the B.U.T. logic X
of console LEDs. Run works - Display should read
console diagnostics. "AEC BACKUP TIME"
Check for proper operation X Check for actual mAs X
of console display. Run indication in display.
console diagnostics.
Check for proper operation X
of console to generator
communications. Run
console diagnostics loop-
back test.
Check +5V Power Supply X
Check +15V Power Supply X
Continued on next page

MTX Generator Checks, continued

Operational Checks, continued Final Appearance Checks
Interval Interval
Procedure Procedure
6 Months 12 Months 6 Months 12 Months
Check that another AEC X Clean all exposed exterior X
exposure cannot be made. surfaces of the MTX
Generator.
Check that reset button X
resets the B.U.T. and Check that all mounting X
another exposure can be hardware is secure and all
made. covers are in place.
Check kV, mA, and time X
accuracy.
Check PT station(s) for X
proper density tracking.

Elite 1500 Table Preventive Maintenance

Mechanical Maintenance Mechanical Checks
The Elite 1500 table is designed for function, reliability
Interval
and safety with minimum maintenance. To ensure
optimum and reliable table operation perform the Procedure
Every 6 Every 12
following maintenance checks: Months Months

Check the chain anchors at X

Mechanical Checks
each end of the segment
gear; they must be secure.
Interval
Examine welds and bolts for
Procedure signs of mechanical failure.
Every 6 Every 12
Months Months Check the front bearing X
track for excessive wear.
Check the chain tension of X Clean the track of particles
the table tilt drive; tighten as and dirt. Check that the
required. track clears the base front
leg through 105° of table
Check the tightness of the X
rotation. If not, readjust the
tilt drive brake mounted to
upper eccentric bearings on
the gear box. The gear box
the front leg of the base for
must be tight with no rattles,
adequate clearance.
no squeals, and no
overheating.
Check the drive belt for X
cracks and wear

Continued on next page

Elite 1500 Table Preventive Maintenance, continued

Mechanical Maintenance, continued Mechanical Checks

Mechanical Checks Interval

Procedure
Interval Every 6 Every 12
Months Months
Procedure
Every 6 Every 12
Months Months Bearing/Bearing tracks to X
checks: continued
Bearing/Bearing tracks to X Spotfilm Device Bearings
checks: (Mounted in Vertical
Horizontal Counterweight Carriage Assembly)
Bearings (Rear of Body) X-ray Tube Carriage
Vertical Counterweight Bearings
Bearings (Inside table Body SFD to X-ray Carriage
at Rear) Mechanical Linkage
Horizontal Carriage Bearings.
Bearings (Rear and front of
Check all bearings for signs X
Body)
of wear, cracks, dirt. etc.
Bucky Bearings (Front & Replace as necessary.
Rear, Bucky Tracks)
Check all adjustable X
Bucky Counterweight bearings for proper
Bearings (Rear, top of table) clearances and smooth
Vertical Carriage Bearings operation through the
(tracks mounted to tower) complete range of motion

Continued on next page

Elite 1500 Table Preventive Maintenance, continued

Mechanical Maintenance, continued Mechanical Checks

Mechanical Checks Interval

Procedure
Interval Every 6 Every 12
Months Months
Procedure
Every 6 Every 12
Months Months Check the ON/OFF function X
of the table.
Check mechanical cables X
Check the rolling loop X
for fraying or other signs of
section of the table body to
wear. Check tension of
horizontal carriage cable for
backup safety cables.
wear.
Remove the bearing cap of X
Ensure PCBs are properly X
the main pivot shaft and
seated and tightly mounted.
pack the space between the
flanged bearings with a Check all external cables for X
good wheel bearing grease. signs of wear.
Reassemble and tighten
Check the Park button on X
Wipe down the body X the SFD for proper
bearing track which guides operation.
the horizontal carriage with
33 in 1 oil to minimize
rusting.
Check the floor anchor bolts X
of the base for tightness.

Continued on next page

Elite 1500 Table Preventive Maintenance, continued

Mechanical Maintenance, continued

Mechanical Checks

Interval
Procedure
Every 6 Every 12
Months Months

Check the operating limits X

for:
• Table tilting
• Top longitudinal and
transverse travel.
• Horizontal carriage
travel.
• Vertical carriage travel
Recalibrate the table as
necessary

Elite 5000 Table Preventive Maintenance

Mechanical Maintenance Mechanical Checks
The Elite 5000 Table is designed for function, reliability
Interval
and safety with minimum maintenance. To ensure
optimum and reliable table operation perform the Procedure
Every 6 Every 12
following maintenance checks: Months Months

Ensure the tilt drive brake X

Mechanical Checks
assembly to the gear box
mounting bolts are tight.
Interval
The tilt drive should not
Procedure rattle, squeal or overheat
Every 6 Every 12 during operation.
Months Months
Check the tension of the X
translation; tighten as
required.
Check the tension of the tilt X
drive chain.
Check the tilt drive gear box X
for loose bolts or oil
leakage.
Check the tilt drive belt for X
cracks and proper tension.

Continued on next page

Elite 5000 Table Preventive Maintenance, continued

Mechanical Maintenance, continued Mechanical Checks

Mechanical Checks Interval

Procedure
Interval Every 6 Every 12
Months Months
Procedure
Every 6 Every 12
Months Months Checking bearings and X
bearing tracks, continued
Checking bearings and X • Examine all bearing
bearing tracks tracks for excessive
Check all bearings and wear.
bearing tracks. To check a • Clean tracks with a
bearing track, move the teflon or silicone
table component that rides compound (NOT WD-
on the bearing tracks being 40) to remove dirt,
checked through its particles, foreign items,
complete range of motion. etc. Look for signs of
Check all bearings and excessive wear, cracks,
bearing tracks for the etc. Replace worn or
following: damaged wear strips.
• The motion should be • Coat all bearing tracks
smooth and the required with lithium based
moving force constant grease.
with no binding. There • Horizontal
should not be clunking or Counterweight Bearings
scraping noises. (Rear of the Body)

Continued on next page

Elite 5000 Table Preventive Maintenance, continued

Mechanical Maintenance, continued Mechanical Checks

Mechanical Checks Interval

Procedure
Interval Every 6 Every 12
Months Months
Procedure
Every 6 Every 12
Months Months Checking bearings and X
bearing tracks, continued
Checking bearings and X • Spotfilm Device
bearing tracks, continued Bearings (Mounted in
• Vertical Counterweight the Vertical Carriage
Bearings (Inside the Assembly)
table Body at the Rear) • X-ray Tube Carriage
• Horizontal Carriage Bearings
Bearings (Rear and front • SFD to X-ray Carriage
of the Body) Bearings for Mechanical
• Bucky Bearings (Front & Linkage.
Rear Bucky tracks)
Check all bearings for signs X
• Bucky Counterweight of wear, cracks, dirt, etc.
Bearings (Rear, top of Replace as necessary.
the table)
Check all adjustable X
• Vertical Carriage bearings for proper
Bearings (tracks clearances and smooth
mounted to the tower) operation through the
complete range of motion.

Continued on next page

Elite 5000 Table Preventive Maintenance, continued

Mechanical Maintenance, continued Mechanical Checks

Mechanical Checks Interval

Procedure
Interval Every 6 Every 12
Months Months
Procedure
Every 6 Every 12
Months Months Check the front, rear and X
drive longitudinal table top
Check mechanical steel X chains for proper tension.
cables for fraying or other
Check that the 4 front and 4 X
signs of wear. Check the
rear table top mounting
tension of the vertical
screws are tight.
counterweight tracking wire
rope with the table in the Check the footrest latches X
horizontal position. Check for proper engagement.
tension of backup safety
cables. Check the bucky slot shield X
for proper operation.
Check the floor anchor bolts X
of the base for tightness. Check the tension of the X
vertical power assist chain.
Check both the head and X
foot of the transverse table Check the X-ray tube to X
top chains for proper SFD linkage components
tension. Ensure the for tightness, proper
synchronization driver bar alignment, rigidity, etc.
and associated components
are tight and undamaged. Check for proper X-ray X
alignment.

Continued on next page

Elite 5000 Table Preventive Maintenance, continued

Mechanical Maintenance, continued Mechanical Checks

Mechanical Checks Interval

Procedure
Interval Every 6 Every 12
Months Months
Procedure
Every 6 Every 12
Months Months Check the operating limits X
for:
Check the ON/OFF function X • Table tilting
of the table.
• Top longitudinal and
Check the rolling loop X transverse travel.
section of the table body to
• Horizontal carriage
horizontal carriage cable for
travel.
wear.
• Vertical carriage travel
Check that the PCB's are X
properly seated and tightly Recalibrate the table as
mounted. necessary.

Check all external cables for X

signs of wear.
Check the Park button on X
the SFD for proper
operation.

Elite 1500/5000 Table Preventive Maintenance

Electrical Maintenance Storage Information
1. Check the ON/OFF function of the table. Storage
2. Check the rolling loop section of the table body to This equipment is designed for longterm storage in an
horizontal carriage cable for wear. environmentally controlled area.
3. Check that the PCBs are properly seated and tightly Storage Maintenance
mounted. This unit does not require any maintenance while in
4. Check all external cables for signs of wear. storage.

5. Check the Park button on the SFD for proper

operation.
6. Check the operating limits for:
• Table tilting
• Top longitudinal and transverse travel
• Horizontal carriage travel
• Vertical carriage travel
7. Calibrate the table as necessary.

1725 Spotfilm Preventive Maintenance

Perform the following maintenance checks on the 1725 Mechanical Checks
Spotfilm Device as indicated.
Interval
Mechanical Checks Procedure
Every 6 Every 12
Interval Months Months
Procedure Verify the alignment of the X
Every 6 Every 12
Months Months head/ foot and front/ back
cassette carriage sensors
Examine the Spotfilm interior X and flags.
to be sure that it's free of
Check the tension of the X
dust and dirt, especially
Cassette Carriage head/foot
magnetic particles.
steel chains as follows:
Check the masks through X • Move the cassette
their entire range of motion carriage to the foot end.
for binding. Ensure that they
are parallel and centered in • At the mid-point of the
all positions. chain between the
sprocket and the H/F jaw,
Check the flags to ensure X apply 14 (±0.5) ounces of
that they engage the mask force. The chain should
sensors. deflect 1/8".
Check the grid and Cone X
carriages for binding through
their operating ranges.
Check sensor/flag
engagement.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Preventive Maintenance, continued

Mechanical Checks

Mechanical Checks Interval

Procedure
Interval Every 6 Every 12
Months Months
Procedure
Every 6 Every 12
Months Months Check the disengagement of X
the Cassette Carriage latch
Check the Cassette Carriage X when the Carriage is in the
for binding or other eject position. The release
mechanical interference lever bearing should engage
throughout its entire with the cam when the
operating range. carriage is flush with the
outside surface at the front of
Check the Mask and X the case, or 3/16" from the
Cassette Carriage belts for bezel
proper tension. They should
not deflect more than 3/8" at Check the Jam Sensor X
the center with six ounces of nylon slide bar for ease
force.
of movement and
Check the engagement of X clearance between the
the head/foot Cassette sensor and magnet (1/
Carriage latch with bent link
and chain for minimum end 32" clearance is
play when the link is preferred).
engaged.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Preventive Maintenance, continued

Mechanical Checks

Mechanical Checks Interval

Procedure
Interval Every 6 Every 12
Months Months
Procedure
Every 6 Every 12
Months Months Make sure that all circuit X
boards are seated securely,
Check the lower brush X connectors are properly in
adjustment to ensure that place and that the PCB's
the cassette is held in the are not touching. Verify that
proper position for all mechanical fasteners are
engagement with the head/ secure.
foot movable arms.
Ensure that all strain X
Check the carriage X gauges are strain-limited
centering to ensure that only by the adjustment set
there is no rubbing at the screws in all four directions
sides. and not by any other
mechanical obstruction
Check the clearance at the X
front latch with a 14" X 14" Apply a light coating of X
cassette. silicone spray or mold
release agent on the left
Check the Jam Sensor and right walls of the inner
Magnet to be sure that it is Cassette Carriages and
free of magnetic particles. mask rails, if necessary.

SOFTWARE AND DIAGNOSTICS

MTX Generator
MTX Diagnostics
MTX Generator System Diagnostics
MTX Generator Diagnostics

Elite 1500/5000 Table

Under Table Collimator Diagnostics

1725 Spotfilm Device (SFD)

1725 Spotfilm Device Diagnostics

MTX Diagnostics
The following diagnostics can be run for the MTX: For all of the MTX diagnostic tests, ensure the following
is set:
• MTX Console Diagnostics
1. Place the service switch in the "Service Position".
• MTX Generator System Diagnostics
This switch is located on the front edge of the Mother
• MTX Generator Diagnostics Board.
Required Tools If you are not sure of the position, press the INFO
• Dual Channel Scope button by the top display and use the "+" and "-" (to
the right of the INFO button) to scroll through the
• Several clip leads menus. If there are several menus that include "Tech
• Extender card for Rack A Button Configuration", "Filament Calibration", then
the switch is in the Service Position.
The buttons on the console behave as follows:
• The INFO button acts like an "ENTER" button.
• The "+" and "-" buttons act like "SCROLL" buttons,
unless you are entering data.

Continued on next page

MTX Diagnostics, continued

MTX Console Diagnostics Display Test
The following tests can be run for the console: This test verifies the functionality of the fluorescent
display on the console.
• LED Test
1. With the console switch in the service position, press
• Display Test the INFO button.
• Keyboard Test 2. Using the "+" and "-" keys access the "CONSOLE
LED Test DIAGNOSTICS" menu. Press INFO again.
This test lights the 50 LEDs on the Console Panel in 3. Using the "+" and "-" keys access the
sequence. "FLUORESCENT DISPLAY TEST" menu. Press
1. With the console switch in the service position, press INFO again.
the INFO button. 4. Verify all LED's are functioning.
2. Using the "+" and "-" keys access the "CONSOLE 5. Press the INFO button and exit the test.
DIAGNOSTICS" menu. Press INFO again.
3. Using the "+" and "-" keys access the "LED TEST"
menu. Press INFO again.
4. Verify all LED's are functioning.
5. Press the INFO button and exit the test.

Continued on next page

MTX Diagnostics, continued

Keyboard Test
1. With the console switch in the service position press
the INFO button.
2. Using the "+" and "-" keys access the "CONSOLE
DIAGNOSTICS" menu. Press INFO again.
3. Using the "+" and "-" keys access the "KEYBOARD
TEST" menu. Press INFO again.
4. Verify each key pressed displays a different key
code.
5. Press the INFO button and exit the test.
6. Verify that all LED's are functioning. Press the INFO
button to exit the test.

MTX Generator System Diagnostics

MTX Communications Loopback Test
1. With the console switch in the service position press
the INFO button.
2. Use the "+" and "-" keys until the display reads
"CONSOLE DIAGNOSTICS", then press INFO
again.
3. Use the "+" and "-" keys until the display reads
"COMMUNICATIONS LOOPBACK TEST", then
press INFO again.
The "RCD" in the display should increment indicating
the loop-back of the data is correct. If the "ERR" in
the display increments, then further troubleshooting
is necessary.
4. Power down to exit this test.

MTX Generator Diagnostics

The following tests are set up at the generator CPU PCB
using the HEX switch on the edge of the circuit board.
Only positions 1 through 6 are used for generator
diagnostics. Position 7 is used for RAM copy.
• UART Transmitter Test
• Input Ports Test
• Output Ports Test
• D/A Converter Test
• A/D Converter Test
• mA Feedback Test
Note that these tests are not run from the console panel.
The HEX switch is only read on Power-up or with a CPU
Hardware Reset. Some newer systems have a reset
push button on the edge of the CPU PCB that can be
used. Otherwise, power down and up at the console.

MTX Generator Diagnostics, continued

UART Transmitter Test 3. With the console switch in the service position press
the INFO button.
This test sends out characters at the rate of 100/second
and the HEX switch determines the character. The HEX 4. Use the "+" and "-" keys until the display reads
switch can be changed any time during the test. The "GENERATOR DIAGNOSTICS", then press INFO
characters output are @, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, again.
M, N, and O.
5. On the CPU PCB, scope the transmit signal
The Console must be set for Generator Diagnostics to (U2 pin 3) and the receive signal (U1 pin 1) using a
loopback the characters received from the generator. If dual channel scope and verify the signals are the
this is not set the Console will keep trying to wake up the same. Change the HEX switch setting at any time to
generator and additional characters will be transmitted output the characters noted above.
from the console.
6. If no further generator diagnostics are required,
1. Place the service switch in the "Service Position". return all ribbon cables to their proper positions.
This switch is located on the front edge of the Mother
Board.
If you are not sure of the position, press the INFO
button by the top display and use the "+" and "-" (to
the right of the INFO button) to scroll through the
menus. If there are several menus that include "Tech
Button Configuration", "Filament Calibration", then
the switch is in the Service Position.
2. On the generator CPU PCB, set the HEX switch to
position 1 and reset the generator.

MTX Generator Diagnostics, continued

Input Ports Test HEX Switch Port Address Being Tested
There are 11 input ports that can be tested with this
A IN4 PCB pins B17 through B24
procedure. Each port consists of 8 inputs that are
decoded into an 8-bit character and sent to the UART B Not used.
Transmitter (provided the UART transmitter is working C Not used.
correctly).
D EPC PCB pins B1 through B8
The chart below shows the input signals the CPU reads
E Not used.
for the various HEX switch settings.
F Not used.
HEX Switch Port Address Being Tested
0 IN 1 PCB pins B1 through B8
1 IN1 PCB pins B9 through B16
2 IN1 PCB pins B17 through B24
3 Not used.
4 IN2 PCB pins B1 through B8
5 IN2 PCB pins B9 through B16
6 IN2 PCB pins B17 through B24
7 Not used.
8 IN4 PCB pins B1 through B8
9 IN4 PCB pins B9 through B16
Continued on next page

MTX Generator Diagnostics, continued

Input Ports Test, continued
1. On the generator CPU PCB, set the HEX switch to
position 2 and Reset the generator.
2. With the console switch in the service position, press
the INFO button.
3. Use the "+" and "-" keys until the display reads
"GENERATOR DIAGNOSTICS", then press INFO
again.
4. On the connector panel above rack "A" (follow the
ribbon cables) jumper pin "OUT B15" to ground. This
turns on the +24V DC supply.
5. Set the HEX switch to the position required for your
test.
6. Jumper the input to be tested to "ground" and scope
the transmit signal (U2 pin 3) and the receive signal
(U1 pin 1) on the CPU PCB.
7. If no further generator diagnostics are required,
power down the system, return all ribbon cables to
their proper positions and set the CPU HEX switch
to 0.

MTX Generator Diagnostics, continued

Output Ports Test 1. On the Generator CPU PCB set the HEX switch to
position 3 and reset the generator.
The 9 output ports on the Out PCB will be toggled with
this test. The chart below shows which output signals the 2. Set the HEX switch to the position required for your
CPU will send out for the various HEX switch settings. test.
3. Scope the output pin of the signal being tested.
HEX Switch Port Address Being Tested
4. If no further generator diagnostics are required,
0 OUT PCB pins B1 through B8
power down the system, return all ribbon cables to
1 OUT PCB pins B9 through B16 their proper positions and set the CPU HEX switch
2 OUT PCB pins B17 through B24 to 0.
3 OUT PCB pins C1 through C8
4 OUT PCB pins C9 through C16
5 OUT PCB pins C17 through C24
6 Not used.
7 EPC PCB pins B17 through 22
and 24
8 AEC PCB pins C1 through C8
9 AEC PCB pins C9 through C13
A-F Not used.

MTX Generator Diagnostics, continued

D/A Converter Test 1. On the Generator CPU PCB set the HEX switch to
position 4 and RESET the Generator.
This Test will test the output of the 4 D/A converters on
the ADA PCB. 2. Set the HEX switch to the position required for your
test.
HEX Switch Port Address Being Tested
3. Scope the output pin of the signal being tested.
0 ADA PCB pin B1 (Chopper (A ramp from 0 to 10 volts positive)
Reference)
4. If no further generator diagnostics are required,
1 Not used. power down the system, return all ribbon cables to
2 ADA PCB pin B3 (Filament their proper positions and set the CPU HEX switch
Reference) to 0.
3 Not used.
4 DA PCB pin B5 (KV
Reference)
5 ADA PCB pin B7 (Filament
Preheat Reference)
6 ADA PCB pin B9 (Not used)
7 ADA PCB pin B10 (Filament
Limit Reference)
8 Not Used
9 ADA PCB pin B1 (AEC
Reference)
A-f Not used.

MTX Generator Diagnostics, continued

A/D Converter Test 1. On the Generator CPU PCB set the HEX switch to
position 5 and reset the generator.
This Test will test the output of the 8 Channel A/D
converter on the ADA PCB. The D/A Converter Test 2. Set the HEX switch to the position required for your
should be run first since this test requires U6 to be test.
functional. The System will automatically cycle through
and read the 4 A/D channels and send the digital signals 3. Scope the output pin of the signal being tested and
back through the D/A to read the output values. jumper the inputs to ground or +5V.
4. If no further generator diagnostics are required,
HEX Switch A/D Input
D/A Output power down the system, return all ribbon cables to
(Equal to input potential) their proper positions and set the CPU Hex switch
0 ADA PCB pin B11 ADA PCB pin B5 to 0.
ADA PCB pin B13 ADA PCB pin B7
ADA PCB pin B15 ADA PCB pin B9
ADA PCB pin B17 ADA PCB pin B10
1 ADA PCB pin B19 ADA PCB pin B5
ADA PCB pin B21 ADA PCB pin B7
ADA PCB pin B23 ADA PCB pin B9
ADA PCB pin B25 ADA PCB pin B10
(5v IN = 10v OUT)

MTX Generator Diagnostics, continued

mA Feedback Test
1. On the generator CPU PCB set the HEX switch to
position 6 and reset the generator.
2. Inject a signal of either "ground" or +5V on pin B15
on the EPC PCB, while verifying the presence or
absence of pulses on EPC pins B21 and B22
(+5V = approximately 50 kHz).
3. If no further generator diagnostics are required,
power down the system, return all ribbon cables to
their proper positions and set the CPU HEX switch
to 0.

MTX Generator Diagnostics, continued

Modifying MTX Generator APR Data When all of the APR formats are selected, record them in
for future reference.
Introduction
This function is intended to be used as an APR. editor. It The anatomical names are stored alphabetically in the
allows the user to customize any of the settings that for a system software.
single APR selection. It is not necessary to close the They can be accessed by pressing the + key to move
Service Test switch to modify the APR data since the forward or the - key to move backwards.
customer can also modify the Apr.
Note When in AEC mode, the time selections will rep-
Operation resent backup time.
1. Before entering this test mode, select the desired
After entry into the test mode, the lower display displays
TECH and PROGRAM button. the exposure technique currently assigned to the TECH
2. Press the INFO Button, and PROGRAM button combination.
3. Press the + or - buttons until the upper display reads, To change to a different exposure technique, use the
"APR. Setup. mA/mAs, kV and/or time override buttons.
4. Press the INFO button again. After entry into the test mode, the console LED's display
the AEC parameters currently assigned to the TECH and
After entry into the test mode, the upper display
PROGRAM button combination.
displays the body part name currently assigned to the
TECH and PROGRAM button combination. To change to a different AEC parameter (field, density,
etc.), use the AEC override buttons.
To change to a different body part name, use + and -
buttons to scroll through the directory of available body When the correct APR program is set, push the INFO
part names. button and then any program button to store the new
parameters and exit the test mode.

Under Table Collimator Diagnostics

For information on diagnostics for the Collimator refer to
the Electrical System Calibration, Fluoro Collimator
Calibration in the Alignment and Calibration section.

1725 Spotfilm Device Diagnostics

For information on diagnostics for the 1725 Spotfilm
Device Diagnostics refer to the Default Selection and
the Factory Calibration Check sections within
Alignment and Calibration.

THEORY
MTX Generator Elite 1500/5000 Table
MTX Generator Theory CPU PCB
MTX mA Filament Theory I/O #1 PCB
MTX Operator Console Theory II/O #2 PCB
MTX Automatic Exposure Control Board SCR Controller PCB
MTX Inverter Supply Voltages (Line Contacts) Interrupter PCB
Power Supply
Collimator Power Assist PCB
Motor Controller PCB
Collimator Theory
Driver PCB PWM (Pulse Width Modulator)
Collimator Modes of Operation
Collimator PCB
Table Interface PCB
Starter
Wiring Connections (Pinout) Table
HMS Starter Theory 1725 SFD ION Chamber -300V DC Supply
Table Interface Relay Functions
Circuit Board Descriptions

MTX Generator Theory

The MTX generator is an 800 mA, three phase unit that • Electronics Module
uses a high frequency series resonant inverter for high
The electronics module controls the generation of X-
voltage control. The generator consists of the control
rays. It has two parts; control electronics for the
console, electronics module, and High Tension
power circuit and the power circuit.
Transformer.
When commands from the console are sent to the
• Control Console
generator CPU, the CPU sends the appropriate
The control console is the user interface. It displays control signals. The PCB card rack A contains the
technique information, generator status and error CPU and peripheral control PCBs. This rack also
messages. The control console also sends exposure contains a board for exposure timing and one for
information to the generator and displays the current automatic exposure control.
anatomic technique and exposure parameters. An
Card rack B contains the relay and control circuits.
internal microprocessor controls the display and
Specifically, it contains:
interprets control input. Exposure information is sent
to another microprocessor in the electronics module. • 4 PCBs containing relays
• 3 PCBs for filament control
• PCBs for chopper and inverter controls, and
phototimer field selection
• power supply for automatic exposure pickups

Continued on next page

MTX Generator Theory, continued

• High Tension Transformer
The high tension transformer is located in the bottom
of the electronics module. It contains the high voltage
transformer, rectifiers, and the filament transformer.
The high tension transformer consists of two
transformers with the primary windings connected in
parallel. The secondary transformer is full wave
rectified separately.
The low voltage side of one rectifier is connected to
the high voltage side of the other. The output potential
across both rectifiers in series is measured using a
voltage divider. A 220 megohm resistor is connected
to both lines inside the tank. The remaining voltage
divider is on the measuring PCB. THe high tension
rectified output is connected to the appropriate tube
anode by a three position switch. The switch position
is controlled by the microprocessor.
The X-ray tube filament transformer is also in the high
tension transformer tank. There are two transformers;
one for a large focal spot filament and another for a
small focal spot filament.

MTX mA Filament Theory

The MTX has two filament driver boards; one for the
large filament and the other for the small filament. These
boards are interchangeable for troubleshooting
purposes. The driver boards use power inverters (Q1/
Q2) feeding current into the primary input of phase-
splitting transformer (T3). The output of this transformer
is phase-split and sent to MOS FETs Q2 and Q4, which
are arranged in a push-pull configuration. This output
drives the filament.

MTX Operator Console Theory

Overview Communications
The Console display PCB is the user interface to the Communication with the generator electronics is serial. A
MTX generator. It displays generator status, anatomical 20 mA current loop is controlled by U41 and U40
programming and technique selections. An 8085 optocouplers. A pair of 78L05 regulators (U36 and U37)
microprocessor controls the following functions of the provides power to the current loop.
console:
• Two EPROMS and two NVRAMs make up the
memory.
• A 20 mA loop provides communication with the
generator. Data is passed to and from the
microprocessor via an 8256 MUART. The MUART
also handles communication with the vacuum
fluorescent display. Another 8256 MUART handles
access to the Real Time Clock and communication via
an RS232 serial port.
• Keyboard inputs are detected and passed to the
microprocessor by an 8279 keyboard/display
controller.
• A 60V AC line powers the console. The transformer in
the console generates 5V, 20V, and 42V DC supplies.
This transformer also supplies a 7V AC signal for the
display filaments.

MTX Automatic Exposure Control Board

The automatic exposure control board (AEC) generates
the termination signal for timed exposures. The board
provides address decoding and a 12-bit D/A converter
(U9), which transmits the nominal density signal as a
voltage value to a comparator. This signal is calculated
by the CPU and output through the converter (U9) before
an exposure is initiated. The nominal signal is then
compared in U6 with the actual signal from the pickup
that was inverted and connected to the amplifier. When
the threshold is reached, the output (U6 and U7) turns on
Q1 and terminates the exposure. The input of Q1 is
shorted out through U10 for interference protection. The
switch is not opened again until exposure prep.
The AEC board also contains pickup relays. These
relays are connected to the operational amp U6.
Separate pickups provide SFC operation.

MTX Inverter Supply Voltages (Line Contacts)

High Line Inverter Supply Relay (K02) Events
The K02 relay behaves as follows:
• K02 is pulled in through the K03 (N.O.) contacts for
high line pre-charging when a High Line Technique is
selected and supplies the 380V AC through CB01 to
the inverter. The 110V AC voltage is supplied through
the K03 contacts through 1K323 (Bucky Start) or
1K318 (Fluoro) and 1K53 (Safety).
• K03 is pulled in by the digital out PCB (B14) with
power coming in through contacts 1K12 (Hardware
Prep by prep switch) and through 1K53 (Overload).
• 1K323 is pulled in by the digital out PCB (B21) with
power coming in through contacts 1K12 (Hardware
Prep by prep switch) or 1K18 (Hardware Fluoro by the
footswitch) and 1K331 (Filament OK).
• 1K318 is pulled in by the digital out PCB (B7) with
power coming in through contacts 1K12 (Hardware
Prep by prep switch) or 1K18 (Hardware Fluoro by the
footswitch).
• 1K53 is pulled in by K51D contacts (Cathode
Overload) or the K52D contacts (Anode Overload).

MTX Inverter Supply Voltages (Line Contacts), continued

Low Line Inverter Supply Relay (K04) • 1K323 is pulled in by the digital out PCB (B21) with
The K04 relay behaves as follows: power coming in through contacts 1K12 (Hardware
Prep by prep switch) or 1K18 (Hardware Fluoro by the
• K04 is pulled in through the K03 (N.C.) contacts when footswitch) and 1K331 (Filament OK).
a low line technique is selected and supplies 208V AC
• 1K318 is pulled in by the digital out PCB (B7) with
through CB01 to the Inverter. The 110V AC voltage is
supplied through the K03 contacts through 1K323 power coming in through contacts 1K12 (Hardware
(Bucky Start) or 1K318 (Fluoro) and 1K53 (Overload). Prep by prep switch) or 1K18 (Hardware Fluoro by the
footswitch).
• 1K53 is pulled in by K51D contacts (Cathode
Overload) or K52D contacts (Anode Overload).

kVP 10 15 25 40 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800
120
100 High Line
80
65 Low Line
50
40

Collimator Theory
The collimator consists of these main components: The operator control panel on the front of the collimator
contains the:
• Collimator Assembly
• manual sizing adjustment knobs,
• Power Supply with Microprocessor
• mode indicators,
• Automatic Cassette Tray
• field lamp push button, and
• SID Compensation Potentiometer
• manual control push button.
Collimator Assembly
The off-focal vane assembly is precision-aligned at the The size indicators are also located on the front with user
factory to extend into the tube port and reduce penumbra selectable SID readouts. The override key switch is
located on the back of the collimator.
effects without cutting off portions of the useful beam. Do
not attempt to repair, disturb or realign. Power Supply with Microprocessor
Inside the housing are two sets of motor driven lead The power supply chassis contains both the supply and
shutters, two DC drive motors, and a high intensity field microprocessor boards. It can be mounted on the CTM,
illumination lamp with a membrane mirror. The mirror is in the table, or in one of the equipment cabinets.
mounted on a frame so the primary X-ray beam passes
through the membrane.
A filter selector assembly provides filtering into the
primary X-ray beam. A micro switch is actuated by the
insertion or removal of the filtration so low kV levels can
be used (i.e., less than 50kV). The filter tray must be
present to allow exposures at 50kv and above.

Continued on next page

Collimator Theory, continued

Automatic Cassette Tray
The automatic cassette tray can be used in both the
table or wall cassette/bucky stands. The tray contains
size sensing potentiometers and switches to measure
cassette size and the presence of a cassette. The sizing
potentiometers measure both longitudinal and
transverse dimensions.
SID Compensation Potentiometer
Most CTM's contain a SID compensation potentiometer
to allow for sizing SID's from 36 to 48 inches. This signal
is summed with the longitudinal and transverse cassette-
sizing signal sent from the table bucky to the collimator
electronics.

Collimator Modes of Operation

The collimator operates in the following modes, 6. SID between 36 and 48 inches when using the table
depending on the required X-ray field size: bucky or programmed SID distances if using the wall
stand.
• Automatic Mode (PBL)
7. Filter tray inserted if using 50kv or greater is
• Manual Mode
required.
• Override Mode
A green indicator labeled PBL on the control panel also
Automatic Mode (PBL) illuminates.
Positive Beam Limiting (PBL) mode is the automatic When conditions 1 through 4 are not met the collimator is
mode where the X-ray field size is limited to the actual placed in Bypass mode. The Bypass indicator on the
film size. In PBL mode, all conditions for that mode must control panel is illuminated (yellow). If the filter tray is not
be met before the collimator will size correctly. The inserted above 49kV or if the SID is greater than 48
following conditions must be met for the collimator to inches, the No Exposure indicator (red) is illuminated
operate in automatic mode: and exposures are not allowed.
1. Cassette loaded into the tray. Manual Mode
2. Cassette tray inserted in the bucky; all other cassette The operator can switch the collimator from PBL mode to
holders empty. manual mode by depressing the Manual control switch
located on the front of the collimator. This allows the
3. Table horizontal or vertical, within 10 degrees.
operator to manually adjust the shutters to a smaller
4. X-ray tube perpendicular to the horizontal or vertical X-ray field than the film size.
film plane, within 15 degrees.
5. Key switch set to PBL.

Continued on next page

Collimator Modes of Operation, continued

Override Mode
A key switch on the back of the collimator provides an
override to the PBL mode of operation. An override is
typically used for specialized procedures or in the event
of an electronics failure. If the override is on, the green
PBL indicator is off.

HMS Starter Theory

General Overview of Operation For high speed operation, 370V AC or 72V AC is
Two AC power supplies, 60 Hz and 180 Hz power the directed to 1CR1 (300V AC or 55V AC) for Q stator. The
HMS starter. In low speed, the 60 Hz source supplies the DC output to terminals F and Q is applied to the inverter.
220V AC for start and the 60V AC for run. In high speed Two sets of opto-isolators in the Inverter Driver Board
for a standard stator, the 180 Hz inverter chops 440V DC (CB512-4) send signals through the isolating inverter
for start and 100V DC for run into 180 Hz AC. For a Q gates to the base of the four transistors. The driver
stator 350V DC is supplied for start and 60V DC for run. transistors contain isolated power supplies required to
operate the inverter transistors.
Detailed Circuit Operation
In low speed operation, 220V AC or 60V AC is taken Input data from the generator is isolated by opto-isolators
directly from transformer 1T1 and passed through relay to protect the microprocessor from external noise. Data
K5 to terminals L and k. Where: is then passed through input ports to the microprocessor.
Output ports control the driver transistors and the
• K is the principal winding source. operating status LEDs.
• L is connected to phase-shift capacitors 1C1 and 1C2. Solid state relay 1SS1 opens each time a power relay is
Terminal J is the auxiliary winding source. actuated, removing incoming power and preventing
contact arcing.
During acceleration time, K4 (run relay) de-energizes
and AC passes from J and K directly to the selected
tube. During run K4 opens its closed contacts.
AC then passes through the current-sensing circuits and
relays KA and KP. These current-sensing circuits are
used to signal the generator that exposures are allowed.

Continued on next page

HMS Starter Theory, continued

Current Detection
The current circuit located on the HMS mother board
provides current detection during a start cycle. At power
up the current window signal is checked for +5V. If the
service jumper is installed this voltage is not present. At
the end of a start cycle the current window is checked
again. If the signal is true, the run cycle is enabled. If the
signal is not true the start cycle is suspended. This safety
detection aids in finding the following conditions:
• defective relays
• blown fuses
• bad connections
• faulty relay drivers, and
• a faulty microprocessor board.
DC Braking
DC braking applies high speed run signals to relays. This
causes the microprocessor to turn half of the inverter
during the brake period. Approximately 60V DC is
applied to the starter principal winding.

Elite 1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation

This section contain operational theory for the following
components:
• CPU PCB
• I/O #1 PCB
• I/O #2 PCB
• SCR Controller PCB
• Interrupter PCB
• Power Supply
• Power Assist PCB
• Motor Controller PCB
• Driver PCB PWM (Pulse Width Modulator)
• Collimator PCB
• Table Interface PCB
• Wiring Connections (Pinout) Table
• 1725 SFD ION Chamber -300V DC Supply
• Table Interface Relay Functions

Continued on next page

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

CPU PCB • Operator speed and direction requests from primary
CPU PCB is designed around the 32-bit 68008 operator controls (transverse, longitudinal, tilt control,
processor. All data, address and control lines to and from PA handle) located on the front panel of the SFD.
processor are buffered by of U10, U11, U12 and U14. • Positions of tilt, table top longitudinal and transverse,
SFD carriage and SID from their respective
• CPU memory consists of:
potentiometers.
• program storage in an 8k x 8 EPROM (U8),
The six analog outputs include:
• non-volatile data storage for calibration data in
512 x 8 EEPROM (U15). • 10 volts reference for the supply side of all the
positional feedback POTS.
• memory and I/O access is controlled by the CPU
PAL U9. • Five reference voltages to establish motion speed for
tilt, table top longitudinal and transverse, and power
The power-up, manual and auto-reset circuits consist of assist longitudinal and vertical.
R1, R2 and C4.
Each external input channel is buffered by a unity-gain
PCB two-pole filter, which feeds the analog multiplexer.
The analog PCB provides 16 analog input channels and
6 analog output channels (12 used, 4 spare) to monitor
the following:
• 10 volts reference supplied to all analog sensors and
strain gauge amplifier.
• +5, +/-15 volt power supplies.

Continued on next page

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

I/O #1 PCB Interrupter PCB
This board allows the CPU to read the digital sensors The interrupter PCB produces a high pulse at P1-2 when
and display collision codes in normal operation. During the iso-interrupter is blocked. When the interrupter
calibration, the CPU displays calibration steps and error wheel, which is attached to the output shift of the motor,
codes on the display. breaks the light beam between the emitting diode photo
transistor, the transistor turns off.
I/O #2 PCB
The I/O #2 PCB supplies:
• Digital signals to the motor controllers
• Drives the locks, Brakes, and Front panel LED display
• Sends digital information to the overhead collimator
logic.
SCR Controller PCB
The SCR PCB, is located in the power supply and
controls the motor high voltage supply. It detects if the
motor controllers are turned off when the power is turned
On.
The SCR control also provides a discharge for excess
energy during regeneration and a supply discharge when
the supply is turned off.

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Power Supply Unswitched 120V AC is routed to the On/off PCB via
The 120V AC power for the table and the spotfilm device P11-13 and J11-14 and fuse F17. The ON/OFF PCB
comes through the line attached to connector P1. power contains the logic for turning relay K1 On or off.
is then routed through FL1 to circuit breakers CB1 When relay K1 is energized, one set of contacts (1 to 2)
(TABLE) and CB2 (SFD). closes and 120V AC from CB1 energizes the following:
Note Although CB1 and CB2 look identical, they are • The X-ray tube fan (through fuse F8).
not.
• The 12V DC power supply.
The table breaker(CB1) has a motor start delay, which
• The 160V DC supply.
provides a current of 30A for 10 seconds. If a breaker
like CB2 is installed in place of the correct breaker for • The table 120V AC power to the table Interface PCB,
CB1 it may trip during normal operation. which supplies the:

Warning Turning off circuit breaker CB2 will • Table electronics (through F1).
not de-energizes all power to the SFD. • Transformer T1 (through F2) is connected to
both CB1 and CB2 and the x-ray CR5 to produce the ± 20V DC supplies (through
generator power must be turned off to F12 and F13) and to CR4 to produce the +10V
remove all potentially hazardous DC supply (through F11). The ± 20V DC and the
power in the SFD before personnel are +10V DC supplies are routed to the Mother PCB
allowed access to it. failure to do this where they are regulated and distributed as ±
may result in personnel death or 15V DC and +5V DC supplies, respectively.
injury.

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Power Supply, continued zone D3) through R1 (zone D4). It takes about 5 to 7
• Transformer T3 (through F3). T3 and rectifier seconds for C1 to charge to 100V DC.
CR2 generate an unregulated +24V DC supply When the SCR Controller PCB senses that there is100V
(through F14) that is used by the table brakes DC on the 160V DC motor controller bus (both table
and locks and the vertical power assist. body and tilt), the SCR controller will set a 100V DC to
Another set of contacts of K1 closes to supply power (J103-12) HI to signal the table CPU that the power is
through CB2 to T4 and CR3 for the The following: ready.

The SFD +36V DC supply (through F15) When the CPU senses a HI on the 100V DC line, it will
set signal CONTROLLER ON/OFF (J103-13) to HI. This
The +36V DC supply operates all of the electronics turns SCR1 to ON to supply 160V DC motor controller
in the SFD. The SFD will operate entirely with this power to the table positioning motors through fuses F4
one supply. and F5.
The T4, CR7 for the +30V DC supply (through F16). During coast-down conditions, the tilt drive motor will act
The + 30V DC supply goes to the SFD where it is as a generator and try to drive the motor controller bus
regulated to +24V DC to operate the fan on the SFD voltage higher than 160V DC.
cover. If the motor controller bus voltage reaches 200V DC,
circuitry in the SCR controller PCB will function to
The 12V DC regulated supply in zone A6 is sent to the
interface PCB where it is used to power the input and connect R1 to the bus to dissipate excess power until the
output signals. voltage goes below 200V DC. R2 also functions as a
discharge path for C1 when the controller power is
When K1 is first energized, power is supplied through turned off.
bridge rectifier CR1 to begin charging C1 (4200 uF -

Continued on next page

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Power Assist PCB For the longitudinal and transverse functions, a jumper
The power assist PCB provides the longitudinal and on current sensor CS1 is positioned to connect a 12-turn
vertical power assist for fluoro staging. current sensor coil. For the tilt function a jumper
positioned to connect a 3-turn sensor coil.
When The longitudinal motor is driven full speed in either
direction, the clutch voltage is varied to change the Driver PCB PWM (Pulse Width Modulator)
torque. The current is varied to the vertical drive motor to The PMW PCB has two drivers for the top and bottom
control its torque. transistors of the Dual Darlington Transistor (DDT1).
Each driver contains an opto isolator for level translation,
Motor Controller PCB under voltage protection in case of bias voltage failure,
The MOTOR CONTROLLER PCB controls the speed of and a constant current driver, which supplies the base
the tilt, longitudinal and transverse table motors. PCB drive.
inputs include:
CAUTION The 160V DC re, is not grounded. Use
• On/Off
an isolation transformer for any ac-
• Speed powered test equipment that monitors
this voltage. failure to comply may
• Direction result in equipment damage.
• Actual motor speed
Its’ double-loop integration reduces noise due to line
ripple.
Pulse-width modulation (PWM) is used to generate a
high-speed duty cycle drive, which varies the power to
the motor.
Continued on next page

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Collimator PCB
The collimator PCB acts as an interface board between
the collimator head and the SFD to allow the CPU to
send operating commands to the collimator. The
collimator also uses the PCD to notify the CPU of its
operating status. 112V DC and + 5V DC produced by
this power supply are used exclusively by the collimator
PCB and, therefore, do not leave the circuit board.

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Table Interface PCB Wiring Connections (Pinout) Table
The table interface PCB board connects the table to the The following table lists the signals that come into the
other equipment of the system. The cables from P1, P2 table interface from the centroid on connectors P1, P2,
and P3 on this board go to the centroid panel. The P3 as well as related table signal names.
footswitch is wired to the terminal strip.

P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
Signal Name Related Table Signal Name
Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin
Chassis Ground 9 5 CC Chassis Ground
System DC Return 41 s, 13 COM
57
120V AC Hot 7
120V AC Neutral 8
+15V DC Supply AEC 39 r 11 +15V DC
-15V DC Supply AEC 40 t 12 -15V DC
AEC High Voltage BB
AEC High Voltage Shield AA
RESERVED (GEN 120V AC SUPPLY) J
GEN 120V AC Return H 19 Bucky Start Return

Continued on next page

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Wiring Connections (Pinout) Table, continued

P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
Signal Name Related Table Signal Name
Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin
Left Field (B1) (F1) E 16 /Field 1
Right Field (B3) (F3) K 18 /Field 3
Center Field (B2) (F2) m 17 /Field 2
TOMO ON Low True k 1,2 (Tomo: DGND)
AEC SIG Pickup 1 (SFD) 12 –
AEC SIG Pickup 1 SHLD (SFD) 8 –
AEC SIG Pickup 2 (TABLE BUCKY) HH –
AEC SIG Pickup 2 SHLD (TABLE BUCKY) 8 EE Table Sig. Shield
+24V DC Collimator Supply d 9 Cass. Present
Collimator DC Return S 26 Col. POT Com.
+8V DC Collimator Supply TBL Bucky U 24 Coll. + 8V
TBL Bucky CASS POT TRANS SIG T 25 Trans Cass. Wiper
TBL Bucky CASS POT LONG SIG W 23 Long. Cass. Wiper
CASS SENS COMM HORIZ MODE (HORIZ MODE) Y 4 Table Horiz.

Continued on next page

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Wiring Connections (Pinout) Table, continued

P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
Signal Name Related Table Signal Name
Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin
CASS SENS COMM VERT MODE (VERT MODE) f 6 Vert. Mode
Unit Table VERT SID (100 cm RELAY COIL VERT) Z –
Footswitch And Safety Common Out 35 –
Footswitch And Safety Return 29 –
Exposure PREP Switch Output (UT PREP) 1 –
Exposure PREP Switch Return 30 –
RESERVED (TABLE TILT 1A SAFETY SWITCH) 3 –
RESERVED (TABLE TILT 1A SAFETY SWITCH RTN) 55 –
SFO EXP Advance 31 10 Prep. Ready
SFD EXP Advance Common 32 –
SFD EXP Release 37 –
SFD EXP Release Common 36 –
SFD Cassette Not PARK 24 –
SFD Cassette PARK 33 –

Continued on next page

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Wiring Connections (Pinout) Table, continued

P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
Signal Name Related Table Signal Name
Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin
SFD Cassette Park Common 28 –
RESERVED (NORMAL 1A MAG MODE 54 –
MAG 1 1A MAG MODE 47 12 M1
MAG 2 1A MAG MODE 53 13 M2
UT Tube Select (TUBE C SELECT) 49 –
FLUORO/RAD Exposure Switch AP 59 –
FLUORO Footswitch Position 2 AP 65 –
Rotor U8/H8 OUT PHASE D –
Rotor U9 Common C –
Rotor U7/H7 IN PHASE K –
Rotor Shield L –
Exposure ALE n 2,14 Table IC Start/EIP
FLUORO Drive h –
TECH 2 EXP Release B 22 Bucky B1
Bucky Exposure Release a –
Continued on next page

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Wiring Connections (Pinout) Table, continued

P1 P2 P3 P4 P6 P7
Signal Name Related Table Signal Name
Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin Pin
TECH 2 Bucky Drive C 20 Bucky Start
SFD Select Low True 42 14 SFD Select
Digital FLUORO OUT 43 –
Prep Output 64 –
Prep Return 60 –
POS 1 FS OUT2 (EXP OUT) 63 –
POS 1 FS OUT2 RTM 62 –
Room Lights Output 46 –
Room Lights Common 45 –
120V AC Neutral e –
TOMO ON 120V AC V –
Exposure Limit (120V AC) p –
Angle Select Common (120V AC) F –
Reset Limit (120V AC) j –
TBL BKY CASS Present b –
Continued on next page

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

1725 SFD ION Chamber -300V DC Supply that they emulate signals that would come from a photo
multiplier tube to match the generator requirements.
CAUTION There is -300V DC on the table The two inputs are:
interface board that is supplied from
the X-ray generator and is not turned • P7-7, SFD 1C OUT
off with table power. Be sure to turn
power OFF to the X-ray generator as • P7 through 15. TABLE 1C OUT.
well as the table before touching the The incoming SFD 1C OUT signal is a positive-going
table interface board. Failure to turn ramp, amplified and inverted by U3.
power off may result in personal
injury. Jumper JP1 selects whether compensation is inserted.
• If JP 1 and 2 are jumpered, the signal goes directly
The inputs to the -300V DC supply come from the X-ray
(uncompensated) to the SFD 1C SIG at P2-12.
generator +15 V supply through P3 pins /R, /S and /T
and P2 pins 41 and 57. The TABLE 1C OUT signal is processed as described in
SFD 1C OUT.
ION Chamber Signal Processing
Field select lines 1, 2 and 3 on P3 pins E, /M and K
select the fields for the bucky ion chamber. The fields for
the SFD ion chamber are selected by the SFD
electronics.
There are two signal processing circuits, one for the
bucky ion chamber and one for the SFD ion chamber.
These two circuits condition the ION chamber signals so

Continued on next page

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Table Interface Relay Functions

Coil Pins Pins

Relay Function
Connections 4, 6, 8 9, 11, 13

K1 TBL BUCKY CASS In series with K2 coil Makes: Provides return path for
PRESENT (1) K1 is ON when a COLL 24V DC TO NOT TABLE from COLL +8V
COLL +8VSW
cassette is in the table bucky CASSETTE PRESENT. HORIZ & TABLE +90
and the tray is locked in place. relays
K2 TBL BUCKY CASS See Collimator DC Return Connects VERT MODE Pull table BKY CASS
PRESENT (2) K2 is ON when a to TABLE VERT SID PRES signal true (LO)
cassette is in the table bucky
and the tray is locked in place.
K3 UNDERTABLE TUBE Table interface +12VDC to NOT Creates REFE from N/A
SELECTED K3 is ON when the CASSETTE PRESENT (see - +12VDC power supply
undertable tube is selected at COLL DC RTN)
the generator.
K4 ROOM LIGHTS K4 is ON when SFD ROOM LIGHT to GEN- Connects centroid signal N/A
the ROOM LIGHTS function is ROOM LIGHTS to
COM (SYSTEM DC RETURN)
selected on SFD. ROOMLIGHTS RTN
K5 PREP SFD signal RL to GENCOM Connects cen-troid Connects Centroid
(SYSTEM DC RETURN) signals PREP SW OUT signals PREP to PREP
K5 is ON when the SFD signal
to PREP SW OUTRTN RTN
RL is true (HI).

Continued on next page

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Table Interface Relay Functions, continued

Coil Pins Pins

Relay Function
Connections 4, 6, 8 9, 11, 13

K6 SFD CASSETTE PARK /NOT SFD signal PREP RDY to NOT When ON: When ON:
PARK. K5 is ON when UT & SFD SELECT
Connects centroid signal Connects K8-1 (FL) to
SFD are selected and
NOT SFD CASSETTE K7-1 (SFD RAD RQ)
EXPOSURE ADV from the PARK to SFD CASS
generator is true.
PARK COM
When OFF:
Connects centroid
signals SFD CASSETTE
PARK to SFD CASS
PARK COM
K7 SFD RAD RE QUEST K7 is ON SFD signal SFDRADRQ to Connects centroid N/A
when the SFD requests an SFD NOT SFD SELECT signals EXPOSURE
radiograph RELEASE to
EXPOSURE RELEASE
RET
K8 UNDERTABLE RAD OR SFD signal FL to GENCOM Connects centroid Connects centroid signal
FLUORO REQUEST. K8 is ON (SYSTEM DC RETURN) signals POS 1 FS OUT 2 FL/RAD EXP SW to
when the SFD requests either to POS 1 FS OUT 2 RET K10-4 (COMMON for
UT radiograph or fluoro centroid signal FL 2 OUT

Continued on next page

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Table Interface Relay Functions, continued

Coil Pins Pins

Relay Function
Connections 4, 6, 8 9, 11, 13

K9 DIGITAL FLUORO FOOTSWITCH signal DIG Connects centroid N/A

FOOTSWITCH K9 is ON when FLUORO FOOT SW to GENC- signals DIG FLUORO to
the digital fluoro footswitch is OM (SYSTEM DC RETURN) FOOT SW & SAFETY
depressed COM
K10 HI LEVEL FLUORO FOOTSWITCH signal DIG Connects centroid signal N/A
FOOTSWITCH K10 is ON FLUORO FOOT SW to FL 2 OUT to FL/RAD
when the second position of a GENCOM (SYSTEM DC EXP SW (K8-9)
2-level fluoro footswitch is RETURN)
pressed

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Elite 1500 / 5000 Undertable Exposure Timing Sequence Diagram
Standby - Fluoro - Immediate SFD Rad Exposure - Immediate Fluoro - Standby
Signal Description - Level
(Generator Mode): Standby Fluoro Standby Prep SFD Exposure Standby Fluoro Standby

28VDC
SFD Select 0VDC

12 VDC
Fluoro Hand/Foot SW 0 VDC

12VDC
Prep Hand/Foot SW 0VDC

12VDC
RL 0VDC

12VDC
FL 0VDC

120VAC
Exposure Advance 0VAC

28VDC
Fluoro Drive 0VDC

28VDC
ALE (Main Gate) 0VDC

12VDC
EIP 0VDC

28VDC
Prep SW Out (K5) 0VDC

28VDC
Prep (K5) 0VDC

28VDC
POS 1 FS Out 2 (K8) 0VDC

28VDC
FL/RAD Exp. SW (K8) 0VDC

28VDC
Exposure Release (K7) 0VDC

28VDC
SFD Cass Park (K6) 0VDC

28VDC
/SFD Cass Park (K6) 0VDC

Notes: 1. Bold face indicates Picker Interface Signals. Normal Face indicates Internal Table/SFD Signals. 2. /U.T. Tube Select must be true (low) for Undertable Tube operation.
3. Voltage levels shown are representative only for MTX and Vector 80/100 x-ray generator systems. 4. The Signal Descriptions listed above are the Signal Names on the “Elite 1500 Table Interface PCB” Schematic.

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Elite 1500 / 5000 Undertable Exposure Timing Sequence Diagram
Standby - Fluoro - Immediate SFD Rapid Sequence (2 RAD Exposures Completed Film Sequence) - Immediate Fluoro - Standby
Signal Description - Level
(Generator Mode): Standby Fluoro Standby Prep SFD Exposure Prep SFD Exposure Standby Fluoro Standby

28VDC
SFD Select 0VDC

12 VDC
Fluoro Hand/Foot SW 0 VDC

12VDC
Prep Hand/Foot SW 0VDC

12VDC
RL 0VDC

12VDC
FL 0VDC

120VAC
Exposure Advance 0VAC

28VDC
Fluoro Drive 0VDC

28VDC
ALE (Main Gate) 0VDC

12VDC
EIP 0VDC

28VDC
Prep SW Out (K5) 0VDC

28VDC
Prep (K5) 0VDC

28VDC
POS 1 FS Out 2 (K8) 0VDC

28VDC
FL/RAD Exp. SW (K8) 0VDC

28VDC
Exposure Release (K7) 0VDC

28VDC
SFD Cass Park (K6) 0VDC

28VDC
/SFD Cass Park (K6) 0VDC

Notes: 1. Bold face indicates Picker Interface Signals. Normal Face indicates Internal Table/SFD Signals. 2. /U.T. Tube Select must be true (low) for Undertable Tube operation.
3.Voltage levels shown are representative only for MTX and Vector 80/100 x-ray generator systems. 4. The Signal Descriptions listed above are the Signal Names on the “Elite 1500 Table Interface PCB” Schematic.

1500/5000 Table Theory of Operation, continued

Elite 1500 / 5000 Undertable Exposure Timing Sequence Diagram
Standby - Fluoro - Immediate Non-SFD Rad Exposure - Immediate Fluoro - Standby
Signal Description - Level
(Generator Mode): Standby Fluoro Standby Prep / Non-SFD Exposure Standby Fluoro Standby

28VDC
SFD Select 0VDC

12 VDC
Fluoro Hand/Foot SW 0 VDC

12VDC
Prep Hand/Foot SW 0VDC

12VDC
RL 0VDC

12VDC
FL 0VDC

120VAC
Exposure Advance 0VAC

28VDC
Fluoro Drive 0VDC

28VDC
ALE (Main Gate) 0VDC

12VDC
EIP 0VDC

28VDC
Prep SW Out (K5) 0VDC

28VDC
Prep (K5) 0VDC

28VDC
POS 1 FS Out 2 (K8) 0VDC

28VDC
FL/RAD Exp. SW (K8) 0VDC

28VDC
Exposure Release (K7) 0VDC

28VDC
SFD Cass Park (K6) 0VDC

28VDC
/SFD Cass Park (K6) 0VDC

Notes: 1. Bold face indicates Picker Interface Signals. Normal Face indicates Internal Table/SFD Signals. 2. /U.T. Tube Select must be true (low) for Undertable Tube operation.
3.Voltage levels shown are representative only for MTX and Vector 80/100 x-ray generator systems. 4. The Signal Descriptions listed above are the Signal Names on the “Elite 1500 Table Interface PCB” Schematic.

1725 Spotfilm Device Theory of Operation

Introduction Upper And Lower I/O PCBS
The 1725 Spotfilm Device is a front cassette loading The Upper I/O PCB is physically mounted above the
system that accepts a variety of cassette sizes (i.e., Lower I/O PCB. Most of the control data to and from the
8X10 inch to 14X14 inch cassettes including metric CPU PCB and devices outside the SFD pass through
equivalents). Multiple formats are available for selection, one or both of these boards. Most of these are routed to
which include 1 on 1, 2 on 1, 3 on 1, 4 on 1, 6 on 1 and 9 the CPU through the Upper I/O board the outputs from
on 1. the CPU pass through the Lower I/O board.
Circuit Overview Motor Control Interface PCB
Front Panel Display PCB The CPU generates data for all six SFD motors.The
Motor Control Interface PCB decodes the address from
The Front Panel Display PCB interfaces the front panel
the CPU and routes the data to the appropriate
to the CPU board. The digital circuitry uses latches that
accept inputs from the front panel controls and routes
them to the CPU PCB and latches. This causes the front
panel indicator to illuminate.
Central Processing (CPU) PCB
The CPU is a microprocessor whose operation is
directed by software stored on an EPROM. Variables
generated by the CPU are stored in RAM.
Additionally this circuit board generates the display data
for the LCD in the calibration and diagnostic panel and
contains the associated LCD control circuitry. The reset
master clock is also supported.

1725 Spotfilm Device Theory of Operation, continued

Circuit Board Descriptions Strain Gauge PCB (PCB No.109-05-500)
This section the describes each circuit board of the SFD: Note The signals processed by the Strain gauge PCB
are used exclusively by the table.
• Strain Gauge PCB
Strain gauges in the SFD front panel sense motion
• Front Panel Display PCB commands for the table top, table tilting and SFD vertical
• Upper I/O PCB and longitudinal movement. Strain gauges in the SFD
front panel connected to the Strain Gauge PCB where
• Lower I/O PCB the individual command inputs are processed and then
• Motor Control Interface PCB sent to the Analog Input PCB located in the table.

• Power Supply PCB There are five strain gauge inputs to this PCB:

• Front-back And Head-foot Sensor PCB’s • SFD up and down (from the SFD control handle)

• Interrupter PCB • SFD head and foot (also from the SFD control handle)

• Slide POT PCB • Longitudinal table top movement

• Transverse table top movement
• Table tilting.
There are two parts to each strain gauge that are
mechanically coupled to the respective control handle so
that when one gauge is stretched, the other is
compressed.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Theory of Operation, continued

Detailed Circuit Descriptions, continued specified in the table calibration procedure, an error code
is displayed on the table.
Strain Gauge PCB (PCB No.109-05-500),
continued The mechanical limits of the strain gauge are set so that
Each strain gauge is connected to one of five amplifiers the output signal does not exceed 8V when the control is
(op-amps); U1, U2, U4, U5 and U6 with their associated against the stop in one direction and does not go below
circuitry. 1V in the other direction.
Operation of these circuits is identical, except for the
SFD longitudinal power assist (U1). The only difference
in these circuits is that for the vertical power assist, the
feedback resistor (RIO) is 4.02 MEG instead of 2.0 MEG.
This gives this amplifier a gain of 800 while the gain of
the other amplifiers is 400.
The SFD longitudinal strain gauge is mechanically linked
to the handle on the SFD front panel. This strain gauge is
connected to U1 through J3 pins 4, 3, 7 and 8.
POT R1 is used to balance the voltage divider network
composed of Rl, R2, R3 and the two sections of the
strain gauge. When there is no force on the strain gauge
the voltage at TP1 is +5V DC. This voltage is normally
read on the front panel of the table during table
calibration. If this voltage is not between the values

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Theory of Operation, continued

Detailed Circuit Descriptions, continued button is pressed, it sets that bit in the associated latch
and illuminates the associated LED on the PCB.
Front Panel Display PCB
This board supports both input and output functions. The The CPU generates data that results in the generation of
lines coming into this board are the address lines (FPAO control data to the various SFD stepping motors. This
to FPA4) and the data lines (FPDO to FPD7). data, along with timing (clock) signals, is sent to the I/O
PCBs through programmable ports U10 and U9. Refer to
Front Panel LEDs the following table.
When the CPU illuminates an LED on the front panel,
such as CR15, an address is set. Address decoder U16
then selects a particular IC (in this case U1). The CPU
then sets up the correct code on the data bus and
illuminates the correct LED. When both the address and
data are set, the CPU sends a front panel strobe (/
FP_STB) to set the data into U1 which illuminates the
corresponding LED. Any of the LEDs or seven-segment
displays connected to U1 through U13 are illuminated
following this process.
Front Panel Switches
The control keys on the front panel are connected to the
Front Panel Display PCB through connectors P1, P2 and
P3. These input lines from the front panel switches are
connected to latches U20 to U23. When a front panel

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Theory of Operation, continued

Detailed Circuit Descriptions, continued JA2-13,14,15,20 and JB2-16 not used:
Central Processing Unit PCB (PCB No. 0109-05-
426-3), continued U9 Pin Name Function

Outputs from: PCBs through programmable ports U10 29 JC2-23 Front/Back (F/B) Cassette (Cass.)
and U9: Motor Interrupt (17)
28 JA2-23 Head/Foot (H/F) Cass. Motor
U10 Pin Name Function Interrupt (16)

29 JC2-9 Front/back (F/B) Motor interrupt (17) 27 JB2-22 Grid Motor Interrupt (15)
mask 26 JC2-20 F/B Cass. Home Interrupt (14)
28 JC2-10 Head/Foot (H/F) Motor Interrupt (16) 25 JA2-22 H/F Cass. Home Interrupt (13)
mask
24 JB2-27 Grid Home Interrupt (12)
27 JC2-11 Cone Motor Interrupt (15)
23 JB2-29 Cone Forward (Fwd.) Int. (11)
26 JC2-12 F/B Mask Home Interrupt (14)
22 JC2-29 Exposure In Progress (EIP) Int. (10)
25 JC2-13 H/F Mask Home Interrupt (13)
13 JB2-26 Cass. Motor CLK (TAO)
24 JA2-18 Cone Park Interrupt (12)
14 JA2-26 H/F Cass. Motor CLK (TBO)
JB2-17/19 Not used
JC2-22 Not Used
13 JB2-20 F/B Mask Motor CLK (Clock - TAO)
16 JA2-27 Grid Motor CLK (TDO)
14 JB2-21 Not used
16 JB2-23 Cone Motor CLK (TDO) JA2-24,25,28,20 and JB2-24,25,28 not used

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Theory of Operation, continued

Detailed Circuit Descriptions, continued
Upper I/O PCB (PCB No. 109-05-430-1) (Inputs to
SFD CPU)
The Upper I/O PCB is located at the rear of the SFD and
is stacked above the Lower I/O PCB. The primary
purpose of the Upper I/O PCB is to transfer data from
other system components and the SFD to the CPU. The
Upper I/O PCB circuitry is composed of four identical
input ports:

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Theory of Operation, continued

Detailed Circuit Descriptions, continued
Upper I/O PCB (PCB No. 109-05-430-1) (Inputs to
SFD CPU) continued
All system data, regardless of the source is applied to the
data bus. Therefore, the CPU must select the proper port
to insure that it receives data from the desired location.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Theory of Operation, continued

Detailed Circuit Descriptions, continued
Lower I/O PCB (PCB Part No. 109-05-428-1)
(Output from SFD CPU)
The Lower I/O PCB, like the Upper I/O PCB, acts as an
interface between the CPU and the outside world.
However, the Lower I/O PCB acts primarily as an output
device by transferring CPU data to the outside world.

WARNING Ensure the power to the generator,

table, and spotfilm device is turned off
before touching the lower I/O board.
There is a 300V DC charge on the
lower I/O board that is supplied from
the X-ray generator and is not turned
off with table or SFD power. Failure to
turn off power will result in injury.

The Lower I/O PCB circuitry contains ports, made up of

8-bit tri-state buffers and two 4-section opto-isolators.
The output circuits vary according to the data destination
and application. The CPU selects the correct port, which
ensures the data is routed to the proper destination.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Theory of Operation, continued

Detailed Circuit Descriptions, continued
Motor Control Interface PCB (PCB Part No. 109-
05-448)
The Motor Control Interface PCB acts as an I/O PCB. It
consists of ports for routing motor control data on the I/O
bus to one of the following:
• MC1
• MC2
• MC3
• MC4
• MC5
• MC6.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Theory of Operation, continued

Detailed Circuit Descriptions, continued A master clock (MCLK) signal from the CPU PCB also
controls motor speed.
Motor Control PCB’s (PCB Part No. 0109-05-446-
1,2) Data Bits U/D and RESET enter the circuit board at edge
The SFD uses six circuit boards to convert the CPU connector pins 4 and 5, respectively, and are optically
control data to drive signals for the following stepping coupled by U15 to U14-8 and -9. HI/LO is also optically
motors. coupled to the circuit board by U15 but it is sent to U13-
11. MCLK is inverted by Q7 before being applied through
• 2 for carriage movement high-speed optical coupler U16 and Q8 to U14-1 and
• 2 for the masks U13-1.
• 1 each for the grid and cone U14 is a dual, 4-bit up/down counter whose pins 15-18
pass the 16 states of the stepper motor electrical cycle to
The two carriage circuit boards have an additional chip U13 as indicated in the figure below. The second half of
(U13), which is a PAL. U14 generates an interrupt request (IRQ) every 16 clock
– PCB446-1 is programmed for SINE/COSINE used pulses. The counter is reset to zero when RESET is
on masks, cones and grids applied.
– PCB446-2 is programmed for half-step operation
and is used for cassette movement.
Each Motor Control PCB uses three data bits to:
• control motor current (HI/LO)
• determine the direction of rotation (U/D)
• start and stop the motor (RESET) Note: U13 and U14 are not interchangeable.
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Theory of Operation, continued

Detailed Circuit Descriptions, continued CR1, filtered by C2 and sent to P401-3 and -5 as
unregulated +18V DC. This voltage is used by the strain
Power Supply PCB (PCB Part No. 109-05-455-1)
gauges in the power assist handle.
The Power Supply PCB supplies the power for the SFD
circuitry. This PCB uses AC and D power from the table A third power input of unswitched 30V DC enters the
to: circuit board at P401-11 and -12. Resistor Rl serves as a
dropping resistor for power indicator LED1.
• unregulated 18V DC
Capacitor C1 filters the 30V DC before VR2 regulates it
• regulated 12V DC down to 24V DC.
• regulated 24V DC Capacitor C6 filters the output of VR2 while CR2 and
• regulated 5V DC CR3 provide reverse polarity protection.

The stepping motors make use of 36V DC; however, this Resistor R4 drops the regulated 24V DC for LED2, which
voltage is supplied directly from the table and passes provides a visual indication that the constant 24V DC
straight through the Power Supply without processing. power is present.

The 36V DC from the table enters the circuit board at This unswitched 24V DC is used by various circuits
P401-7 and P401-10 and is applied to three regulators; throughout the SFD.
VR3 and VR4. VR4 supplies regulated +12V DC to the
stepping motors and VR3 supplies regulated +5V DC to CAUTION Do not perform an operator test on
the SFD logic circuits. PS1 without a load across its input.
Damage to the circuit will result.
The table also supplies 115V AC to the Power Supply
PCB. It is applied through P401-9 and -15 to step-down
transformer T1. Transformer T1's output is rectified by

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Theory of Operation, continued

Detailed Circuit Descriptions, continued The actual interrupters affected depend on the size of
the cassette. The CPU then senses which interrupters
Front-back And Head-Foot Sensor PCB’s (PCB
0190-05-434-1 and PCB 0109-05-436-1) are affected and determines the cassette size.
These two functionally and physically similar PCBs are Interrupter PCB (PCB No. 0109-05-440)
mounted along the head-foot and front-back axis of the Four interrupter boards are used in the SFD; one each
SFD frame. These circuit boards, in conjunction with two for the front-back and head-foot masks, the grid and the
opaque tabs called flags, enable the SFD to detect the cone. Each of these circuit boards consists of an optical
presence of an X-ray film cassette and to determine its interrupter (Ul) a transistor (Ql) and associate circuitry.
size.
The flags for these sensors are mechanically mounted to
One of the flags is mounted on the rear of the cassette the associated component. The Interrupter PCBs, in
carriage and the other is mounted on the side of the conjunction with the flags, operate on the same principle
cassette carriage. as the head-foot and front-back sensor PCBs.They are
The circuit boards consist of optical interrupters and used to notify the CPU when the masks, cone or grid are
associated support components that are mounted in a in their home positions.
straight line along the length of each circuit board. The Slide POT PCB (Part No. 0109-05-506)
flags are mechanically pass through the optical
The manual collimator controls are located on the Slide
interrupters and interrupt the light path. Pot PCB mounted directly behind the SFD front panel.
When a cassette is inserted into the SFD, the cassette The only components on this circuit board are the two
carriage automatically accommodates and parks it. As a slide pots Rl and R2. Pot Rl controls the head-foot
result, the flags move to an orientation that depends on collimator blades and R2 controls the front-back
the size of the cassette, and interrupts the light path of collimator blades.
one of the optical interrupters on each board.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Theory of Operation, continued

SFD Operating Sequence d As the cassette carriage moves toward the rear
The following sequence is a description of the cassette of the SFD, a metal flag attached to the rear part
loading of the SFD from the time a cassette is inserted to of the carriage breaks the first hall-effect sensor.
the time that it is ready for an exposure. e The CPU then counts the number of stepper
motor steps until a flag attached to the front
1. To load a cassette, press the cassette button. The
cassette carriage moves to the load position. cassette clamp bar trips the second hall-effect
sensor.
Note The cassette carriage requires drive power to the
transverse carriage drive to hold it in the eject f The CPU then uses the number of steps between
the time the first sensor is tripped until the
position, so if a cassette is not loaded within a set
time, the carriage will return to the park posi- second is tripped to determine the cassette's
tion.When a cassette is present when the car- length.
riage returns to the park position after a time-out,
it will be registered as an exposed cassette.
2. Insert a cassette into the opening and press the
cassette button. The following occurs:
a. The cassette jaws close.
b. The transverse cassette carriage drive turns ON
and begins driving the carriage toward the rear.
c As the carriage moves toward the rear, the front
clamp bar moves against the front of the cassette
and is spring loaded against the cassette.
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Theory of Operation, continued

SFD Operating Sequence, continued
g When the carriage reaches its rear-most position,
it begins to move across from head to foot, and
as it moves, a flag attached to the head-end jaw
passes through the gap of the first longitudinal
position sensor.
h The carriage continues to move in the head to
foot direction and the CPU counts the number of
stepper motor steps until a flag on the foot-end
jaw passes through foot-end hall-effect sensor.
i The CPU can then determine the cassette width
from the number of stepper motor steps between
the first and second flags.
j The cassette now moves into position for the first
exposure.

TROUBLESHOOTING
Select a Troubleshooting topic:

MTX System Flowcharts 1725 Spotfilm Device HMS Inveter

System Overview Reviewing Fault History
Console Understanding SFD Error Codes
Exposure Start and Stop 1725 SFD Mask Simulation
MTX Flowcharts Checking Cassette Sizing
Main Power I/O LEDs
Console
Generator CPU
Chopper
Inverter
Filament Drive
mA and mAs
Tube Selection
AEC
Rotor Drive

Troubleshooting the HMS Inverter

Overview Inverter Failure Symptoms
The resistance across the four power transistors should Look for the following symptoms to determine if the
be similar. If they are not, perform a Driver Board inverter is failing.
Dynamic Test. If the inverter does not pass this test,
• High speed is commended.
then the inverter may have failed. These HMS inverter
boards can contribute to failures: • HS relays and start relay pulls.
• Driver board • No high speed inverter signal to tube stator.
• Power Relay board • At start/run delay, the starter goes into Standby mode.
• Safety and Tube Select board • At release of high speed start, the relays turn on and
off in sequence.
• Current Safety Mother board
• The storage capacitor is charged to 460V DC during
• Mircoprocessor board
the HS start cycle.
• Interface board
• CPU board

Troubleshooting the HMS Inverter, continued

Troubleshooting the Driver Board Light Bar Chart
Typically an inverter will short base to collector. If this 10 +5 Volts
occurs, replace the shorted transistor and the one
directly connected to it. 9 NC

Additionally, when the base and collector of the transistor 8 Auto Transformer
are shorted the resistor in the base circuit opens. If an
7 Inverter Drive (CB512)
inverter fails, perform a dynamic check of the Driver
board (CB-512). If the test fails, refer to Inverter 6 Inverter Drive (CB512)
Troubleshooting Table.
5 Run (K6-CB511) (K2 or K4-CB513)
Dynamic Test for the Driver Board
Do the following to perform the dynamic test: 4 High Speed (K5 and K6-CB513)

1. Remove fuse 1F3. This disables DC to the inverter. 3 Tube 3 (K3-CB511)

2. Insert the service jumper on Interlace board 515. 2 Tube 2 (K2-CB511)

3. Command high speed from the generator.

1 Tube 1 (K1-CB511)

Verify the 5 watt resistors on the driver board equally

hot. If in doubt, check the DC voltage across each
set of resistors. Make corrections as necessary.

Continued on next page

Troubleshooting the HMS Inverter, continued

Inverter Troubleshooting Table

Inverter Boards Symptom Action to take...

Driver Board The 10 watt resistor on the board are hot when Replace the associated driver transistor and/or the associated
in Standby mode. opto-isolator.
Power Relay The relays do not turn on and off sequentially 1. Turn power off, then on again.
Board when power is applied. 2. Ensure the relay turns on and its associated contacts change
position.
3. Replace the defective relay.
Safety and Tube The rotor interlock does not function correctly 1. Ensure relay K6 pulls in when in Run mode.
Select Board during normal anode rotation. 2. If it does not pull in, replace the sensing circuit.
Current Safety The LED on the mother board does not Place the service jumper on the Interface board in the service
Mother Board illuminate during the start cycle. position. This holds the start signal high.
Microprocessor LEDs are not illuminating when a signal is 1. Replace the board.
Board applied.
Use the Light Bar Chart to troubleshoot the bad signal.
Interface Board The starter does not respond to start/run 1. Verify the 24V unregulated and 5V regulated are okay.
commands.A
2. Using the Light Bar Chart, verify the correct opto-isolator
illuminates when using the J2 connector.
3. Check the CPU by verifying the 60 Hz signals from U10 are
present.

Continued on next page

Troubleshooting the HMS Inverter, continued

Inverter Troubleshooting Table, continued

Inverter Boards Symptom Action to take...

CPU Board • The OK LED on CB-515 does not flash at 1. Verify the 60 Hz signals are present.
1-second intervals.
2. If the 60 Hz signals are present, then check for the 1 Hz
signal. If this signal is not present the CPU is not running.
• The power up reset is low. 1. Cut the trace at W1 and disable the watchdog output.
2. If the rest is still low, repair the rest circuit U1b.
3. If the reset performs properly, check for 120 Hz pulsed from
U7 (CA2). This keeps C2 discharged via Q1.

MTX System Flowchart – Overview

Apply power to the system.

NOTE: On some systems manufactured after 1993,

Is the
See Main Power the transformer system is set up differently. Check
DS-T light on
No fuse F01 and F02. If either of these fuses is blown,
Troubleshooting. at the fuse
the Power Supply LEDs do not light on the ±15, 12
panel,?
and +5 volt supplies. The DS-T light may still be on,
indicating power to the system, unless F3 is blown.
Yes
Power up the
Generator at the
Console.

See Console Is there a

Troubleshooting. No display on the
console?
There is a problem with the
communications between the
Yes Console and Generator. This
sometimes occurs if the Date and
View the Error Log Set the proper Time are not current or valid.
Is the date and time at
and record the last
display flashing the Console
five errors . No Are the Date
at a 3-second and order a new
See Error Log No and Time
interval? battery (P/N
Troubleshooting. current/valid?
2277281) for
the Console
Yes Mother Board.
Yes Yes
Check the Generator
CPU card in the Perform the Communications
electronics cabinet for an Loop Back Test if cables and
active heartbeat LED. connectors checkout okay.

See Generator CPU Is it active

No
Troubleshooting. (flashing)?

MTX System Flowchart – Console

Are all Console

buttons working
properly?

Yes No

Make sure AEC is not

selected and press the Are any
PREP button. inhibits displayed
(Spot Film not
ready, CTM not
ready)?
See Rotor Drive Do you hear
No
Troubleshooting the ROTOR?
Yes No
Correct the
condition causing See Error Log
Yes Troubleshooting
the inhibit.

Does the
See Error Log system indicate a
No
Troubleshooting READY to make an
exposure?

Yes

Make a non-AEC exposure.

MTX System Flowchart – Exposure Start and Stop

Did the
exposure start
and stop
properly?

No Yes
Make another exposure
Is the using AEC mode.
See mA and mAs
No correct mAs
Troubleshooting
displayed?
Is AEC See AEC
No
okay? Troubleshooting
Yes

Scope the kV and

mA (PCB 52 TP-1) Yes
waveforms.
Try Fluor if you
have it.
See Chopper Is the
No
Troubleshooting kV okay?
Do you
See Rotor Drive
hear the No
Troubleshooting
Yes ROTOR?

Check all other

system peripherals. Yes

Is there
Is there a any indication of
Check the kV and
FLUORO No kV or mA on the No
mA waveforms.
image? external
meter?
Is the See Chopper
Yes No
Yes kV okay? Troubleshooting
Check the brightness
feedback from the I.I. at the If using Check all other
ADA board B25 and HV ABC, is it system peripherals. Yes
No
supply to the PMT. working
PCB #71 (Rack B far right). properly? Check all other
Run A/D Diagnostics. system peripherals.

Yes

Check all other

system peripherals.

MTX Main Power Flowchart

Check the 25V DC on PCB 30 at the fuse panel.

Check the DC Note: On some systems manufactured after

Yes Is it good? 1993, the transformer system is set up differently.
power supplies.
Are the DC Check fuses F01 and F02. If either of these fuses
power supplies is blown, the power supply LEDs do not light on
No good? the ±15,12 and +5volt supplies.

Check PCB 30 No Is fuse 3 No Yes

good?
+5V at Bridge CR4
Measure the 18V AC Measure the 24V
+12 & +15 at Bridge CR5
input to the DC supply DC power supply.
-12 & -15 at Bridge CR18.
Yes

Measure the 3-phase Measure for 110V

Check fuse F05, the filter, Is it good? Yes AC at TB3-3 and
input transformer. No Is it good?
and transformer (T2). 136V AC at TB3-1
Caution: Lethal
voltages present.
No
Yes
Reset the system
Is it good? Yes
Measure 33V AC and try again.
Check incoming power Repair or replace the
at the Load Center No Is it good? input to the 24V DC
DC power supply
supply (Bridge CR1)
No
Yes
Check K08 and
Repair or replace the fuses F1 and F2
Measure the 3-phase output Yes Is it good?
24V DC power supply.
matching transformer.
Caution: Lethal voltages
present.
No

Check transformer
Check transformer No Is it good? T1 and fuse F6.
and connections.

Yes
Check DC power supplies.
Proceed to step 2.

MTX Console Flowchart

Check fuse F10, the 60V Are the LEDs On

AC, and the 25V DC at No for the +5V DC
the console. and +47V DC
(CR21, B, C)

Yes
Check the
console cables No Are these okay?
and connections.

Is the watchdog LED Repair or replace

No
CR21 blinking? the console PCB.
Yes

Measure the +5V

supply at TP10. Yes

If the display is working

Does it blink On for 1
properly, run the console
second and then Off for Yes
Check Regulator diagnostics. Otherwise,
2 seconds?
U1 and Rectifier No Is it okay? check the display drivers.
CR1.

Yes No

Check the RAM and EPROMS:

Repair or replace 1 blink - Problem with U18 (RAM)
the console PCB. 2 blinks - Problem with U04 (RAM)
3 blinks - Problem with U8 (EPROM)
4 blinks - Problem with U10 (EPROM)

MTX Generator CPU Flowchart

Look at CR2A (+5V LED) on
the Generator CPU
(Rack A in tall cabinet).

Check fuse F05 and the

+5V DC supply PCB (Rack No Is it on?
A second from the left).

Yes

Is the
1 blink: Problem with U3 (RAM) CPU watchdog
3 blinks: Problem with U20 (EPROM) Check PROMs
No LED (bottom LED)
4 blinks: Problem with U14 (EPROM) and EPROMs.
flashing each
5 blinks: Problem with U6 (EPROM) second?
7 blinks: The HEX switch (S1) is in an
invalid position. Otherwise,
replace the CPU PCB. Yes

Is the
Is the AEC
Repair or replace interrupt LED Is the 7.5 Repair or replace
Yes No No STOP interrupt No
the CPU PCB. (second from the LED on? the CPU PCB.
LED on?
bottom) on?

Yes
Yes

Is the B2
Repair or replace input ACTIVE Using a
No scope to measure,
the EPC PCB. on the EPC Repair or replace
PCB? is the B4 input on No
the EPC PCB.
the EPC PCB
ACTIVE?
Yes
Yes
Repair or replace
See AEC
the IVC PCB.
Troubleshooting.

MTX Chopper Flowchart

Bus Voltage

Line Voltage Measure the Bus

Voltage at the CHC
Measure the Line PCB (TP7). 10V=500V
Voltage at the CHC
PCB (TP8). 10V=500V
Is the bus See Inverter
Yes
voltage good? Troubleshooting.
Remove jumper J1 on the
Is the line
Yes IVC PCB and continue to
voltage good?
the Bus Voltage.
No This voltage varies with the
Measure the voltage different techniques. At
No 100kV, 100mA you should
across C2 on the
Inverter Chassis. see approximately 240
Measure the voltage This voltage should be VDC or 4.8 - 5.0 at TP7.
across C01 on the Caution
approximately 300 VDC in Low
Inverter Chassis. Line and 540 VDC in High Line.
Caution Is the voltage Check U1 on the CHC PCB Check Q7, Q8,
okay? Yes
and the Voltage Divider. L1,L2, C1 and C2 in
Is the voltage Check U1 on the CHC PCB the Chopper Circuit.
Yes
okay? and the voltage divider.
No Yes

Measure the During expose:

No Start: TP5, C1, 30-50uS Scope the SCR
nominal Bus
Gate pulses at Are the Gate
voltage at CHC-B5. Stop: TP6, C3, 15-28uS
Check the Line Contactors TP2A and TP2B Pulses okay?
and CB01. Check the on IPU2 PCB.
Is the
contact on CB01. Scope the Start and
reference
voltage Yes Stop pulses on the Yes
CHC PCB. No
okay?
Are the
Yes Repair or replace the contacts. Is
contacts okay? Do you Repair or
No Do you have the SCR replace the
have +24V at
Yes Yes Gate Enable
the pulses? IPU2 PCB A7 IPU2 PCB.
Check B1 on the ADA measurement
No and A9?
PCB and run the D/A okay?
Diagnostics.
See Main Power No
Troubleshooting. No No
Repair or replace Check for the +24V supply Check out B15
the CHC PCB. through the CHC PCB. and Relay K1.

MTX Inverter Flowchart

Measure the kVp at
TP1 (1V=20kV) on PCB
51 (measuring PCB).

Measure the kV output form

Do you the H.T. Transformer using a
No
have kV? GE Divider or Kiethley Non-
Invasive divider.

Are
Yes Check for pulses Scope B1 (Inverter Are the
Is there kV there pulses Repair or replace
No at C1 and C3 on No Start) and 15 (75kHz) on signals No
present? measuring 12.5 the CHC PCB.
Measure the kV the IVC PCB. the IVC PCB. okay?
- 20uS?
reference at the IVC
PCB-B5 (1V=20kV).
Yes Yes Yes
Is the Repair or replace Measure TP4 on the
reference Check the Gate Enable at
PCB 51. IVC PCB (make sure
voltage TP3 on the IPU1 PCB.
J1 is still removed).
okay?
Is it low
Check out IPU1-B15. No during Do you
No Yes Repair or replace
exposure? have 9.5V after No
the IVC PCB.
Soft Start?
Check B5 on the Place the jumper
ADA PCB. Run J1 back onto the Yes
the D/A Diagnostic IVC PCB and Yes
Measure the Gate
if necessary. proceed to Step 2. Place jumper J1 back onto the
Pulses on IPU1 PCB
TP2A and TP2B. IVC PCB and measure the kV
reference voltage at B5 on the
IVC PCB (1V=20kV).
Repair or replace Are they
No
IPU1 PCB. okay?
Is the Check B5 on the ADA
reference No PCB. Run the D/A
Yes okay? Diagnostic if necessary.

Check Q1 through Q4, CR1

through CR4, and C4. Suspect Yes
a problem with the H.T.
Transformer if these are okay. Repair or replace the IVC PCB.

MTX Inverter Flowchart, continued

Measure the kVp at Measure the pulses at
TP1 (1V=20kV) on PCB C1 and C3 with the
51 (measuring PCB). oscilloscope on the
IVC PCB.

Is the kV Are the Check Q1 through Q4, CR1

Yes
correct? pulses between through Cr4, and C4. Suspect
Yes
12.5 and problem with the H.T.
20uS? Transformer if these are okay.
No

No
Measure the kV output from
the H.T. Transformer using
a GE Divider or Kiethley Repair or replace
Non-Invasive divider. the IVC PCB.

Measure the voltage at the H.T.

Is the kV
No Transformer Primary (P1 and P2
correct?
Caution) with an oscilloscope.

Yes Is the
input waveform No
Repair or replace okay?
PCB 51.

Yes

Replace the High

Tension Transformer.

MTX Filament Drive Flowchart

Check the
Filament Power
Supply (PCB7
±75V DC).

Check for 110V AC to

Are LEDs and CR1
the bridge rectifier NO
and 7CR2 on?
7CR8 through 7CR14.

Repair or
replace NO Is it okay?
PCB7. YES

NO Is LED Repair or
YES
7CR12 on? replace PCB7.
Check
Transformer T1,
Fuse F7, and K08 NO
relay.
Check the DC
CR22B +24V voltages to circuit
CR22C +75V boards 5 and 6.
CR23A -75V
CR23B -15V
CR23C +15V Check the
Are the
NO appropriate power
supplies okay?
supply.

YES

Is the Test Switch Turn the test

YES
On (indicated by switch off.
CR2C)

Is the Filament
Overcurrent LED NO A
On (CR1A)?

YES

Turn the
Generator off, then
back on.

MTX Filament Drive Flowchart, continued

Hold the PREP
A
button down.

Is the Prep
Indicator Check the
NO PREP Relay
On?(PCB5 Measure the NOMINAL
or 6 CR1B) 1K312 on Filament Current on the
PCB1. Is the output of the ADA PCB (B3
Indicator On? NO
ribbon cable) during prep.
YES 1v = 1a
(3.6V in standby)
YES Run the
1v = 1a Filament
Is the Filament Measure the Filament Is the nominal
(3.6V in standby) NO Calibration
Current display Try the other Limit input at PCB 5 or voltage okay?
from the
showing the correct filament and it it's 6 input z4.
YES console.
current? (LED bar correct, reset and
graph on edge of try again.
PCB5 or 6) YES
Is the voltage YES
correct?
Repair or replace
PCB 5 or 6.
NO NO
1v = 1a
Measure the output of the ADA (3.6V in standby)
Does the Check the PCB (B10 ribbon cable) and run
indicator show Filament at the the D/A Diagnostic.
NO
any filament Tube.
current?

YES

Check the
Filament Limit
indicator (CR2B)
on PCB5 or 6.

MTX mA and mAs Flowchart

Measure the Filament
Limit input at PCB 5
or 6 input z4.
1V = 1A
(3.6V in standby)
Check the
Filament Limit Measure the output
Is the voltage settings at the of the ADA PCB
NO Are the settings
correct? console in the YES (B10 ribbon cable)
correct?
Filament and run the D/A
Calibration Menu. Diagnostics.

Yes NO

Measure the actual mA Reset the

feedback on PCB51 Filament Limits
(TP2).
RAD: 1V = 100mA
FLUORO: 1V = 1mA
Run the mA Feedback
Diagnostics at the Generator
CPU (not the console) or Is the mA
YES
scope the output of the EPC okay?
PCB (B21) mA impulses.
100mA = 10kHz

Are the NO
Repair or
replace the EPC NO impulses
PCB. good? Measure the mA
at the fuse panel
test points.
YES

Scope the output Possible problem wit

Is the mA
of the EPC PCB NO the High Tension
okay?
(B22) mAs Transformer.
impulses.
100 pulses/mAs
YES
Repair or Are the
replace the EPC NO impulses Repair or replace
PCB. good? PCB 51.

YES

Run the Input Ports

Diagnostics at the
Generator CPU (not
the console) for the
EPC PCB.

MTX Tube Selection Flowchart

YES Is the 24V DC NO
okay?

Make sure the

Measure the output of
Technique
the +24V DC supply.
configuration is set
(Located on the top of
correctly at the
RACK A, Back, right.)
console.

Enter the Is the supply Repair or replace the

NO Is it correct? NO
correct Tube. good? +24V DC supply.

YES YES

Make sure the tube select relay (for 2K301 = Tube 1 Measure pins 8 and 9
the proper tube) is energizing on the 2K302 = Tube 2 on Plug 92 (top of HT
Relay PCBs. If needed, measure 3K303 = Tube 3 Transformer, Tube
the signals from the OUT PCB (C5, (PCB 3 may not be selector board) for a left
C6, and C13). Run the Output installed.) or right turn command. Measure the signals from
Ports Diagnostic from the the OUT PCB (C15 and
Generator CPU (not the console). If C16) for the commands.
necessary, replace the OUT PCB. Is there a turn Run the Output Ports
NO
command? Diagnostic from the
Generator CPU (not the
console). If necessary,
replace the OUT PCB.
YES

Check the switches

Is the motor (S1, S2 and S3) and
YES
turning? LED CR7.

Are the
Replace the
NO switches NO
faulty switch.
good?

Do YES
Check Q1, Q2,
LEDs CR1 and CR2
and the Diodes on NO
on the Tube Selector Pin B17 = Tube 1
the Circuit Board. Measure the inputs on the
Board light? Pin B18 = Tube 2
IN2 PCB. If necessary, run
the Input Ports Diagnostic Pin B19 = Tube 3
from the Generator CPU
YES (not the console).

Check relays 90K1,

90K2 and the Motor.

MTX AEC Flowchart

Measure the AEC reference
signal on the AEC PCB Note: To display the values at the
TP11 and compare it to the console, you must select Pickup Data
calibrated value displayed at Edit or AEC Calibration at the console.
the console.

Scope the signal at TP4 on

the AEC PCB. This is the
Repair or replace Is the reference
NO YES negative ramp signal from
the AEC PCB. signal good?
the Pickup PCB in the Bucky
or from the Ion Chamber.
Monitor TP2 and TP3 with
a dual channel scope and
verify that TP3 shows a
Is the negative
NO YES positive stop pulse when
ramp present?
TP2 (positive ramp) peaks
out at the voltage
measured on TP11.
Measure the High
Voltage at the spade
lugs on the edge of Is this Repair or
PCB71 (AEC power functioning NO replace the
supply, rack B, far right). properly? AEC PCB.

Measure the
Is the supply YES
voltage on PCB71 NO
okay?
TP2 (35V DC).
AEC PCB Negative ramp signals Verify a negative
B25 = Pickup 1 pulse on TP5
Measure the 25Vac on the B23 = Pickup 2 (24Vdc to 0V).
input of PCB71 (AEC HV) YES B21 = Pickup 3
Is the voltage B19 = Pickup 4
between pins 71Ab24 and NO
present? Measure the B5 = ABC signal routed back to theADA
71Ab26, or at the bridge Repair or
inputs at the AEC Is the pulse
rectifier CR35. PCB from B4 through K6 contacts. NO replace the
PCB for the present?
B4 = SFC AEC PCB.
negative ramp
Check fuse F9 YES
Is the 25V AC signal.
or Transformer NO Possible problem
present? with the PMT, Ion YES
T1. Repair or replace
PCB 71. Chamber or the
Is the signal
NO Pickup PCB. Make
present?
sure that the fields Is the
YES are selected pulse at the Replace the
properly. YES
input of the EPC AEC PCB.
PCB (B4)?
Repair or YES
replace PCB 71.

Check the relays NO

on the AEC PCB.

Reseat the EPC PCB

and the AEC PCB
and check continuity.

MTX Rotor Drive Flowchart

START

Is the
Rotor Start Relay
Is an External
YES (1K320, PCB1) energized NO A
Starter used?
when the PREP button
is pressed?

Proceed to Step 3. YES

Is High Speed
NO
selected?

K25 contacts have been

YES
known to fail, causing
intermittent Error 29.
Verify that Cleveland
Is Relay K25 Is Relay 4K324
Starter is programmed
YES pulled in (top of YES and/or 4K325 NO
in Tube Programming
Rack B)? energized?
at the console.
Measure the signals from the
Measure P87-58 for OUT PCB (C17 and C18) for
a Rotor Start signal NO the commands. Run the
Is it
(Ref. Chassis 0V YES Output Ports Diagnostic from
programmed?
TP). Check Fuse F1 the Generator CPU (not the
Check the contacts and measure console). If necessary,
Is it low on Relays 1K320 (4 across the coil of replace the OUT PCB.
NO
(0V dc)? and 5) and K25 (43 K25 for 132V AC. NO
and 44).
Measure the voltage Select Cleveland
Are these Starter and try again.
NO between TB2-11 and
YES okay?
TB2-15 (132V AC).
Troubleshoot the Check the
High Speed Starter YES Is it okay? NO contacts on Relay
Is 4K26
NO and check the wiring K08 (3 and 4).
energized?
between it and the
Replace Relay K25.
Generator.
YES
YES
Check the contacts on
Possible bad contacts on 4K26 causing Error 4K324 and 4K325 and
29 (known problem). Solder a jumper wire from make sure Cleveland
4K26 pins 2 to 4 and 4K26 pins 3 to 5 (spare Starter is programmed at
contacts) and see if the problem is still there. If the console.
it is, and you can measure a low signal at the
B2 input of the IN2 PCB, replace the IN2 PCB.

MTX Rotor Drive Flowchart, continued Step 3

Is the A Is OUT PCB pin B5 Repair or

Rotor Start Relay
low (rotor start YES replace Relay
(1K320, PCB1)
NO command to 1K320)? PCB1.
energized when the
PREP button
is pressed?

NO
YES

Scope the AC Is 1K12 (prep relay)

voltage between TP1 or 1K18 (fluoro relay) Run the Output
YES
and TP2 on the pulling in? Diagnostics.
Internal Rotor Drive
Circuit during prep.

Check the OUT 1 NO

Is 220V AC NO
present? PCB pin 89.
Scope IN1-B1 (1K12
Run the pulled in with prep),
Is it active IN1-B2 (1K12 pulled in
YES NO diagnostics on the
with PREP? from SFD) and EPC-B9
OUT 1 PCB.
Check the Generator settings (fluoro footswitch).
at the console to make sure
Is K21 YES
Internal Starter is selected. NO Check exposure
pulling in? Is one of
If the setting is okay, check the Measure the voltage (AC) YES switches, wiring and
wiring to the Tube and K21. them low?
between P21 pin 2 to P21 connections.
pin 3 70Vac (RUN) and
YES P21 pin 1 to P21 pin3
220Vac (START). NO
Measure the points Check fuses F07 (start) and F04
(run) and T01 Transformer. T01 Measure the
for the RUN voltage. Is the
primary is supplied through fuses +24 V DC
P21 pin 2 to P21 pin voltage NO
F02 and F01 and K01 supplies supply to PCB1. Run diagnostics. Input
3 70Vac (RUN) present?
the voltage from the secondary of diagnostics (RAD: IN1 PCB).
T01 to F07 and F04. Is the
Scope the output (FLUORO: EPC PCB). If the
YES voltage YES
on the OUT PCB Do you have diagnostics check out okay, repair
NO good?
pin B10 (rotor run RUN voltage? or replace PCB1. Otherwise,
Check the Solid State Relays
command). replace the bad board.
Q1 (start) and Q2 (run).
NO
Run the Does it
Output NO change YES Repair or replace
Diagnostics. during run? the +24V DC
Check the Generator settings supply.
at the console to make sure
Is K22
Check fuses F07 YES NO Internal Starter is selected.
pulling in?
(start) and F04 If the setting is okay, check the
(run) and T01 Check the rotor wiring to the Tube and K21.
Transformer. T01 AC supply.
primary is YES
Is the
supplied through Rotor AC Supply
NO voltage Scope the inputs to the IN1
fuses F02 and P21 pin 2 to P21 pin 3 70 Vac (RUN)
present? PCB pin B9 (Rotor start current
F01 and K01 P21 pin 1 to P21 pin 3 220Vac (START)
supplies the relay K21 contacts) and IN1
voltage from the YES PCB pin B10 (Rotor run current
secondary of T01 Check solid State relay K22 contacts). If the
to F07 and F04. Relay Q2 (run). signals are present, run the
Input Diagnostics.

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting

The 1725 Spotfilm Device provides a substantial amount
of information for troubleshooting. This section discusses
the following topics:
Reviewing Fault History
Understanding SFD Errors
Using a Cassette during a Fluoro Exposure
Using a Mask Simulation
Checking Cassette Sizing
Using I/O LEDs

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Reviewing Fault History 4. Press the [FAULT] button to display the FAULT
The SFD has a non-volatile memory (EEPROM) portion HISTORY MENU.
set apart for retaining faults. The following procedure The Fault History Menu displays the error codes for
explains how to access and read the SFD fault history for the last four faults that have occurred along with the
troubleshooting purposes. exposure count (Ec) when the fault occurred and, for
This procedure is performed using the diagnostic E45 errors, status information is also displayed.
display panel located inside the SFD. This panel not • CUR is the number of exposures since the last
only functions as a display but also functions as a touch time that the faults were cleared.
panel for entering various functions.
• LST CLR is the total exposure count at the last
Note The menus shown in this section are typical and time that the faults were cleared.
may differ from your display.
5. To display additional faults, press the [U] or [D]
1. Remove the top cover of the SFD to gain access to buttons. Pressing [ESC] returns the display to
the Diagnostic Display Panel. normal operation.
2. Apply power to the SFD.
3. Press [CAL] to select the Super User Menu.

CAUTION The EEPROM initialization consists of

factory calibration values. Do not
select the EEPROM initialization menu
or change its contents unless directed
to do so by service engineering. Any
change to the values in this menu will
erase the factory calibration.

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Reviewing Fault History, continued No --- Number in Exposure sequence
6. To obtain additional information on a particular fault, Sz --- Cassette size in cm
highlight the fault and press the button just to the left
Trace Token State Time - This information is for
of the CLEAR button.
factory use only.
The FAILURES EXPOSURE TRACE MENU is
7. Press the [NEXT] button to display the FAILURES
displayed.
EXCEPTION INFORMATIOI\ MENU.
The following items are displayed in the Failures
This screen displays additional information for faults
Exposure Trace Menu:
E20 to E39.
Sq --- The number of the fault in the fault sequence
8. From the FAILURES EXCEPTION INFORMATION
shown
MENU press one of the following buttons to access
EC --- The exposure count from the last clear to the the desired screen.
fault
• Press [NEXT] from the FAILURES EXCEPTION
Fo --- Format button INFORMATION MENU to return to the Trace
menu.
The format buttons are numbered as follows:
• Press [RETURN] to return to the FAULT
1:1 - 1 4:1 - 5 HISTORY MENU.
2:1 V - 2 Skip - 6 • Press [ESC] returns the display to the SUPER
2:1 H - 3 6:1 - 7 USER MENU.
3:1 V - 4 9:1 - 8

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Reviewing Fault History, continued
9. To clear the fault history from the FAULT HISTORY
MENU press the [CLEAR] button to display the
FAILURE CLEAR MENU.
• To clear the fault history, press [YES] .
The message "HISTORY OF FAILURES ERASED"
is displayed and the Last Clear (LST CLR) count is
updated to the current exposure count.
• To return to the Fault History Menu without
clearing the fault history, press [NO] or
[RETURN].
• To return to the User Menu without clearing
the fault history, press [ESC].

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Understanding SFD Error Codes
The spotfim device has two locations that display error
codes. The first display is found on the front panel of the
SFD. The second, which provides more indepth
information is located on the diagnostic display panel.
Once an error is cleared, press the [RESET] button on
the back of the front panel to continue operation.
To review error codes displayed on the front panel, click
here.
To review error codes displayed on the diagnostic
display panel, click here.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Understanding SFD Error Codes, continued Error Code Definition
Front Panel Error Codes E27 Privilege Violation Exception
The following table describes SFD error codes displayed
E28 Trace Exception
on the front panel.
E29 Line 1010 Exception
Note Verify if an additional error is displayed on the
diagnostic display panel. These errors will pro- E30 Line 1111 Exception
vide more specific information about the type of E31 Reserved 1 Exception
failure that has occurred.
E32 Reserved 2 Exception
Note Errors E20 through E35 include exception stack E33 Reserved 3 Exception (68010 format error)
errors. You need to refer to the diagnostic display
panel for additional information. E34 Municipalized Vector Exception
E35 Spurious Interrupt Exception or
Error Code Definition BERR during interrupt

E20 Default Exception E40 Failure of carriage mechanism (hardware/

software)
E21 Bus Error Exception
E41 Failure of Collimator /Mask Mechanism
E22 Address Error Exception (hardware/ software)
E23 Illegal Instruction Exception E42 Failure of Collimator/Mask mechanism
(hardware/ software)
E24 Zero Divide Exception
E44 SFD parked while exposing (hardware)
E25 Check Instruction Exception
E45 General Mechanism Failure
E26 Trap Vector Exception

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Understanding SFD Error Codes, continued
Front Panel Error Codes, continued

Error Code Definition

E61 General failure, EIP too long (hardware)
E62 Generator failure. Prep Ready time-out
(hardware)
E70 Collimator ready failed (hardware)
E80 Factory Calibration incomplete (power up -
calibration)
E81 Invalid cassette size (calibration - user/
hardware/ calibration)
E82 EEPROM initialization error (calibration -
hardware/ software)
E83 Task synchronization error (calibration -
software)
E85 Collimator/Masks busy (calibration -
hardware/ software)

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Understanding SFD Error Codes, continued Error
Definition
Diagnostic Display Panel Error Codes Code
System faults are displayed on the diagnostic display 11 Motor Command Error
panel. An error occurred when a command was issued to a
motor.
Note The diagnostic panel codes are "FF" codes
unless the front panel code is E20 through E35. This error most often indicates that the SFD
software and the mechanism are not synchronized.
These errors are handled differently. To under-
stand these errors, click here. 12 Motor Position Error
A motor command was issued that cannot be
Error executed from its present position. This error most
Definition often indicates that the SFD software and the
Code
mechanism are not synchronized.
FF Last request not completed
[FF]
Blown fuse on the motor controller board.
Faulty Motor Controller Board Motor Controller
Board disconnected or not making good contact.
0 The last request was successful
2 Device Busy
10 Device Failed
A motor unable to, respond to a move command.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Understanding SFD Error Codes, continued Error
Definition
Diagnostic Display Panel Error Codes, continued Code
31 Carriage Time-out Error
Error Carriage mechanism software timed out.
Definition
Code
32 Carriage No-Frame Error
13 Motor Sensor. Carriage was requested to go to next frame when
Error Indicates that the motor home sensor may no additional frames were available.
have failed.
33 Carriage Is Home Error
14 Motor Request Error. Cassette carriage was already at its home position
Motor Manager does not understand this request. when a request to go home was received.
15 Motor is Home Error 34 Carriage Unreferenced Error
The selected motor has received a command to go The positional reference of the cassette carriage
to its home position when it is already home. has been lost.
16 Motor Did Not Respond Time-out Error 35 Invalid Carriage Command Error
Software did not respond to a request to move a The carriage has received a command that it does
motor within the set time. not understand.
17 A motor controller was not on line to accept a 36 Invalid Carriage Position Error
request for motor movement. Request cannot be processed from the current
18 A motor controller module has detected a motor carriage position.
system failure and cannot recover.
30 Cassette jammed

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Understanding SFD Error Codes, continued Error
Definition
Diagnostic Display Panel Error Codes, continued Code
55 Request to reposition head/foot masks not
Error completed in the allotted time
Definition
Code 56 Request to reposition front/back masks not
completed in the allotted time.
37 Invalid cassette size for this operation
57 Request to move masks not completed in the
38 Carriage Head/Foot Motor Failure
allotted time
39 Carriage Front/Back Motor Failure Error
58 AEC Fields Failure Error
3A Carriage Status Failure Error
70 Cone motor failed
3B Carriage Motor(s) Off-Line
72 Cone manager task can not be created
50 Invalid Collimator/Mask/AEC Command
73 Cone manager busy
51 Collimator Failure Error
74 Invalid request issued to cone manager
The COLLIMATOR READY (LO true) was off for
more than one second. 80 Invalid request issued to grid manager
Collimator shutter blades mechanically binding. 81 Grid Motor Failure Error
52 Collimator size update requested but not completed
in the allotted time.
Collimator shutter blades mechanically binding.
53 Collimator Ready signal time-out
54 Request to move masks not completed successfully
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Understanding SFD Error Codes, continued
Diagnostic Display Error Codes when Front Error
Definition Description
Panel Error Codes are E20 to E35 Code
When error codes E20 through E35 are displayed on the PC Program Counter Shows the value of the program
front panel, the diagnostic display panel displays the counter at the time of the
content of the exception stack. These codes indicate exception
faults with the CPU board due to hardware problems or a SR Status Register Shows the value of the status
power supply failure. register at the time of the
exception
When the Front Panel Display indicates E21 and E22,
IR Instruction Shows the first two bytes of the
these are long stack frame errors. When codes E20 and Register last instruction that was retrieved
E23 through E35 are displayed, these are short stack at the time of the exception
frame errros.
AR Access Address Indicates the memory address at
the time of the exception

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Understanding SFD Error Codes, continued
Diagnostic Display Error Codes when Front
Panel Error Codes are E20 to E35, continued

Error
Definition Description
Code

FR Processor State Bits 0, 1 and 2 indicate the memory

reference classification as follows:
– 001 User data
– 010 User Program
– 101 Supervisor Data
– 110 Supervisor Program
Bit three indicates the type of
memory access as follows:
– 0 - Instruction Fetch
– 1 - other
Bit four indicates the type of bus
cycle as follows:
– 0 - Write
– 1 - Read

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Making A Fluoro Exposure with a Cassette In 5. Press the [DEFLT] to display the Default menu.
the Field 6. Use the up (U) or down (D) keys to highlight
The following procedure describes making a fluoro selection 4, PREP.
exposure with an SFD cassette in the field for
troubleshooting purposes. 7. Press the [SELCT] key until the word LATCHED is
displayed.
1. Remove the SFD rear cover to gain access to the
diagnostic service panel. 8. Press the [SAVE] button. The SFD will emit 3 beeps.

2. Press the [CAL] button to display the Super User CAUTION The prep selection remains LATCHED
Menu. until it is unlatched. Ensure Prep is
set to Unlatched before the customer
CAUTION The EEPROM initialization consists of operates the equipment. Failure to do
factory calibration values. Do Not this will result in unnecessary
select the EEPROM initialization menu radiation exposure.
or change its contents unless directed
to do so by service engineering. Any 9. Press [RETURN] twice to return the Super User
change to the values in this menu will Menu to the display.
erase the factory calibration.
10. Press the [SIM] button to display the Simulation and
3. Use up (U) or down (D) keys to highlight selection 3, Test Menu.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION. 11. Use the up (U) or down (D) keys to highlight
4. With SYSTEM CONFIGURATION highlighted press selection 1, GENERATOR SIMULATOR MODE.
the [SELCT] key to display the System Configuration
Menu.
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Making A Fluoro Exposure with a Cassette In
the Field, continued
12. With the GENERATOR SIMULATOR MODE
highlighted press the [SELCT] key until SFD is
displayed.
NoteThe generator simulator mode will be set to
NONE after the SFD is reset or power is inter-
rupted.
13. Press [RETURN] two times.
14. To take a fluoro exposure with the SFD in the field,
press [PREP] on the SFD. There then is 20 seconds
during which a fluoro exposure may be initiated from
the exposure button on the X-ray generator.
To return to normal operation, repeat the above
procedure beginning at step 2 and set PREP to
UNLATCHED at step 7 and set the Generator Simulation
Mode to NONE at step 12.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

1725 SFD Mask Simulation 6. Use down (D) key to highlight selection 4,
INSTALLATION CALIBRATION.
The procedure places the SFD in the simulation mode
and allows the masks to be moved to a desired opening. 7. With INSTALLATION CALIBRATION highlighted
press the [SELCT] key to display the NSTALLATION
This procedure is performed using the diagnostic
CALIBRATION MENU.
display panel, which is located inside the SFD. This
panel displays information and allows you enter other 8. Highlight option 3, INHIBIT EXPOSURE TEST.
functions using the touch panel.
9. With INHIBIT EXPOSURE TEST highlighted press
1. Set the II magnification to MAG 2. the [SELCT] button.
2. Set the system for the manual brightness mode. 10. Press the [TEST] button to display the
COLLIMATOR/MASK/AEC TEST MENU.
3. Select 1:1 format on the SFD.
11. Highlight option 3, MASK TEST and press [SELCT]
4. Apply power to the SFD.
to display the MASK TEST MENU.
5. Press the [CAL] button to Select the Super User
12. The default settings on the MASK TEXT MENU
Menu
should be 4.000 for both the F/B and the H/F.
CAUTION The EEPROM initialization consists of To change the settings, highlight to the desired mask
factory calibration values. Do not (F/B or H/F) and open or close them as required
select the EEPROM initialization menu using the OPEN or CLOSE buttons.
or change its contents unless directed
Note The F/B mask range is from 1.000 to 14.25 and
to do so by service engineering. Any
the H/F mask range is 3.000 to 13.75.
change to the values in this menu will
erase the factory calibration.
Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

1725 SFD Mask Simulation, continued
13. When both masks are set, press [RETURN] to
display the COLLIMATOR/MASK/ AEC TEST
MENU.
14. With the COLLIMATOR/MASK/ AEC TEST MENU
displayed. The Selection 3, MASK TEST, should be
highlighted and its status should be ON with all of the
other selections OFF.
15. Press RETURN to return to the normal operating
display to the panel with the words "Mask Test"
displayed under the word FORMAT.
Note Loading a cassette while the SFD is in the mask
test mode will automatically cause a 1:1 format to
be selected. Use the [SPLITS] button on the
diagnostic panel to select the desired format.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Checking Cassette Sizing (Trace Function) 1. Load a cassette.
This procedure is useful for checking the SFD cassette 2. Look at the diagnostic display panel. If there is no
size calibration.This procedure is used when the main cassette size displayed in the SFD field, the SFD has
front panel display fails to show a F/B or H/F size and not sensed a cassette size within the ranges it has
does not display a format when a cassette is loaded. been calibrated for.
This may indicate that the cassette size is different from
3. To display the actual sensed cassette overall outside
the factory calibration or that the SFD is out of calibration
or is malfunctioning. dimensions, press the [TRACE] button.

This procedure is also useful for determining if the The outside (raw) cassette dimensions (in inches) is
cassette carriage is operating properly and if the displayed. Where YY.YYY is the F/B dimension and
11.111 is the H/F dimension. Pressing the TRACE
cassette size-sensing flags are adjusted and operating
properly. button alternately turns the size display ON and
OFF.
The SFD sizes are factory set and listed below. If the
raw cassette size displayed does not fall within the
values listed, the cassette size must be reset
according to the Carriage Position Calibration.
If the cassette size displayed varies more than about
+/-1/4" when the same cassette is reloaded, it may
be that the cassette carriage is not sliding into the
hook properly. This may be fixed by applying silicone
spray to the cassette tracks.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

Checking Cassette Sizing (Trace Function),
continued

Cassette
Outside Dimensions Film Size (inches)
Size H/F x
(±0.3 inches) H/F x F/B H/F x F/B
F/B
14 x 14 in 15.062 x 15.062 13.940 X 13.940
14 x 11 in. 15.062 x 12.125 13.940 x 10.800
35 x 30 cm. 15.080 x 12.890 13.950 x 11.730
30 x 24 cm. 12.900 x 10.600 11.720 x 9.350
12 x 10 in. 12.900 x 11.040 11.720 x 9.800
9.5 x 9.5 in. 10.600 x 10.600 9.350 x 9.350

Note If the cassette is unloaded and reloaded, the

TRACE display must be turned OFF and back
ON again by pressing the [TRACE] button twice
to update the size displayed to the current value.

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

I/O LEDs LA # Lit State Indicator
The Upper and Lower I/O PCB ports are equipped with
LA1-7 RL
LEDs that continuously monitor the status of data
signals. LA1-8 Not Used

The LEDs are mounted on the circuit boards next to their LA2-1 Park Back
associated ports. Each individual LED illuminates, LA2-2 Comp Lock Req
indicating its associated data bit is in its active state.
LA2-3 Trans Lock Req
When not lit the signal or data is inactive.
LA2-4 Center Req
The LEDs and the signal they monitor on the Lower I/O
PCB LEDs and Upper I/O PCB are listed in tables that LA2-5 Spare 2
follow. LA2-6 Spare 1
Lower I/O PCB LEDs (SFD Outputs) LA2-7 Long Lock Req
LA2-8 Horiz Lock Req
LA # Lit State Indicator
LA1-1 Not Used
LA1-2 Not Used
LA1-3 Not Used
LA1-4 FL (Logic)
LA1-5 Not Used
LA1-6 Room Lights

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

I/O LEDs, continued LA # Lit State Indicator
Lower I/O PCB LEDs (SFD Outputs), continued LA4-7 CD7

LA # Lit State Indicator LA4-8 CD8

LA3-1 HI/LO LA5-1 Not Used

LA3-2 HF/FB LA5-2 Not Used

LA3-3 CWR LA5-3 Not Used

LA3-4 LDAC LA5-4 Not Used

LA3-5 II Select LA5-5 Not Used

LA3-6 Not Used LA5-6 Not Used

LA3-7 Not Used LA5-7 Not Used

LA3-8 Not Used LA5-8 Not Used

LA4-1 CD1
LA4-2 CD2
LA4-3 CD3
LA4-4 CD4
LA4-5 CD5
LA4-6 CD6

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

I/O LEDs, continued LA # Lit State Indicator
Lower I/O PCB LEDs (SFD Outputs), continued LA7-7 Field 3

LA # Lit State Indicator LA7-8 Not Used

LA6-1 Not Used LA8-1 Not Used

LA6-2 Not Used LA8-2 Not Used

LA6-3 Not Used LA8-3 Not Used

LA6-4 Not Used LA8-4 Not Used

LA6-5 Not Used LA8-5 Not Used

LA6-6 Not Used LA8-6 Not Used

LA6-7 Not Used LA8-7 Not Used

LA6-8 Not Used LA8-8 Not Used

LA7-1 Not Used

LA7-2 Not Used
LA7-3 Park Release
LA7-4 Cone Release
LA7-5 Field 1
LA7-6 Field 2

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

I/O LEDs, continued LA # Lit State Indicator
Upper I/O PCB LEDs (SFD Inputs) LA2-7 H/F Mask

LA # Lit State Indicator LA2-8 Grid Home

LA1-1 Not Used LA3-1 F/B Size

LA1-2 Not Used LA3-2 F/B Cass Home

LA1-3 Not Used LA3-3 Not Used

LA1-4 Not Used LA3-4 H/F Size

LA1-5 Not Used LA3-5 Not Used

LA1-6 Not Used LA3-6 Not Used

LA1-7 Not Used LA3-7 Not Used

LA1-8 Not Used LA3-8 Not Used

LA2-1 H/F Cass Home

LA2-2 Not Used
LA2-3 SFD Locked
LA2-4 Not Used
LA2-5 F/B Mask
LA2-6 Cone Park

Continued on next page

1725 Spotfilm Device Troubleshooting, continued

I/O LEDS, continued LA # Lit State Indicator
Upper I/O PCB LEDs (SFD Inputs), continued LA5-8 Not Used

LA # Lit State Indicator LA6-1 Ml

LA4-1 Not Used LA6-2 M2

LA4-2 Not Used LA6-3 SFD SEL

LA4-3 Not Used LA6-4 Prep Foot Sw

LA4-4 Not Used LA6-5 F/B Cass Home

LA4-5 Not Used LA6-6 Not Used

LA4-6 Not Used LA6-7 Not Used

LA4-7 Not Used LA6-8 Not Used

LA4-8 Not Used LA7-1 REFE

LA5-1 Not Used LA7-2 EIP

LA5-2 Not Used LA7-3 Expose Foot Sw

LA5-3 Not Used LA7-4 Prep Ready

LA5-4 Not Used LA7-5 Not Used

LA5-5 Not Used LA7-6 Not Used

LA5-6 Not Used LA7-7 Not Used

LA5-7 Not Used LA7-8 Coil Ready

HOW TO USE THIS EPST

Select a topic:
Acrobat Reader 4.0 Controls
Linking and Navigation
Adding Your Personal Notes
Printing
About This EPST

Acrobat Reader 4.0 Controls

Here are some shortcut keystrokes for
Acrobat Reader 4.0:
[HOME] takes you to the first page of the EPST.
[PAGE UP], [PAGE DOWN]. and [END] work as titled.
[CTRL][←] takes you back to the previous display.
[CTRL][N] allows you to select a specific page number.
[F5] toggles the Bookmark display. Click on a Bookmark
to go there.
[F6] toggles the Thumbnail display.

Linking and Navigation

On the bottom of every page, you will find a linking tool For additional navigation options, you may use the
bar. Click on the section’s icon to take you to that section. Acrobat Reader bookmark feature. To display
In addition to the linking toolbar on each page, you will bookmarks:
find other links throughout the EPST.
1. Press [F5] or click on the PageWithLeftMargin button
on the Acrobat tool bar to open the Bookmark
Convention Link
window.
Blue text Takes you to supplemental
2. Click on the section or page listed in the Bookmark
information about that topic.
window that you wish to view.
See logic diagram XX Takes you to the specified logic/
block diagram. 3. Press [F5] or click on the PageWithLeftMargin button
Links to another area on the same
to close the Bookmark window.
block/logic diagram.
A
Note Not all of these have an
active link; they are linked only when
you need information you cannot
see on a particular part of a diagram.

Adding Your Personal Notes

To add your personal notes:To add your personal notes:
1. Click on the Notes icon.
Word opens a document.
2. Use the [TAB] key to navigate through the tables.
3. Type in the corresponding EPST page number and
your notes.
4. When you finish making your notes, save the file and
close Word.
5. To access your Notes, simply return to the EPST
and click on the Notes icon at the bottom of any
page.

Printing
1. On the Acrobat toolbar, select File, Print.
2. Select whether to print all pages, only the current
page, or a range of pages. (Default is Print All
Pages.)
3. Enable the "Shrink to Fit" option when printing the
11" x 17" block diagrams on 8.5" x 11" paper.
4. Click on OK to begin printing.

About This EPST

• The EPST is not intended to replace OEM system
documentation. It also does not cover every problem
or situation you may encounter while working on the
system. There are probably many situations in which
it may be helpful to refer to OEM system
documentation.
• The link icons located at the bottom of every page
usually take you to the first page of that section. When
a link icon takes you to a specific reference, the link
icon on the destination page will generally take you to
the first page of that section.
• The setup program will create a Word document for
your notes. The files are located at: c:/mvdi/
Epst_notes/fc1015/persnote/Notes
– Personal Notes cannot work if you move these
files; the path is hard-coded into the EPST.
– Personal Notes may not work when the computer
is networked.

SELF-PACED TRAINING MODULES

There is no self-paced training for the Picker
Elite 1500/5000 and MTX Generator EPST.

REFERENCE MATERIALS
Refer to your MTX Troubleshooting Manual when
troubleshooting the MTX.
There are no further reference materials available for this
EPST.

FEEDBACK TO AUTHOR
If you have comments or suggestions, please email them
to:
[email protected]

Alignment & Component Error Functional Logic & Block Preventive Software & Theory Trouble- Self-Paced Notes
Calibration Locations Codes Checks Diagrams Maintenance Diagnostics shooting Training

Loading DFI Software Rel 2
No ratings yet
Loading DFI Software Rel 2
6 pages
Picker Prism XP
No ratings yet
Picker Prism XP
193 pages
Sample Weld Audit Checklist
100% (2)
Sample Weld Audit Checklist
11 pages
Assignment 7.docx-2
No ratings yet
Assignment 7.docx-2
4 pages
VersiFlexVista English (20100824) PDF
No ratings yet
VersiFlexVista English (20100824) PDF
7 pages
Evolution of Product Management
No ratings yet
Evolution of Product Management
52 pages
FDA Draft Guidance - Diabetes Mellitus - Developing Drugs and Therapeutic Biologics For Treatment and Prevention
No ratings yet
FDA Draft Guidance - Diabetes Mellitus - Developing Drugs and Therapeutic Biologics For Treatment and Prevention
34 pages
Fuji Smart Crep ST
No ratings yet
Fuji Smart Crep ST
191 pages
8000 OTC18 SM - RevE
No ratings yet
8000 OTC18 SM - RevE
230 pages
Brilliance CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, 16 Power Configurations
No ratings yet
Brilliance CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, 16 Power Configurations
155 pages
Brilliance CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, 16 Power Configurations
No ratings yet
Brilliance CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, 16 Power Configurations
147 pages
Dar PDF
100% (1)
Dar PDF
476 pages
BR64 Ing. v2.6.x v3.x v4.x Upgrade To v4.1 wIMR Option Installation Manual
No ratings yet
BR64 Ing. v2.6.x v3.x v4.x Upgrade To v4.1 wIMR Option Installation Manual
381 pages
AcQSim - CT - Service - Wiring
No ratings yet
AcQSim - CT - Service - Wiring
1,101 pages
8000-3306B - Rev-B - 7-24-12 (ReducedHL)
No ratings yet
8000-3306B - Rev-B - 7-24-12 (ReducedHL)
132 pages
Early Tube Defect: Newsletter
No ratings yet
Early Tube Defect: Newsletter
5 pages
Generator Troubleshooting Adjustment
No ratings yet
Generator Troubleshooting Adjustment
13 pages
Brilliance 64 Channel Configuration v355
No ratings yet
Brilliance 64 Channel Configuration v355
193 pages
02Mx16Safety Rev03
No ratings yet
02Mx16Safety Rev03
14 pages
JUMONG VET Installation Manual - Ver1.1
No ratings yet
JUMONG VET Installation Manual - Ver1.1
41 pages
14MX16 Planned Maintenance Rev04
No ratings yet
14MX16 Planned Maintenance Rev04
17 pages
Carestream X-ray Generator Training - 6M1537 - Version 1
No ratings yet
Carestream X-ray Generator Training - 6M1537 - Version 1
117 pages
8000 OTC15 T RevE 180409
No ratings yet
8000 OTC15 T RevE 180409
256 pages
Digital Panoramic and Cephalometric System: User's Guide
No ratings yet
Digital Panoramic and Cephalometric System: User's Guide
53 pages
Multix Pro Top, MD Image System Retrofit CSTD Rxb1-150.805.01 Rxb1-140.814.02
No ratings yet
Multix Pro Top, MD Image System Retrofit CSTD Rxb1-150.805.01 Rxb1-140.814.02
240 pages
Installation: Melody Technical Manual
No ratings yet
Installation: Melody Technical Manual
22 pages
CT AURA SM-B - (01 (1) .2)
No ratings yet
CT AURA SM-B - (01 (1) .2)
23 pages
Coroskop Planning Guide
No ratings yet
Coroskop Planning Guide
86 pages
iSERV For SVCT16 - DOC2028794 - r1
No ratings yet
iSERV For SVCT16 - DOC2028794 - r1
9 pages
Shimadzu BK120 X-Ray Table - Wiring Diagram
No ratings yet
Shimadzu BK120 X-Ray Table - Wiring Diagram
21 pages
Principals of X-ray
No ratings yet
Principals of X-ray
36 pages
OEC One Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product Service Manual_SM_6888001-1EN_11
No ratings yet
OEC One Mobile C-Arm X-ray Product Service Manual_SM_6888001-1EN_11
189 pages
K8000c Installation Guide Sm736-Ed02-En
No ratings yet
K8000c Installation Guide Sm736-Ed02-En
54 pages
Siemens Siremobil 4 - Service Manual PDF
No ratings yet
Siemens Siremobil 4 - Service Manual PDF
327 pages
Axd3-370 844 01 03 02
No ratings yet
Axd3-370 844 01 03 02
26 pages
Technical Manual
No ratings yet
Technical Manual
117 pages
040
No ratings yet
040
22 pages
Install Inst, Premier Safe Shutdown: Artwork Consists of Two (2) 8 Inch X 11 Inch Pages
No ratings yet
Install Inst, Premier Safe Shutdown: Artwork Consists of Two (2) 8 Inch X 11 Inch Pages
3 pages
Pausch Uroview FD II CPI Indico IQ Operator Manual - UM - 905122 - M
No ratings yet
Pausch Uroview FD II CPI Indico IQ Operator Manual - UM - 905122 - M
112 pages
PM Achieba Check List
No ratings yet
PM Achieba Check List
9 pages
UDBL40 Service M501E372A
No ratings yet
UDBL40 Service M501E372A
64 pages
Room IN/OUT Interface RIO: Philips Healthcare
No ratings yet
Room IN/OUT Interface RIO: Philips Healthcare
41 pages
Optima NM/CT 640: Nuclear Medicine Imaging System
No ratings yet
Optima NM/CT 640: Nuclear Medicine Imaging System
147 pages
Site Planing
No ratings yet
Site Planing
213 pages
Pioneerpim02 (Eng)
No ratings yet
Pioneerpim02 (Eng)
86 pages
QDR 1000
No ratings yet
QDR 1000
317 pages
Mobile Network Device: 4550 191 02111 Revision D
100% (1)
Mobile Network Device: 4550 191 02111 Revision D
17 pages
SM7195-1 - Rev 7 - 20170424
No ratings yet
SM7195-1 - Rev 7 - 20170424
192 pages
Axa6-000 840 02 02 02
No ratings yet
Axa6-000 840 02 02 02
23 pages
Mobile X
No ratings yet
Mobile X
14 pages
MultiDiagnost Eleva FD Dicom R6.2
100% (2)
MultiDiagnost Eleva FD Dicom R6.2
112 pages
Collimator, Replacing The Focus-Near Plates CSTD AXB4-310.805.01 RX74-020.841.03
No ratings yet
Collimator, Replacing The Focus-Near Plates CSTD AXB4-310.805.01 RX74-020.841.03
14 pages
AJ6087 F - Carestream Focus Detector ServiceManual - en
No ratings yet
AJ6087 F - Carestream Focus Detector ServiceManual - en
64 pages
Part Number: MAN908080-00 MAN908080-01 Revision: K
No ratings yet
Part Number: MAN908080-00 MAN908080-01 Revision: K
261 pages
AQ_SRU_new
No ratings yet
AQ_SRU_new
22 pages
Landwind X-Ray Catalogue
No ratings yet
Landwind X-Ray Catalogue
7 pages
Kodak POC 140140 Servicemanual PDF
No ratings yet
Kodak POC 140140 Servicemanual PDF
154 pages
EP Workmate
No ratings yet
EP Workmate
26 pages
Trex Medical PDF
100% (1)
Trex Medical PDF
138 pages
Proline CC Spare Parts v13
No ratings yet
Proline CC Spare Parts v13
110 pages
HiSpeed ZXi Operator Manual
No ratings yet
HiSpeed ZXi Operator Manual
418 pages
MX 8000
No ratings yet
MX 8000
307 pages
Quad Physics File
No ratings yet
Quad Physics File
31 pages
Technical Publications: Revision 5
No ratings yet
Technical Publications: Revision 5
104 pages
TV-CAM-DIG-1K-ENG
No ratings yet
TV-CAM-DIG-1K-ENG
51 pages
V7TEE_SN76170_A_00
No ratings yet
V7TEE_SN76170_A_00
2 pages
FB050966
No ratings yet
FB050966
34 pages
EPC_INT_EP194422_02_00_02
No ratings yet
EPC_INT_EP194422_02_00_02
104 pages
KZ192822-01
No ratings yet
KZ192822-01
82 pages
ALL_SN_70325_C_00
No ratings yet
ALL_SN_70325_C_00
6 pages
BHI_UM_KZ292800_3_00
No ratings yet
BHI_UM_KZ292800_3_00
24 pages
6T8T9T_SN76106_0_00
No ratings yet
6T8T9T_SN76106_0_00
4 pages
ALL_SN_70328_A_00
No ratings yet
ALL_SN_70328_A_00
4 pages
Manual Utilizaçaoortophos Plus Cef Eng
No ratings yet
Manual Utilizaçaoortophos Plus Cef Eng
22 pages
SN_70358_0_00
No ratings yet
SN_70358_0_00
2 pages
V4_SN_78043_0_00
No ratings yet
V4_SN_78043_0_00
2 pages
Pickerdoc 1162369
No ratings yet
Pickerdoc 1162369
3 pages
Pickervector
No ratings yet
Pickervector
54 pages
User Manual EN
No ratings yet
User Manual EN
79 pages
meX+20BT User Manual Ver 2.1 ENG
No ratings yet
meX+20BT User Manual Ver 2.1 ENG
61 pages
Mex 20BTlite Mex 20BT Mex 40BT VET brochureEfHoNWZgCALn8
No ratings yet
Mex 20BTlite Mex 20BT Mex 40BT VET brochureEfHoNWZgCALn8
2 pages
Ministry For Youth Affairs 10 Vicariate Youth Day Group Registration Form
No ratings yet
Ministry For Youth Affairs 10 Vicariate Youth Day Group Registration Form
2 pages
Compact Hilbert Indices For Multi-Dimensional Data
No ratings yet
Compact Hilbert Indices For Multi-Dimensional Data
8 pages
Module 3 Case - Telco1
No ratings yet
Module 3 Case - Telco1
2 pages
Bread Factory-5l
No ratings yet
Bread Factory-5l
12 pages
Automatic Dish Wash Gel (Formulaiton #35284-029)
100% (1)
Automatic Dish Wash Gel (Formulaiton #35284-029)
2 pages
FINALE Prüfungstraining - Niedersachsen IGS E-Kurs Englisch 2023 - Transkripte
No ratings yet
FINALE Prüfungstraining - Niedersachsen IGS E-Kurs Englisch 2023 - Transkripte
5 pages
Wa0002.
No ratings yet
Wa0002.
3 pages
Asian Chess Federation Technical Handbook
No ratings yet
Asian Chess Federation Technical Handbook
41 pages
Basic Tutorial About CSS Program
No ratings yet
Basic Tutorial About CSS Program
2 pages
Microeconomics 7th Edition Perloff Solutions Manual 1
100% (79)
Microeconomics 7th Edition Perloff Solutions Manual 1
16 pages
Assignment 1 Itt300
No ratings yet
Assignment 1 Itt300
10 pages
Relationship Between Organizational Climate and Job Satisfaction Among Teachers in Terms of Area
No ratings yet
Relationship Between Organizational Climate and Job Satisfaction Among Teachers in Terms of Area
6 pages
Form 1 - AC Screening Form - Revised
No ratings yet
Form 1 - AC Screening Form - Revised
2 pages
03.step 2 Memahami Fungsi Bisnis - Step 3 Memahami Prinsip-Prinsip Desain UI Dan Layar Yang Baik
100% (1)
03.step 2 Memahami Fungsi Bisnis - Step 3 Memahami Prinsip-Prinsip Desain UI Dan Layar Yang Baik
55 pages
Harsh roy -Pawzz Offer Letter - C1
No ratings yet
Harsh roy -Pawzz Offer Letter - C1
11 pages
Committee System in Nigerian Public Tertiary Institutions: Problems and Way Forward
No ratings yet
Committee System in Nigerian Public Tertiary Institutions: Problems and Way Forward
9 pages
Basf Sokalan HP 53 Vs HP 56
No ratings yet
Basf Sokalan HP 53 Vs HP 56
8 pages
Tutor
100% (1)
Tutor
309 pages
Dos & Don'Ts For Investors
No ratings yet
Dos & Don'Ts For Investors
13 pages
Shoe Socks Format PDF
No ratings yet
Shoe Socks Format PDF
9 pages
PV-KK Blast Valve - Product Family
No ratings yet
PV-KK Blast Valve - Product Family
2 pages
TLE-ICT-Computer-Hardware-Servicing-LM Module 3RD QUARTER M8
No ratings yet
TLE-ICT-Computer-Hardware-Servicing-LM Module 3RD QUARTER M8
8 pages
MTH211A Problem Set-2
No ratings yet
MTH211A Problem Set-2
3 pages
Mutual Funds and Other Investment Companies
No ratings yet
Mutual Funds and Other Investment Companies
5 pages
Lec 6 - Variable Conversion Elements - 3
No ratings yet
Lec 6 - Variable Conversion Elements - 3
79 pages
Instruction For Completing The Summary of Bid Prices:: NEN Builders and Development Services Corp
No ratings yet
Instruction For Completing The Summary of Bid Prices:: NEN Builders and Development Services Corp
30 pages